97probe
97probe
Table of Contents 
Introduction .................................................... 1 
Instrumentation .............................................. 7 
Electronic Sound Systems ......................... 21 
Controls and Features ................................ 47 
Seating and Safety Restraints .................. 89 
Starting ......................................................... 125 
Driving ......................................................... 133 
Roadside Emergencies .............................. 155 
Maintenance and Care ............................. 183 
Capacities and Specifications ................. 237 
Reporting Safety Defects 
(U.S. Only) .................................................. 243 
Customer Assistance ................................. 245 
Accessories .................................................. 257 
Quick Index ................................................ 265 
Index ............................................................. 275 
Service Station Information .................... 292
Introductory Information 
Ford’s Commitment to You 
At Ford Motor Company, excellence is the continuous 
commitment to achieve the best result possible. It is dedication 
to learning what you want, determination to develop the right 
concept, and execution of that concept with care, precision, and 
attention to detail. In short, excellence means being the standard 
by which others are judged. 
Our Guiding Principles 
n Quality comes first. For your satisfaction, the quality of our 
1 
products and services must be our number one priority. 
n You are the focus of everything we do. Our work must be 
done with you in mind, providing better products and 
services than our competition. 
n Continuous improvement is essential to our success. We 
must strive for excellence in everything we do: in our 
products — in their safety and value — and in our services, 
our human relations, our competitiveness, and our 
profitability. 
n Employee involvement is our way of life. We are a team. 
We must treat one another with trust and respect. 
n Dealers and suppliers are our partners. We must maintain 
mutually beneficial relationships with dealers, suppliers, and 
our other business associates. 
n Integrity is never compromised. Our conduct worldwide 
must be pursued in a manner that is socially responsible and 
commands respect for its integrity and for its positive 
contributions to society.
Things to Know About Using This Guide 
Congratulations on the purchase of your new vehicle. This 
guide has information about the equipment and the options for 
your new vehicle. You may not have bought all of the options 
available to you. If you do not know which information applies 
to your vehicle, talk to your dealer. 
This guide describes equipment and gives specifications for 
equipment that was in effect when this guide was approved for 
printing. Ford may discontinue models or change specifications 
or design without any notice and without incurring obligation. 
NOTES and WARNINGS 
NOTES give you additional information about the subject 
matter you are referencing. 
WARNINGS remind you to be especially careful in those areas 
where carelessness can cause damage to your vehicle or 
personal injury to yourself, your passengers or other people. 
Please read all WARNINGS carefully. 
2 
RWARNING 
Finding Information in This Guide 
After you have read this guide once, you will probably return 
to it when you have a specific question or need additional 
information. To help you find specific information quickly, you 
can use the Quick Index, Table of Contents, or the Index. 
The Quick Index at the end of the book provides a page 
number following each item which indicates where detailed 
information can be found.
Introductory Information 
To use the Index, turn to the back of the book and search in the 
alphabetical listing for the word that best describes the 
information you need. If the word you chose is not listed, think 
of other related words and look them up. We have designed the 
Index so that you can find information under a technical term. 
Canadian Owners — French Version 
French Owner Guides can be obtained from your dealer or by 
writing to Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited, Service 
Publications, P.O. Box 1580, Station B, Mississauga, Ontario L4Y 
4G3. 
Your Maintenance Schedule and Record 
Booklet 
The Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet lists the services 
that are most important for keeping your vehicle in good 
condition. A record log is also provided to help you keep track 
of all services performed. 
About the Warranties 
Your vehicle is covered by three types of warranties: Basic 
Vehicle Warranty, Extended Warranties on certain parts, and 
Emissions Warranties. 
Read your Warranty Information Booklet carefully to find out 
about your vehicle’s warranties and your basic rights and 
responsibilities. 
If you lose your Warranty Information Booklet, you can get a new 
one free of charge. Contact any Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer, 
or refer to the addresses and phone numbers on the first page 
of this owner guide. 
3
Buying a Ford Extended Service Plan 
If you bought your vehicle in the U.S., you can buy a Ford 
Extended Service Plan for your vehicle. This optional contract 
provides service protection for a longer period of time than the 
basic warranty that comes with your vehicle. 
You do not have to buy this option when you buy your vehicle. 
However, your option to purchase the Ford Extended Service 
Plan runs out after 18 months or 18,000 miles. See your dealer 
for more details about the Ford Extended Service Plan. 
If you purchased a Canadian vehicle and did not take 
advantage of the Ford Extended Service Plan at the time of 
purchase, you may still be eligible. See your dealer for the 
details. 
Special Notice 
NOTICE TO OWNERS OF UTILITY-TYPE 
VEHICLES 
As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this 
vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or an accident. Be 
sure to read the Additional Special Driving Instructions for Utility 
Vehicles in this book and the special supplement included with 
four-wheel drive vehicles entitled 4-Wheeling with Ford. 
Although this special supplement is primarily directed to 
four-wheel drive vehicle operators, these principles of safe 
driving also apply to operators of the two-wheel drive Explorer. 
Even though you may not select a 4WD or AWD option for 
your Explorer, many of its operating characteristics are similar 
to those of a four-wheel drive vehicle. For this reason, Ford 
urges you to read and understand the contents of the 4-Wheeling 
with Ford supplement. 
4
Introductory Information 
5 
AMBULANCE PACKAGES 
RWARNING 
Do not use this vehicle as an ambulance. 
Breaking Your Vehicle In 
Your new vehicle goes through an adjustment or break-in 
period during the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) that you drive it. 
During the break-in period, you need to pay careful attention to 
how you drive your vehicle. 
n Avoid sudden stops. Because your vehicle has new brake 
linings, you should take these steps: 
— Watch traffic carefully so that you can anticipate when to 
stop. 
— Begin braking well in advance. 
— Apply the brakes gradually. 
The break-in period for new brake linings lasts for 100 miles 
(160 km) of city driving or 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of 
highway driving. 
n Wheel lug nuts must be retightened to proper torque 
specifications at 500 miles/800 km of new vehicle operation. 
Proper torque specifications are provided in this guide. Also 
retighten to proper torque specification at 500 miles/800 km 
after any wheel change or any other time the wheel lug nuts 
have been loosened. 
n Use only the type of engine oil that Ford recommends. See 
Engine oil recommendations in the Index. Do not use special 
“break-in” oils.
Some vehicles are equipped with a Powertrain Control Module 
that limits engine speeds with a cut-out mode to promote 
durability. 
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle 
Pollen, bird droppings and tree sap can damage the paint, 
especially in hot weather. Wash your vehicle as often as 
necessary to keep it clean. 
Take similar precautions if your vehicle is exposed to chemical 
industrial fallout. 
Paint damage resulting from fallout is not related to a defect in 
paint materials or workmanship and therefore is not covered by 
warranty. Ford, however, believes that continual improvement 
in customer satisfaction is a high priority. For this reason, Ford 
has authorized its dealers to repair, at no charge to the owner, 
the surfaces of new vehicles damaged by environmental fallout 
within 12 months or 12,000 miles (20,000 km) of purchase, 
whichever comes first. Customers may be required to bring their 
vehicle in for inspection by a Ford representative. 
Washing and Polishing Your Vehicle 
Wash the outside of your vehicle, including the underside, with 
a mild detergent. 
DO NOT: 
n Wash your vehicle with hot water 
n Wash your vehicle while it sits in direct sunlight 
n Wash your vehicle while the body is hot 
Polish your vehicle to remove harmful deposits and protect the 
finish. 
6
Introductory Information 
Cleaning Chrome and Aluminum Parts 
Wash chrome and aluminum parts with a mild detergent. Do 
not use steel wool, abrasive cleaners, fuel or strong detergents. 
Cleaning Plastic Parts 
Some of your vehicle’s exterior trim parts are plastic. Clean with 
a tar and road oil remover if necessary. Use a vinyl cleaner for 
routine cleaning. 
Do not clean plastic parts with thinners, solvents or 
petroleum-based cleaners. 
If you have your vehicle rustproofed, remove oversprayed 
rustproofing with a tar and road oil remover. If rustproofing is 
not removed from plastic and rubber parts, it can cause 
deterioration. 
Because your vehicle’s side mouldings are painted in lacquer, do 
not use thinners or solvents to clean them. 
7
7 
Instrumentation 
The instrument panel (dashboard) on your 
vehicle is divided into several different sections. 
The illustrations on the following pages show 
the major parts of the instrument panel that are 
described in this chapter. Some items shown 
may not be on all vehicles. 
In your vehicle, the warning lights and gauges 
are grouped together on the instrument panel. 
We call this grouping an instrument cluster.
The Mechanical Cluster 
Instrument cluster 
8
9 
Warning light locations on the instrument cluster
The instrument cluster on the Probe GT model is 
similar to the one shown. The two exceptions 
are: the speedometer on the GT model shows 
140 mph (225 km/h) and it has a 7,000 rpm 
red-line tachometer. 
GT model speedometer and tachometer 
The following warning lights and gauges are on 
the cluster. All of the warning lights and gauges 
alert you to possible problems with your vehicle. 
The following sections detail what each of these 
indicators means. 
10
Indicator Lights and Chimes 
Safety Belt Warning Light and Chime 
This warning light and chime remind you to 
fasten your safety belt. If you do not fasten your 
safety belt before the ignition is turned to ON, 
the chime will sound for 4 to 8 seconds and the 
warning light will illuminate for 1 to 2 minutes, 
or until the safety belt is fastened. If you fasten 
the safety belt before the ignition is turned to 
ON, neither the light nor chime will activate. 
Safety belt light 
Air Bag Readiness Light 
This light illuminates for six seconds when the 
ignition is turned to the ON position. If the light 
fails to illuminate, continues to flash, remains on, 
or if a series of five beeps is heard, have the 
system serviced as soon as possible. 
11 
Air bag readiness light
12 
RWARNING 
If any of these things happen, even 
intermittently, have the air bag system 
serviced at your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury 
dealer immediately. 
Brake System Warning Light 
Your vehicle has a divided brake system. If one 
part isn’t working, the other part can still work 
and stop you. For good braking, though, you 
need both systems working well. If the warning 
light illuminates, there could be a problem. Have 
your brake system inspected right away. 
This light should illuminate as you start the 
vehicle. If it doesn’t illuminate then, have it 
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s a 
problem. 
Brake system and parking brake light 
This light illuminates briefly when you turn the 
ignition key to START. It normally goes off 
shortly after the engine starts and you release 
the parking brake, but it may stay on for up to 
60 seconds. If the light stays on for longer than 
60 seconds or comes on after you have fully 
released the parking brake, have the hydraulic 
brake system serviced.
This light will also illuminate if the parking 
brake does not release fully. If it does stay on 
after the parking brake is fully released, it 
means there may be a brake problem. Pull off 
the road and stop carefully. You may notice that 
the pedal is harder to push, the pedal may go 
closer to the floor, or it may take longer to stop 
the vehicle. Try the brakes again after you have 
stopped. 
13 
RWARNING 
The BRAKE light indicates that the brakes 
may not be working properly. Have the 
brakes checked immediately. 
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light 
When the ignition switch is turned to the ON 
position, the anti-lock brake system warning 
light will illuminate. When the engine is started, 
the anti-lock brake system control unit will 
determine if all components of the system are 
operating correctly. The warning light could 
remain on for two to four seconds. 
The anti-lock brake system warning light 
RWARNING 
If the anti-lock brake system warning 
light remains on or comes on while 
driving, have the braking system checked 
by a qualified service technician as soon 
as possible.
NOTE: If a fault occurs in the anti-lock 
14 
system, and the brake warning light is 
not lit, the anti-lock system is disabled 
but normal brake function remains 
operational. 
NOTE: If your vehicle must be jump-started 
because of a low battery, the Anti-Lock 
Brake System warning light could 
remain on. This is due to low battery 
voltage and does not indicate a 
malfunction in the system. Under these 
circumstances, you should drive your 
vehicle only after the battery has had 
time to charge and the light has gone 
out. 
The Low Fuel Light 
This light illuminates when fuel level in your 
tank has reached approximately 2-3 gallons (7-10 
liters). 
Low fuel light
15 
High Beam Light 
This light illuminates when the headlamps are 
turned to high beam or when you flash the 
lights. 
High beam light 
Check Engine Warning Light 
This light illuminates when the electronic engine 
control system is not working properly. This is 
the computer that controls the operating 
conditions of the engine. 
Check engine warning light 
This light illuminates briefly when you turn the 
ignition to the ON position, but should turn off 
when the engine starts. If the light does not 
come on when you turn the ignition to the ON 
position or if it comes on and stays on when 
you are driving, have your vehicle serviced as 
soon as possible. This indicates a possible 
problem with one of the engine’s emission 
control systems. You do not need to have your 
vehicle towed in.
If the light flashes briefly while you are driving, 
it means that the condition is no longer present. 
O/D OFF Light (If equipped) 
This light tells you that the overdrive off (O/D 
OFF) button on the shift selector has been 
pushed. When the light is on, the transaxle will 
not shift into overdrive. Depressing the button 
on the shift selector again will return the vehicle 
to “overdrive on” mode. The transaxle will be in 
the “overdrive on” mode when the vehicle is 
started even if the O/D OFF mode was selected 
when the vehicle was last shut off. Refer to the 
Driving chapter for more information. 
If the light does not illuminate when the O/D 
OFF button is pressed, or if the light flashes 
when you are driving, have your vehicle 
serviced at the first opportunity. If this condition 
persists, damage could occur to the transaxle. 
Overdrive OFF light 
Gauges 
Fuel Gauge 
The fuel gauge displays approximately how 
much fuel you have in the fuel tank. 
The ignition must be turned off while putting 
fuel in the tank in order to get a correct fuel 
gauge reading after the ignition is turned on. 
16
The fuel gauge indicator may vary slightly while 
the vehicle is in motion. This is the result of fuel 
movement within the tank. You can get a more 
accurate reading with the vehicle on smooth, 
level ground. 
Charging System Gauge 
This gauge tells you your battery’s voltage when 
you turn your ignition key to ON. When you 
start your engine, the pointer should move to 
the NORMAL range if you are not operating 
any electrical accessories. (If electrical accessories 
are operating and the engine is not running, the 
pointer may move into the red area). 
If the pointer moves into the red area when no 
electrical accessories are operating, have the 
vehicle’s electrical system checked. 
Engine Oil Pressure Gauge 
The gauge needle should stay in the NORMAL 
range (indicating normal engine oil pressure). If 
the needle drops below the NORMAL range into 
the low range, there is a loss of oil pressure. 
If this happens: 
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible. 
2. Shut off the engine immediately or severe 
17 
engine damage could result. 
3. Check the oil level when the vehicle is on 
level ground. 
4. Add only as much oil as the engine needs 
before you drive the vehicle again. Do not 
overfill the oil reservoir. For more 
information, see Adding engine oil in the 
Index.
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge 
This gauge indicates the temperature of the 
engine coolant, not the coolant level. If the 
coolant is not at its proper level or mixture, the 
gauge indication will not be accurate. 
The pointer usually moves from C (cold) into 
the NORMAL band as your vehicle warms up. 
Under most driving conditions, the pointer 
should stay in the NORMAL band. If you are 
driving in heavy traffic or on an extended grade 
in hot weather, the pointer may reach to the top 
of the NORMAL band. 
If, under any circumstances, the pointer moves 
above the NORMAL band, the engine is 
overheating and continued operation may cause 
engine damage. 
If your engine overheats: 
1. Pull off the road as soon as it is safely 
18 
possible. 
2. Shut off the engine immediately or severe 
engine damage could result. 
3. Let the engine cool. 
4. Check the coolant level following the 
instructions on checking and adding coolant 
to your engine. (See Engine coolant in the 
Index.) If you do not follow these 
instructions, you or others could be injured. 
For instructions on checking and adding coolant 
to your engine, see Engine coolant in the Index. If 
you do not follow these instructions, you or 
others could be injured.
19 
5. Refer to Adding Engine Coolant in the 
Maintenance and Care chapter. Add as much 
coolant as your engine needs. If the engine 
continues to overheat, have the cooling 
system serviced. 
Speedometer 
The speedometer tells you how many miles 
(kilometers) per hour your vehicle is moving. 
Odometer 
The odometer tells you the total number of miles 
(kilometers) your vehicle has been driven. 
Trip Odometer 
Use the trip odometer to track your mileage. 
Simply set the trip odometer to zero by pressing 
the reset button. 
Tachometer 
The tachometer indicates approximate engine 
revolutions per minute, and is located on the 
right-hand side of the instrument cluster. The 
tachometer pointer may move slightly when the 
key is placed in the ACC or ON position, with 
the engine off. This pointer movement is normal, 
and will not affect the accuracy of the 
tachometer once the engine is running.
21 
Electronic Sound Systems 
Compact Disc Radio
Compact Disc Radio 
The Compact Disc Radio combines the Electronic 
Stereo Radio with the Ford Compact Disc Player. 
Using the Controls on Your New Radio/CD 
Player 
Most of the features of this unit work for both 
radio and CD operation, depending on which 
mode the unit is in. Also, some of the buttons 
control several different functions, so be sure to 
read all of the operating instructions carefully. 
How to turn the radio on and off 
Press the “POWER” button to turn the radio on. 
Press it again to turn it off. 
How to adjust the volume 
Press the (R/S) side of the “VOL” button to 
increase/decrease the volume. Bars illuminate in 
the display to show the relative volume level. 
NOTE: If the volume level is set above a 
22 
certain listening level when the 
ignition switch is turned off, when the 
ignition switch is turned back on, the 
volume will come back to a “nominal” 
listening level. However, if the radio 
power is turned off, the volume will 
remain in the position it was set at 
when radio power was switched off. 
Selecting the AM or FM frequency band 
Push the “AM/FM” button to select the desired 
frequency band. When in the radio mode, 
pushing the button more than once will alternate 
between AM, FM1 and FM2. These functions are 
used with the station memory buttons described 
under How to tune radio stations.
How to tune radio stations 
There are four ways for you to tune in a 
particular station. You can manually locate the 
station using the “SCAN/TUNE” button, 
“SEEK” the station, “SCAN” to the station or 
select the station by using the memory buttons, 
which you can set to any desired frequency. 
These four methods are described below. 
qUsing the “SCAN/TUNE” button to manually 
tune 
You can change the frequency up or down 
one increment at a time (FM changes in 
increments of 200kHz; AM changes in 
increments of 10kHz) by first pressing the 
“SCAN/TUNE” button twice (display shows 
“TUNE”), then — within approximately five 
seconds —pressing and releasing either the 
top (b) or bottom (a) half of the “SEEK” 
button. To change frequencies quickly, press 
and hold down either the top or bottom half 
of the “SEEK” button. 
Manual tuning adjusts your radio to any 
allowable broadcast frequency, whether or 
not a station is present on that frequency. 
(See All About Radio Frequencies in this 
section.) 
qUsing the “SEEK” function 
This feature on your radio allows you to 
automatically select listenable stations up or 
down the frequency band. Press the top (a) 
half of the “SEEK” button to select the next 
listenable station up the frequency band. 
Press the bottom (b) half of the button to 
select the next listenable station down the 
frequency band. By pressing and holding the 
button, listenable stations can be passed over 
to reach the desired station. 
23
qUsing the “SCAN/TUNE” button to scan 
radio stations 
Pressing the “SCAN/TUNE” button once 
enters the scan mode (display will indicate 
“SCN”). Pushing the top (a) half of the 
“SEEK” button will begin the scan mode up 
the frequency band, stopping on each 
listenable station for approximately five 
seconds. Pushing the bottom (b) half of the 
“SEEK” button will begin the scan mode 
down the frequency band, again stopping on 
each listenable station for approximately five 
seconds. 
To stop the scan mode on the presently 
sampled station, press the “SCAN/TUNE” 
button again. 
qSetting the Station Memory Preset buttons 
24 
Your radio is equipped with 5 station 
memory buttons. These buttons can be used 
to select up to 5 preset AM stations and 10 
FM stations (5 in FM1 and 5 in FM2). Follow 
the easy steps below to set these buttons to 
the desired frequencies. 
1. Select a band, then select a frequency. 
2. Press one of the memory preset buttons and 
hold the button until the sound returns. That 
station is now held in memory on that 
button. 
3. Follow the two steps above for each station 
memory preset button you want to set. 
NOTE: If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected, 
the clock and station memory preset 
buttons will need to be reset.
25 
qUsing the Automatic Memory Load feature 
You can activate the Auto Memory Load 
feature by pressing and holding the “AUTO 
PRESET” button for approximately three 
seconds. Auto Memory Load sets all memory 
buttons in AM, FM1 and FM2 sequentially by 
seeking out the first five strong stations for 
the respective band and storing them in 
memory buttons 1-5. (FM2 will store the 
second set of strong stations from the FM 
band.) 
With Auto Memory Store, you can continually 
set strong stations into your memory buttons 
without losing your existing memory presets, 
which is especially helpful while traveling. Your 
radio will automatically set your memory 
buttons to the strong local stations so you don’t 
have to continually manually tune to existing 
stations. 
Activate Auto Memory Store by pushing the 
“AUTO PRESET” button once. Your radio will 
set the first five strong stations of the band you 
are in (AM, FM1 or FM2) into the memory 
buttons. The display will show “AUTO,” then 
run through the frequencies, stopping 
momentarily on the stations being set into the 
memory buttons. The radio is now in the 
“AUTO” mode and the display will show 
“AUTO” each time a preset is activated. 
NOTE: If there are fewer than five strong 
stations in the frequency band, the 
remaining unfilled buttons will store 
the last strong station detected on the 
band. 
After all stations have been filled, the radio will 
begin playing the station stored on memory 
button 1.
To deactivate the Auto Memory Store mode and 
return to the manually-set memory button 
stations (or those stations set using Auto 
Memory Load), simply push the “AUTO 
PRESET” button. Display will show “AUTO” 
then “OFF.” The next time Auto Memory Store 
is activated on that band, the radio will store the 
next set of five strong stations. 
Using the “AUDIO” button to adjust the 
tone balance and speaker output 
qIncreasing or decreasing bass response 
Push the “AUDIO” button repeatedly until 
the display reads “BASS.” Push the “+” side 
of the “VOL” button to increase bass (more 
“lows”), and push the “-” side to decrease 
bass (less “lows”). 
qIncreasing or decreasing treble response 
Push the “AUDIO” button repeatedly until 
the display reads “TREB.” Push the “+” side 
of the “VOL” button to increase treble (more 
“highs”), and push the “-” side to decrease 
treble (less “highs”). 
qAdjusting speaker balance 
26 
Balance control allows you to adjust the 
sound distribution between the right and left 
speakers. Push the “AUDIO” button 
repeatedly until the display reads “BAL.” 
Push the “+” side of the “VOL” button to 
shift the sound to the right speakers, and 
push the “-” side to shift the sound to the 
left speakers.
27 
qAdjusting speaker fader 
Fade control allows you to adjust the sound 
distribution between the front and rear 
speakers. Push the “AUDIO” button 
repeatedly until the display reads “FADE.” 
Push the “+” side of the “VOL” button to 
shift the sound to the front speakers, and 
push the “-” side to shift the sound to the 
rear speakers. 
NOTE: Illuminated bars in the display show 
relative levels of bass and treble and 
positions of speaker balance and fader 
functions after adjustments are made, 
then revert to volume level set. 
Clock operation 
When in the radio mode, push the “CLOCK” 
button to switch from radio frequency to clock. 
Only the clock numerals will be displayed in the 
clock mode — there is no A.M./P.M. indication. 
When in the clock mode, the time will be 
displayed until the button is pushed again. 
However, if you retune the radio while it is in 
the clock mode, the new radio frequency will be 
displayed for approximately ten seconds and 
then change back to clock. 
When in the CD mode, push the “CLOCK” 
button to change the display from elapsed time 
mode to track number mode to clock mode. If 
the CD track selection is changed when you are 
in the clock or elapsed time mode, the new track 
number will be displayed for approximately ten 
seconds and then revert back to the previous 
mode.
To set the clock, simultaneously press the 
“CLOCK” button and either the bottom (b) half 
of the “SEEK” button to set hours, or the top 
(a) half of the “SEEK” button to set minutes. 
Using the Controls on Your New Compact 
Disc Player 
Your new Ford Compact Disc Player is capable 
of playing 12 cm or 8 cm discs, without an 
adapter. The player operates when the power is 
on and a disc is inserted (label side up). Handle 
the disc by its edge only. (Be sure to read and 
follow all of the care and cleaning instructions 
under How To Take Care of and Clean Your CD 
Player and Discs.) 
NOTE: If after you insert a disc, the disc is 
28 
ejected and “ERROR” begins scrolling 
in the display, remove the disc and 
reinsert it right side up (label side up). 
The digital display on your CD player will 
either show the track (selection) number or the 
elapsed time. (The display mode can be selected 
by pressing the “CLOCK” button.) Indicators for 
play (a), stop (X) and compression on (“C”) 
are also in the display. (These features are 
described later.) 
Once a disc is inserted, operation of the CD 
player will override that of the radio. 
NOTE: The volume, bass, treble, balance and 
fader controls on the radio are also 
used with the CD player. Refer to 
earlier operating instructions on these 
controls.
29 
How to insert a disc and begin play 
Insert one disc, label side up into the disc 
opening. When inserted, the disc automatically 
loads into the unit and play starts at the 
beginning of the first track (selection). 
When the disc reaches the end, the disc player 
automatically returns to the beginning of the 
disc and resumes playing. 
NOTE: Once a disc is inserted, the disc 
opening is secured to prevent the 
accidental insertion of a second disc. 
NOTE: The CD player has heat protection 
circuitry to protect the laser diode. If 
the temperature of the player reaches 
167°F (75°C), the heat detection circuit 
will shut off the player and “TOO 
HOT” will scroll in the display for 
approximately five seconds (radio will 
resume playing). When the temperature 
returns to normal operating range, the 
CD player will again be operational. 
How to stop and restart the CD player 
When a disc is loaded, the unit automatically 
enters the play mode and the play indicator (a) 
illuminates. To stop temporarily, press the 
“PLAY/STOP” button or the “AM/FM” button. 
The stop indicator (X) in the display illuminates 
and operation returns to the radio mode. To 
resume CD play, press the “PLAY/STOP” 
button once again. 
NOTE: If the ignition key is turned OFF 
during play and then is set to the ON 
or ACCESSORY position, the CD 
player will resume playing in the mode 
it was in when ignition was turned off.
Using the “SEEK” feature 
The “SEEK” feature allows you to quickly find a 
particular selection on the disc. 
Press the bottom (b) half of the “SEEK” button 
once to repeat the current playing selection. 
Press the top (a) half of the “SEEK” button to 
advance to the next selection. 
Pressing and holding the bottom (b) or top (a) 
half of the “SEEK” button will scroll backward 
and forward respectively through the tracks. 
How to fast forward or reverse your CD 
player 
To quickly search for a particular point in a 
selection, press the “FF” button (to fast forward) 
or the “REV” button (to reverse). While either 
button is pressed, the disc goes forward or 
backward at two different speeds depending on 
how long the button is held down. (Pressing 
either button for more than three seconds will 
speed up the process.) Release the button at the 
desired point (found by watching the elapsed 
playing time in the display or by listening to the 
sound during fast forward or reverse). When 
you have reached the beginning of track 1, the 
CD player will begin playing. 
When you have reached the end of the disc by 
keeping the fast forward button pressed, the 
display will show “END” and the player will go 
into pause mode. Push the “PLAY/STOP” 
button to begin playing the first track of the 
disc, press the “REV” button to back up from 
the end of the disc, or use the “SEEK” function 
to locate a desired track. 
30
Using the “SCAN” function 
Press the “SCAN/TUNE” button to enter the 
scan mode. Once in the scan mode, press the top 
(b) or bottom (a) half of the “SEEK” button to 
scan forward or reverse, respectively. The CD 
player will begin scanning the disc, stopping on 
each listenable track for approximately an 
eight-second sampling. This continues until you 
press the “SCAN/TUNE” button a second time. 
How to eject the disc 
Push the “EJECT” button to stop play, eject the 
disc and resume radio operation of your audio 
system. 
NOTE: You can eject the disc while the radio 
31 
power and/or ignition is on or off. 
How To Take Care of and Clean Your CD 
Player and Discs 
To ensure the continued performance of your 
Ford Compact Disc Player, carefully read the 
following precautions: 
qAlways handle the disc by its edge. Never 
touch the playing surface. 
qBefore playing, inspect the disc for any 
contamination. If needed, clean the disc with 
an approved disc cleaner, such as the 
DiscwasherH Compact Disc Cleaner or the 
Allsop 3H Compact Disc Cleaner, by wiping 
from the center out to the edges. Do not use 
a circular motion to clean. 
qDo not clean discs with solvents such as 
benzine, thinner, commercially available 
cleaners or antistatic spray intended for 
analog records.
qDo not expose the disc to direct sunlight or 
heat sources such as defroster and floor 
heating ducts. Do not leave any discs in a 
parked car in direct sunlight where there may 
be a considerable rise in temperature or 
damage may result. 
qAfter playing, store the disc in its case. 
qIf a disc has already been inserted, do not try 
to insert another disc. Doing so may damage 
the disc player. 
qDo not insert anything other than a disc into 
the disc player. 
NOTE: The use of optical instruments with 
32 
this product will increase eye hazard as 
the laser beam used in this compact 
disc player is harmful to the eyes. Do 
not attempt to disassemble the case. 
Refer servicing to qualified personnel 
only. 
Common Operating Conditions of Your 
CD Player 
The following information is designed to help 
you recognize typical situations that could be 
mistakenly interpreted as mechanical 
malfunctions of the disc player. 
qA disc is already loaded. 
qThe disc is inserted with the label surface 
downward. 
qThe disc is dusty or defective. 
qThe player’s internal temperature is above 
140°F (60°C). Allow the player to cool off 
before operating.
qDifferent manufacturers of compact discs may 
produce discs with different dimensions or 
tolerances, some of which may not be within 
industry standards or in accordance with the 
CD format. Because of this, a new disc that is 
free of dust and scratches could be defective 
and may not play on your Ford Compact 
Disc Player. 
If play does not begin after the CD button is 
pushed: 
qThe radio is not on. 
qThe unit is in the stop mode. 
qMoisture may have condensed on the lenses 
within the unit. If this occurs, remove the 
disc and wait approximately an hour until the 
moisture evaporates. 
33 
If the sound skips: 
qBadly scratched discs or extremely rough 
roads will cause the sound to skip. Skipping 
will not damage the disc player or scratch the 
discs.
Electronic Stereo and Stereo 
Cassette Radios 
Electronic Stereo Radio 
34
35 
Electronic Stereo Radio with Cassette
Using the Controls on Your New Radio 
How to turn the radio on and adjust the 
volume 
Press the “POWER” button to turn the radio on. 
Press it again to turn it off. 
Press the right (+) side of the “VOLUME” 
button to increase the volume. Press the left (S) 
side of the button to decrease the volume. 
Illuminated bars in the display show the relative 
volume level. 
NOTE: If the volume level is set above a 
36 
certain listening level when the 
ignition switch is turned off, when the 
ignition switch is turned back on, the 
volume will come back to a “nominal” 
listening level. However, if the radio 
power is turned off, the volume will 
remain in the position it was set at 
when radio power was switched off. 
Selecting the AM or FM frequency band 
Push the “AM/FM” button to select the desired 
frequency band. Pushing the button more than 
once will alternate between AM, FM1 and FM2. 
These functions are used with the station 
memory buttons described under How to tune 
radio stations. 
How to tune radio stations (Stereo Radio) 
There are three ways for you to tune in to a 
particular station. You can manually locate the 
station by using the “TUNE” button, “SEEK” the 
station or select the station by using the memory 
preset buttons, which you can set to any desired 
frequency.
How to tune radio stations (Stereo Cassette 
Radio) 
There are four ways for you to tune in to a 
particular station. You can manually locate the 
station by using Automatic Music Search 
“AMS”, “SEEK” the station, “SCAN” to the 
station or select the station by using the memory 
buttons, which you can set to any desired 
frequency. 
qUsing the “TUNE” function (Stereo Radio) 
You can change the frequency up or down 
one increment at a time by pressing and 
releasing either the right (+) or left (S) side 
of the “TUNE” button. To change frequencies 
quickly, press and hold down either the right 
or left side of the “TUNE” button. 
Manual tuning adjusts your radio to any 
allowable broadcast frequency, whether or 
not a station is present on that frequency. 
(See All About Radio Frequencies in this 
section.) 
qUsing the “AMS” function to manually tune 
your radio (Stereo Cassette Radio) 
You can change the frequency up or down 
one increment at a time by first pressing the 
“AMS” button (display shows “TUNE”) then 
within approximately five seconds pressing 
and releasing either the right a or left b 
side of the “SEEK” button. To change 
frequencies quickly, press and hold down 
either the right or left side of the “SEEK” 
button. 
37
qUsing the “SEEK” function 
This feature on your radio allows you to 
automatically select listenable stations up or 
down the frequency band. Press the right a 
side of the “SEEK” button to select the next 
listenable station up the frequency band. 
Press the left b side of the button to select 
the next listenable station down the 
frequency band. By holding the button down, 
listenable stations can be passed over to reach 
the desired station. 
qUsing the “SCAN” function (Stereo Cassette 
Radio) 
Press the “SCAN” button to enter the scan 
mode. The radio will begin scanning up the 
frequency band, stopping on each listenable 
station for approximately a five-second 
sampling. This continues until you press the 
“SCAN” button a second time. 
qSetting the Station Memory Preset buttons 
38 
Your radio is equipped with 5 station 
memory buttons. These buttons can be used 
to select up to 5 preset AM stations and 10 
preset FM stations (5 in FM1 and 5 in FM2). 
Follow the easy steps below to set these buttons 
to the desired frequencies: 
1. Select a band, then select a frequency. 
2. Press one of the memory preset buttons and 
hold the button until the sound returns. That 
station is now held in memory on that 
button. 
3. Follow the two steps above for each station 
memory preset button you want to set.
NOTE: If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected, 
39 
the clock and station memory preset 
buttons will need to be reset. 
Adjusting the tone balance and speaker 
output of your radio 
qIncreasing or decreasing bass response 
Push the “AUDIO” button repeatedly until 
the display reads “BASS.” Push the right (+) 
side of the “VOLUME” button to increase 
bass (more “lows”), and push the left (S) 
side to decrease bass (less “lows”). 
qIncreasing or decreasing treble response 
Push the “AUDIO” button repeatedly until 
the display reads “TREB.” Push the right (+) 
side of the “VOLUME” button to increase the 
treble (more “highs”), and push the left (S) 
side to decrease treble (less “highs”). 
Speaker features and operation 
qAdjusting speaker balance 
Balance control allows you to adjust the 
sound distribution between the right and left 
speakers. Push the “AUDIO” button 
repeatedly until the display reads “BAL.” 
Push the right (+) side of the “VOLUME” 
button to shift the sound to the right 
speakers, and push the left (S) side to shift 
the sound to the left speakers.
qAdjusting speaker fader 
40 
Fade control allows you to adjust the sound 
distribution between the front and rear 
speakers. Push the “AUDIO” button 
repeatedly until the display reads “FADE.” 
Push the right (+) side of the “VOLUME” 
button to shift the sound to the front 
speakers, and push the left (S) side to shift 
the sound to the rear speakers. 
NOTE: Illuminated bars in the display show 
relative levels of bass and treble and 
positions of speaker balance and fader 
functions after adjustments are made, 
then revert to volume level set. 
Using the Controls of Your Cassette Tape 
Player (If equipped) 
How to insert a tape 
Insert a cassette (with the open edge to the 
right) firmly into the tape door opening, making 
sure the cassette is completely in and “seated.” 
NOTE: A cassette tape can be loaded with the 
ignition on whether or not the radio 
power is on. Inserting a cassette tape 
with the radio power off will turn the 
audio system on. After the cassette is 
ejected, radio play will return. 
How to locate a desired track on the tape 
NOTE: The tape track or side number 
indicated in the display does not 
necessarily correspond to the tape track 
or side number on the cassette label. It 
is used only to indicate when the tape 
mechanism reverses tracks.
qUsing the Automatic Music Search (“AMS”) 
function with cassette tape player 
Press and hold the “AMS” button (“AMS” will 
appear in the display). Then, push the lefth 
button to rewind to the beginning of the current 
selection or press the rightgbutton to fast 
forward to the beginning of the next selection. 
qFast forwarding the tape 
41 
Push the rightgbutton to fast forward 
the tape. 
qRewinding the tape 
Push the lefthbutton to rewind the tape. 
qHow to change the side of the tape being 
played 
The alternate track (other side) of the tape 
can be selected at any time by pushing both 
fast-wind buttons (handg) at the 
same time. The number in the display will 
alternate between 1 and 2. 
How to eject the tape 
To stop the tape and eject the cassette, press the 
eject (i) button. The radio will resume playing. 
Using the DolbyH B noise reduction feature 
NOTE: Noise reduction system manufactured 
under license from Dolby Labs 
Licensing Corporation. “Dolby” and 
double-D symbol are trademarks of 
Dolby Laboratories Licensing 
Corporation. 
Push station memory button 3 to activate DolbyH 
B Noise Reduction.
Tips on Caring for the Cassette Player and 
Tapes 
In order to keep your cassette tape player 
performing the way it was meant to, read and 
follow these simple precautions: 
qUsing a Ford or equivalent cassette cleaning 
cartridge to clean the tape player head after 
10-12 hours of play will help maintain the 
best playback sound and proper tape 
operation. 
qOnly cassettes that are 90 minutes long or 
less should be used. Tapes longer than 90 
minutes are thinner and subject to breakage 
or may jam the tape player mechanism. 
qProtect cassettes from exposure to direct 
sunlight, high humidity and extreme heat or 
cold. If they are exposed to extreme 
conditions, allow them to reach a moderate 
temperature before playing. 
qIf a tape is loose inside the cassette, tighten it 
before playing by putting your finger or a 
pencil into one of the holes and turning the 
hub until the tape is tight. 
qLoose labels on cassette tapes can become 
lodged in the mechanism. Remove any loose 
label material before inserting a cassette. 
qDo not leave a tape in the cassette tape 
player when not in use. High heat in the 
vehicle can cause the cassette to warp. 
42
Clock Operation 
How to view the clock mode 
Press the “CLOCK” button to alternate the 
frequency and time in the display. In the clock 
mode, pressing any radio function will 
automatically display the radio frequency for 
approximately ten seconds before changing back 
to the clock mode. 
How to set the clock 
1. Turn the radio on. 
2. Press and hold in the “CLOCK” button. 
Press the “SEEK” button left (b) to advance 
the hours and right (a) to advance the 
minutes. 
43 
NOTE: The clock displays 12-hour time with 
no AM/PM indications. 
Radio Antenna 
The radio antenna is mounted on the rear 
passenger side quarter panel of the vehicle. It is 
a fixed mast antenna and cannot be retracted. 
Common Radio Reception Conditions 
Several conditions prevent FM reception from 
being completely clear and noise-free, such as 
the following: 
1. Distance/Strength 
The strength of the FM signal is directly related 
to the distance the signal must travel. The 
listenable range of an average FM signal is 
approximately 25 miles (40 kilometers). Beyond 
this distance, the radio is operating in a fringe 
area and the signal becomes weaker.
2. Terrain 
The terrain (hilly, mountainous, tall buildings) of 
the area over which the signal travels may 
prevent the FM signal from being noise-free. 
Repeated pops and hisses which are heard 
during an otherwise clear broadcast can occur 
near the station because of the “line of sight” 
characteristic of FM radio waves. 
If there is a building or large structure between 
the antenna and station, some of the signal 
“bends” around the building, but certain spots 
receive almost no signal. Moving out of the 
“shadow” of the structure will allow the station 
to return to normal. 
When the radio waves are reflected off objects or 
structures, the reflected signal cancels the normal 
signal, causing the antenna to pick up noise and 
distortion. Cancellation effects are most 
prominent in metropolitan areas, but also can 
become quite severe in hilly terrain and 
depressed roadways. 
To minimize these conditions, a stereo/mono 
blend circuit has been incorporated into this 
system. This feature automatically switches a 
weak stereo signal to a clearer monaural signal, 
which improves the quality of reception. 
Several sources of static are normal conditions 
on AM frequencies. These can be caused by 
power lines, electric fences, traffic lights and 
thunderstorms. 
Another reception phenomenon is Strong Signal 
Capture and Overload. This can occur when 
listening to a weak station and when passing 
another broadcast tower. The close station may 
capture the more distant station, although the 
44
displayed frequency does not change. While 
passing the tower, the station may switch back 
and forth a few times before returning to the 
original station. 
When several broadcast towers are present 
(common in metropolitan areas), several stations 
may overload the receiver, resulting in 
considerable station changing, mixing and 
distortion. 
Automatic gain control circuitry for both AM 
and FM bands has been incorporated into this 
system to reduce strong signal capture and 
overload. 
All About Radio Frequencies 
The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) 
and the Canadian Radio Telecommunications 
Commission (CRTC) establish the frequencies 
that AM and FM radio stations may use for 
their broadcasts. The allowable frequencies are, 
AM: 530, 540...1600, 1610 kHz in 10 kHz steps; 
FM: 87.9, 88.1...107.7, 107.9 MHz in 0.2 MHz 
steps. 
Not all frequencies will be assigned to a given 
area. This radio will tune to each of these 
frequencies using manual tune and no fine 
tuning is necessary as radio stations may not use 
other frequencies. 
Some FM radio stations advertise a 
“rounded-off” frequency which is not the 
frequency they actually broadcast on. For 
example, a radio station that is assigned a 
frequency of 98.7 MHz may call itself “Radio 99” 
even though 99.0 MHz is not an allowable FM 
broadcast frequency. 
45
Important Warranty and Service 
Information 
qWarranty 
Your sound system is warranted for three years 
or 36,000 miles (60,000 kilometers), whichever 
comes first. Consult your vehicle warranty 
booklet for further information. Ask your dealer 
for a copy of this limited warranty. 
qService 
At Ford, we stand behind our audio systems 
with a comprehensive service and repair 
program. If anything should go wrong with 
your Ford audio system, return to your dealer 
for service. There is a nationwide network of 
qualified Ford authorized repair centers to assist 
you. 
46
47 
Controls and Features 
Your vehicle has a variety of features designed 
for your comfort, convenience and safety. Read 
this chapter to find out about standard and 
optional features. 
The main controls for the climate control system, 
clock, and radio are on the instrument panel.
Instrument panel 
48
NOTE: Any cleaner or polish that increases the 
49 
gloss (shine) of the upper part of the 
instrument panel should be avoided. 
The dull finish in this area is to help 
protect the driver from undesirable 
windshield reflection. 
The Climate Control System 
Heating Only System (Without Air 
Conditioning) 
Function selection 
The heater in your vehicle has three controls 
used for air direction, temperature and fan 
speed. The function selector control lets you 
direct heated or unheated air through the 
instrument panel registers, or down to the floor. 
It also allows you to vent your vehicle with 
outside air. 
Heating only system control panel 
Turning the function selector control all the way 
to the right (V) directs air to defroster vents 
and the side window defoggers only. 
With the function selector control in the MIX 
position, air is directed out the defrosters, side 
defoggers and the floor heater outlets.
The FLOOR position directs air out the floor 
outlets and the side window defoggers. 
Ventilate your vehicle with outside air by 
choosing the VENT position. 
Temperature control 
The air temperature can be adjusted by moving 
the marker on the temperature control to the red 
area for warm air, or to the blue area for 
unheated air. The air will become warmer or 
cooler depending on how far the control is 
turned. 
Fan speed control 
Fan speed can be controlled by turning the 
control from LO to HI. 
Turning On the Heat 
To heat the inside of your vehicle: 
1. Turn the function selector control to FLOOR. 
50 
When FLOOR is selected, air is directed 
through the floor registers, and a little air is 
also directed at the windshield and side 
windows to help prevent fogging. 
2. Turn the temperature control all the way to 
the right in the red area, or to the desired 
temperature. 
3. Set the fan at the desired speed.
51 
Defrosting the Windshield and Side 
Windows 
1. Turn the function selector control to the 
defrost position. 
When V is selected, air is directed to the 
windshield and side windows. 
2. Turn the temperature control to the desired 
temperature. 
3. Set the fan at the desired speed. 
Heating and Defrosting at the Same Time 
1. Set the function selector control to MIX. 
2. Set the temperature and fan speed as 
desired. 
Ventilating Your Vehicle With Outside Air 
On mild days, you may want to ventilate your 
vehicle with outside air. To open the vents: 
1. Turn the function selector control to VENT. 
When VENT is selected, air is directed out of 
the panel registers. 
2. Turn the temperature control to the desired 
temperature. 
3. Set the H (fan speed) as desired.
Tips for controlling the temperature in your 
vehicle 
qTo vary the temperature inside your vehicle, 
move the temperature selector toward the red 
area for warmer air and toward the blue area 
for cooler air. 
qIf you drive with the fan off and the 
windows closed, the windows may fog up. 
To prevent fogging: 
1. Set the function selector control to VENT, 
52 
MIX, FLOOR or the V position. 
2. Set the desired temperature. 
3. Set the H (fan speed) to the desired 
position. 
qDo not put objects under the front seats that 
will interfere with the flow of air to the back 
seats. 
qRemove any snow, ice, or leaves from the 
area below the windshield on the outside of 
your vehicle. They could block the air intake.
Air Conditioning System (If equipped) 
Operate the air conditioning by using the climate 
controls on the center of the instrument panel. 
Air conditioning controls 
Sometimes you may notice slight engine surging 
if you have the air conditioner on. This is 
normal, as the system is designed to cycle the 
compressor on and off to maintain desired 
cooling. The reduced compressor operation 
should benefit fuel economy. 
On some vehicles with air conditioning, 
wide-open throttle acceleration will temporarily 
cut off the air conditioning. 
Since the air conditioner removes a lot of 
moisture from the air during operation, it is 
normal for water to drip on the pavement under 
the air conditioner drain after you have stopped 
the vehicle. 
Action for heating and windshield defrosting are 
identical for cars equipped with either the 
Heating Only System or the Heating and Air 
Conditioning System. For instructions about these 
functions, see the previous section, Heating Only 
System. For instructions about using the air 
conditioning, see the following sections. 
53
If the inside of your vehicle is very warm, drive 
for a few minutes with the windows down. This 
forces most of the hot, stale air out of the 
vehicle and helps the air conditioning cool the 
vehicle faster. 
MAX A/C 
When MAX A/C is selected, cooled interior air 
is recirculated through the system. This position 
is more efficient than NORM A/C. 
To cool your vehicle quickly in warm weather: 
1. Turn the function selector control to MAX 
54 
A/C. 
2. Turn the temperature control to the blue 
(cool) area. 
3. Set the fan at the desired speed. 
Because MAX A/C uses recirculated air, MAX is 
usually more efficient than NORM A/C. You 
can switch to outside air NORM A/C at any 
time, especially after the vehicle has cooled 
down. 
You may notice a slight odor when using the 
MAX A/C position. This is normal. If the odor 
becomes annoying, switch the function selector 
to NORM A/C. 
To provide the most quiet operation when using 
MAX A/C, reduce the fan speed after a 
comfortable temperature has been reached. 
NORM A/C 
When maximum air conditioning is not needed, 
you can use the NORM A/C position to cool 
your vehicle with outside air. Cooling your 
vehicle this way brings in outside air and is 
quieter, but it is less efficient.
To cool your vehicle using outside air: 
1. Turn the function selector control to NORM 
55 
A/C. 
2. Turn the temperature control all the way to 
left to the blue (cool) area. 
3. Set the fan at the desired speed. 
In mild weather, setting the function selector 
control in the VENT position will add cool air to 
your vehicle without using the air conditioning. 
You will get better fuel economy without using 
the air conditioning. 
Engine Idle Speed Control System 
Genuine Ford air conditioning (either 
factory-installed or dealer-installed) has an 
engine idle speed control system that 
compensates for engine speed loss that may 
occur when the air conditioning compressor is 
running. This idle speed control holds the engine 
idle essentially constant, regardless of whether 
the air conditioning system is on or off. 
NOTE: Whenever service to the air 
conditioning system is required, make 
sure the service facility uses a 
refrigerant recycling system. These 
systems will capture the refrigerant for 
reuse. Releasing certain refrigerants 
into the atmosphere is hazardous to the 
environment.
Rear Window Defroster (If equipped) 
Rear window defroster button 
The defroster for the rear window clears frost, 
fog, or thin ice from both the inside and outside 
of the rear window. The rear window defroster 
button is located on the lower right of the 
instrument panel below the climate control 
panel. This button is also used to activate your 
heated power mirrors (if equipped). 
To defrost the rear window: 
1. Clear any snow and/or ice from the rear 
56 
window. 
2. Get in your vehicle and start the engine. 
3. Press the rear defrost button. The indicator 
light turns on. 
The defroster turns off automatically after 15 to 
25 minutes. If the window is not clear, turn on 
the defroster again. It will also automatically 
shut off any time the engine is shut off. 
NOTE: Never use sharp instruments or 
window cleaners with abrasives to 
clean the inside of your rear window. 
If you do, you may damage the heating 
elements that are bonded to the inside 
of the rear window and cause damage 
to the rear window defroster.
Rear Window Wiper and Washer 
The rear window wiper and washer buttons are 
located on the instrument panel below the 
climate control panel. 
To operate the rear wiper, push the rear window 
wiper button. Push the button a second time to 
turn the wiper off. To operate the rear washer, 
push and hold the rear window washer button 
in. The washer will spray until the button is 
released. 
Fog Lamps (If equipped) 
The fog lamps only operate when the headlamps 
are on low beam. To activate fog lamps, push 
the button on the control panel below the 
climate controls. An indicator light on the button 
will illuminate. Push the button again to turn 
the fog lamps off. 
57 
Fog lamp button
Interior Lights 
Lighting Up the Interior and Instrument 
Panel 
With the parking lamps or headlamps on, the 
brightness of the instrument panel lighting can 
be adjusted. 
To brighten or dim the instrument panel 
lighting, rotate the dimmer control thumbwheel 
as desired. 
Dimmer control thumbwheel 
The dimmer control thumbwheel is located to 
the left of the steering wheel on the instrument 
panel. 
Dome Lamp 
The dome lamp illuminates whenever one of the 
front doors is opened and turns off 
automatically when the doors are closed. You 
may turn the dome lamp on and off while the 
doors are closed by using the ON/OFF switch 
located on the interior/map lamp control panel. 
58
Interior/map lamp control panel 
Map lamps (if equipped) 
The map lamps can be turned on by using the 
interior/map lamp control panel located between 
the sun visors. 
There are two map lamps, one for the driver 
and one for the passenger. To turn on the map 
lamp, push the button that is next to the lamp. 
Push the buttons again to turn the map lamps 
off. 
59
Radio 
For information about the radio in your vehicle, 
refer to the Electronic Sound Systems chapter in 
this Owner Guide. 
Clock Controls on Electronic 
Radios 
The electronic radios have a built-in clock. For 
complete operating instructions, refer to the 
Electronic Sound Systems chapter in this Owner 
Guide. 
60
Ignition 
Understanding the Positions of the Ignition 
Ignition lock cylinder 
LOCK locks the steering wheel. It also locks the 
gearshift lever in P (Park) (automatic transaxle). 
LOCK is the only position that allows you to 
remove the key. The LOCK feature helps to 
protect your vehicle from theft. 
To remove the key if you have a manual 
transaxle, push the key in while turning it to the 
LOCK position. 
If your key is stuck in the LOCK position and 
will not turn, move your steering wheel left or 
right until the key turns freely. 
ACC (Accessory) allows some of your vehicle’s 
electrical accessories to operate while the engine 
is not running. 
ON allows you to test your vehicle’s warning 
lights (except the brake system warning light) to 
make sure they work before you start the 
engine. The key returns to the ON position once 
the engine is started and remains in this position 
while the engine runs. 
61
START cranks the engine. Release the key once 
the engine starts so that you do not damage the 
starter. The key should return to ON when you 
release it. The START position also allows you 
to test the brake warning light. 
The Turn Signal Lever 
You can use the turn signal lever on the left side 
of the steering column to: 
qoperate the headlamps and parking lamps 
qoperate the turn signals and cornering lamps 
qturn the high beams on/off 
qflash the lamps 
Headlamps and Parking Lamps 
To turn the parking lamps or headlamps on, 
twist the knob at the end of the turn signal 
lever. 
FIRST STOP — Turning the knob to the first 
stop (g) will turn on the the license plate 
lamps, parking lamps, side marker lamps, tail 
lamps and instrument panel lamps. 
SECOND STOP — Turning the knob to the 
second stop (B) will turn on the headlamps, 
license plate lamps, parking lamps, side marker 
lamps, tail lamps, and instrument panel lamps. 
Headlamp control 
62
Daytime Running Light System 
(Canadian vehicles only) 
In Canada, the lights illuminate during daytime 
operation. The Daytime Running Light system 
(DRL) automatically illuminates when the 
ignition switch is turned to the ON position. The 
daytime running lights are switched off under 
the following conditions: 
qwhen the headlamps are switched on 
qwhen the parking brake is applied 
qwhen the flash-to-pass system is used 
63 
WARNING 
The Daytime Running Light (DRL) system 
will not illuminate the tail lamps and 
parking lamps. Turn on your headlamps 
at dusk. Failure to do so may result in a 
collision. 
Raising the Headlamps Manually 
If the power headlamp door system becomes 
inoperative, your vehicle has a manual retractor 
system that allows you to raise the headlamps 
manually (the headlamps will not turn on). The 
retractors are located under the hood and behind 
each headlamp. Remove the cap and turn the 
knob. Each headlamp must be raised separately. 
Before using the manual retractors to raise your 
headlamps, the RETRA fuse must be removed.
Open the main fuse panel. Refer to the 
underhood fuse panel in Servicing Your Probe 
later in this owner guide. Pull the RETRA (20A) 
fuse straight out. 
Inspect the removed fuse. If it is blown, replace 
it with a new one of the same rating. If it isn’t 
blown or if a new fuse does not solve the 
problem, remove it and operate the headlamp 
manually. 
64 
WARNING 
Always remove the RETRA (20A) fuse 
before manually operating a headlamp 
retractor or attempting to remove anything 
from the headlamp. Failure to remove the 
RETRA fuse could cause injury to a hand 
or fingers. 
WARNING 
When reinstalling the RETRA fuse, make 
sure nothing is near the headlamp 
retractor. It may move suddenly while the 
fuse is being inserted, causing injury to 
hands and fingers.
Manual headlamp retractors located behind the headlamps 
High Beams and Flashing the Lamps 
To turn on the high beams, turn the headlamp 
control knob to the headlamp ON position and 
push the turn signal lever away from you until 
it latches. When the high beams are ON, the 
high beam indicator light on the instrument 
panel comes on. 
To turn off the high beams, pull the lever 
toward you until it latches. The high beam 
indicator light turns off. 
65
Flashing the Lights 
To flash the headlamps, pull the lever toward 
you for a moment and then release it. The 
headlamps will flash whether the headlamp 
knob is in the on or off position. 
Highbeam and flash-to-pass operation 
If the headlamps are retracted when you pull 
the lever toward you, they will pop up and 
flash. 
66
Turn Signals 
Move the lever up to signal a right turn. Move 
it down to signal a left turn. The corresponding 
indicator light in the instrument cluster will 
flash. 
If the turn signal stays on after you turn, move 
the lever back to the center (OFF) position. 
For lane changes, move the lever far enough to 
signal but not to latch. The lever will return to 
the off position when you release it. 
67 
Turn signal
Windshield Wipers and Washer 
To operate the windshield wipers and washers, 
make sure your ignition key is turned to the ON 
position. 
The windshield wipers have two speeds. To 
operate the wipers, pull down the lever on the 
right side of your steering column. The first 
position is LO (Low) and the second position is 
HI (High). To turn the wipers off, return the 
lever to the uppermost position. 
Windshield wiper control 
ONE-TOUCH WIPER CONTROL (If equipped) 
— For one wiping cycle, push the lever away 
from you and release it with the lever in the 
OFF or interval position. The ignition switch 
must be in the ON position for this operation. 
One touch wiper control 
68
Interval Wipers (If equipped) 
In addition to two speed wipers, your vehicle 
may have wipers that you can set to operate at 
varying intervals. For example, you can set the 
interval so they wipe less often when it drizzles 
and more often in heavier rain. 
Variable interval wiper control 
To set the interval wipers, pull the lever down 
to the first position. Turn the ring on the lever 
to the frequency of wiper operation you desire. 
Windshield Washer 
To clean the windshield, pull the wiper lever 
toward you. Washer fluid sprays until the lever 
is released. 
69 
Windshield washer/control
If the washer does not work, check the washer 
fluid level visually and fill if needed. See 
Servicing Your Probe later in this owner guide. If 
there is fluid in the reservoir, and your washer 
doesn’t work, consult your Ford or 
Lincoln-Mercury dealer. 
Do not try to clean the windshield when the 
washer fluid container is empty or activate the 
washers at any time for more than 15 seconds 
continuously. This could damage the washer 
pump system. 
70 
WARNING 
Always warm up the windshield with the 
defroster before you use the washer fluid. 
In freezing weather, the washer solution 
may freeze on the windshield and obscure 
your vision.
71 
Tilt Steering Column 
(If equipped) 
WARNING 
Never adjust the steering wheel when the 
vehicle is moving. 
To change the position of the steering 
column/wheel, pull the release lever on the 
column toward you. Tip the steering wheel to 
the desired position. Release the lever to lock the 
steering wheel in place. 
Tilt steering column
Speed Control (If equipped) 
Speed control switches on the steering wheel 
To Turn Speed Control Off 
Press OFF, or 
Turn off the vehicle ignition. 
Once speed control is switched off, the 
previously programmed set speed will be erased. 
To Turn Speed Control On 
Press ON 
To Set a Speed 
Press SET ACC. For speed control to operate, 
the speed control must be ON and the vehicle 
speed must be greater than 30 mph (48 km/h). 
If you drive up or down a steep hill, your 
vehicle speed may vary slower or faster than the 
set speed. This is normal. 
72
Speed control cannot reduce the vehicle speed if 
it increases above the set speed on a downhill. If 
your vehicle speed is faster than the set speed 
while driving on a downhill in j (Overdrive), 
you may want to shift to the next lower gear to 
reduce your vehicle’s speed. 
73 
WARNING 
To keep your vehicle under control, do 
not use speed control in heavy traffic or 
on roads that are winding, slippery, or 
unpaved. 
To Set a Higher Speed 
Press and hold SET ACC. Release the switch 
when the desired vehicle speed is reached, or 
Press and release SET ACC. Each press will 
increase the set speed by 1 mph (1.6 km/h) 
(2.0L with automatic transmission only), or 
Accelerate with your accelerator pedal, then 
press SET ACC. 
You may accelerate with the accelerator pedal at 
any time during speed control usage. Releasing 
the accelerator pedal will return your vehicle 
speed to the previously programmed set speed. 
To Set a Lower Set Speed 
Press and hold CST. Release the switch when the 
desired vehicle speed is reached, or 
Press and release CST. Each press will decrease 
the set speed by 1 mph (1.6 km/h) (2.0L with 
automatic transmission only), or 
Depress the brake pedal. When the desired 
vehicle speed is reached, press SET ACC.
To Disengage Speed Control 
Depress the brake pedal, or 
Depress the clutch pedal (if equipped). 
Disengaging the speed control will not erase the 
previously programmed set speed. 
To Return to a Set Speed 
Press RSM. For RSM to operate, the vehicle 
speed must be faster than 30 mph (48 km/h). 
Moon Roof (If equipped) 
The control switch for the sliding moon roof is 
on the interior/map lamp control panel located 
above the windshield and between the sun 
visors. The ignition must be in the ON position 
for the moon roof to be operational. 
To open the sliding moon roof to the vent 
position, push the recessed part of the moon 
roof switch until the back of the moon roof tilts 
into the vent position. You must release the 
switch after opening the vent before pressing it 
again to slide the moon roof open. To close, 
push the other side of the switch until the moon 
roof sets back into place. 
74
Sliding moon roof control switch 
Press the switch until the moon roof is opened 
to the desired position. When you release the 
switch, the moon roof will stop sliding open. To 
close the moon roof, press the other side of the 
switch and hold it until the roof is closed to the 
desired position. 
75
Doors 
The inside of the door 
If you close the door with the lock button 
depressed, the door will remain locked. 
Power Door Locks (If equipped) 
If your vehicle has power door locks, the 
controls to lock the doors are below the inside 
door handles on each door. When you close the 
doors after you set the door locks, the doors 
remain locked. If the power mechanism ever 
fails, the manual door locks will override the 
power controls. 
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with power locks 
76 
have a safety feature which allows you 
to unlock one or both front doors from 
either door key lock cylinder. To 
unlock the driver’s or passenger door 
only, insert the key in the door lock 
cylinder and turn to the left 
(counterclockwise) to the first position. 
To unlock the other door at the same 
time, simply continue turning the key 
to the left to the second position. Both 
doors are locked by turning the key to 
the right (clockwise).
Power locks on the driver’s door 
Windows 
Using the Power Windows (If equipped) 
Each door has a power control that opens and 
closes the window on that door. The driver’s 
door has a master control panel that operates 
both windows. 
To use your power windows, your ignition 
switch must be placed in the ON position. Press 
the recessed end of the power window switch to 
lower a window, press the raised end of the 
switch to raise a window. 
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a “one 
touch down” feature. This feature 
allows the driver to fully open the 
driver’s window by firmly pressing the 
switch and then releasing. The switch 
will release when the window has 
fully opened. 
77
78 
WARNING 
Do not let children play with the power 
windows. 
Master window control on the driver’s door 
Mirrors 
WARNING 
The right side view mirror makes objects 
appear smaller and farther away than they 
actually are.
79 
Dual-Electric Remote Control Mirrors 
(If equipped) 
Dual-electric remote control mirrors are 
collapsible. The mirror heads can be folded 
rearward to prevent damage when using an 
automatic car wash. 
To adjust the side mirrors: 
1. Locate the control switch in the power 
control panel on the driver’s door. 
2. Select the right or left mirror by moving the 
selector switch right or left. 
3. Push the control switch in the direction you 
want to move the mirror. 
4. Return the selector switch to the middle OFF 
position to keep the mirror in place. 
Dual-electric side mirror control switches
Console 
A fully-equipped console on your vehicle will 
include the following items: 
qashtray and lighter 
qparking brake lever 
qcupholder or storage compartment with 
cupholder 
Storage Compartments 
Your vehicle may have several small storage 
compartments: 
qa glove compartment that locks and unlocks 
using the ignition key 
qtwo map pockets on the door panels (if 
equipped) 
qstorage compartment below the climate 
controls 
qa storage bin in the center console 
80 
WARNING 
Do not put objects on the ledge between 
the back seat and the rear window, as 
they can become dangerous projectiles and 
injure someone.
Center Console Storage (If equipped) 
To open the center console storage bin, push the 
button and slide the lid back. When it is back as 
far as it will go, push the button and lift the lid. 
Cupholders 
The cupholders are located inside the center 
console storage bin. The driver cupholder is 
integrated in the storage bin. To use the 
passenger cupholder, rotate it upward then twist 
the cupholder until it is in a horizontal position. 
When the passenger cupholder is not in use, 
twist it back to the vertical position and rotate it 
into the storage bin. 
NOTE: Do not place heavy objects in the 
81 
cupholders. 
Using the cupholders
Hatchback 
Opening and Closing the Hatchback 
To open the hatchback from the outside: 
1. Put the key into the lock located on the right 
82 
side, in the tail lamp just above the bumper. 
2. Turn the key to the right to unlock. 
3. Remove the key before you close the 
hatchback. 
NOTE: When the hatch is unlocked the cargo 
lamp will illuminate. 
4. Using both hands, shut the hatchback 
completely. Do not slam it. 
5. Pull up on the hatchback to make sure it is 
securely latched. 
To prevent premature wear or damage to the 
hatchback lift cylinders and attaching hardware, 
the hatchback must be fully closed before you 
drive your vehicle. 
WARNING 
If you drive with the hatchback lid open, 
you will draw dangerous exhaust fumes 
into your vehicle. 
If you must drive like this, keep the vents open 
so outside air comes into the vehicle.
Using the Remote Control for the 
Hatchback 
To release the hatchback from inside the vehicle, 
simply pull up on the remote release lever, 
which is located in front of the driver’s seat, 
near the door. 
Remote control for the hatchback 
Using the Luggage Compartment Cover 
This cover lets you conceal cargo in the luggage 
compartment. The cover will lift automatically 
when the hatchback lid is opened. 
83 
WARNING 
Do not put objects on the ledge between 
the back seat and the rear window, as 
they can become dangerous projectiles and 
injure someone.
To remove the luggage compartment cover: 
1. Raise the hatchback to the fully open 
84 
position. 
2. Standing outside the vehicle, unfasten the lift 
cords from the hatchback lid. 
3. Disconnect the two front package tray lift 
cords from the lower trunk side trim. 
4. Lower the cover and slide it rearward to 
disengage it from the sockets and remove it. 
The luggage compartment and cover
85 
WARNING 
The cover may cause injury in a sudden 
stop or accident if it is not securely 
installed. 
To install the luggage compartment cover: 
1. Raise the hatchback to the fully open 
position. 
2. From outside the vehicle, position the cover 
in its sockets. 
3. Attach the lift cords to the hatchback lid. 
4. Connect the two front luggage compartment 
cover lift cords to the lower trunk side trim. 
5. Close the hatchback. 
WARNING 
Do not push down on the luggage 
compartment cover when the lift cords are 
attached to the open hatchback lid. This 
could cause the hatchback lid to close 
unexpectedly. 
Remote Keyless Entry System 
(If equipped) 
Your vehicle may be equipped with a remote 
keyless entry system. This option will allow you 
to open your vehicle using a remote transmitter 
from distances of up to 33 feet (10 meters) away. 
The remote feature will operate only when the 
ignition is in the OFF position. 
The transmitter can unlock the driver’s door, 
unlock all doors, lock all doors, or activate the 
vehicle’s horn and hazard warning lamps for the 
panic alarm feature.
By pressing the UNLOCK button on the 
transmitter once, you can unlock the driver side 
door. Pressing the UNLOCK button a second 
time within five seconds of unlocking the 
driver’s door will unlock the other doors. 
You can lock all your vehicle doors by pressing 
the LOCK button. If you press the LOCK button 
a second time within five (5) seconds, the horn 
will sound briefly to verify that the doors have 
been locked. 
When the PANIC button is pressed, the horn 
will sound and the hazard warning lamps will 
flash. This will continue for up to approximately 
two minutes and 45 seconds unless it is turned 
off by pressing the PANIC button a second time. 
The panic mode can also be cancelled by turning 
the ignition key to ON or ACC. 
Up to four transmitters can be programmed for 
your vehicle. Your vehicle comes with two 
transmitters. Additional transmitters can be 
ordered from your dealer. 
Remote keyless entry transmitter 
86
The remote keyless entry system is equipped 
with an illuminated entry system. 
When the system is activated, the dome lamp 
will illuminate and will stay lit for 
approximately 25 seconds. The dome lamp will 
shut off when the doors are closed. 
Replacing the Batteries 
The remote entry transmitter is powered by two 
coin type three-volt lithium 1616 
batteries (included) that should last for several 
years of normal use. If you notice a significant 
decrease in operating range, the batteries should 
be replaced. Replacement batteries can be 
purchased at most pharmacies, watch stores or 
at your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer. 
NOTE: The operating range of the remote 
entry system can also be affected by 
weather conditions (such as very cold 
temperatures) or structures around the 
vehicle (buildings, other vehicles, radio 
and TV towers, etc.). Typical operating 
range will allow you to be up to 33 
feet (10 meters) away from your 
vehicle. 
87 
Opening the remote transmitter
The transmitter can be snapped apart to replace 
the batteries by twisting a thin coin between the 
two halves of the transmitter. DO NOT TAKE 
THE FRONT PART OF THE TRANSMITTER 
APART. Carefully remove the old batteries. 
When installing the new batteries, be sure to 
place the positive (+) side down as marked. 
Snap the two halves back together. 
Replacement/additional transmitters 
In the event a transmitter is lost, return the 
remaining transmitter(s) to your dealer for 
reprogramming of your remote entry system. 
This is necessary to prevent unauthorized use of 
the lost transmitter. 
Additional transmitters may be purchased from 
your dealer (remote entry system will work with 
up to four transmitters). Follow the same 
programming procedure as above. 
All transmitters must be programmed (or 
reprogrammed) at the same time. If the 
programming mode is entered and the 
transmitters are not programmed (or 
reprogrammed) at the same time, they will not 
operate with the system. 
88
89 
Seating and Safety 
Restraints 
Seats 
RWARNING 
Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback 
when the vehicle is moving. 
RWARNING 
Always drive and ride with your seatback 
upright and the lap belt snug and low 
across the hips. 
RWARNING 
Children should always ride with the 
seatback in the fully upright position. 
Head Restraints 
Head restraints help protect your head and neck 
in a collision. The head restraints on your 
vehicle are not adjustable. 
Manual Seat Adjustments 
You can move the front seats forward or 
backward or tilt the back of the seat forward or 
backward. The driver’s seat also has controls for 
lumbar support (if equipped) and side bolster 
support (if equipped).
90
91 
To move the seat forward or backward: 
Manual seat controls for front seats
To recline the seatback: 
92
To gain access to the rear seat on the driver’s or 
passenger’s side: 
93 
Seatback release lever for rear seat access 
The seatback will return to its set reclined 
position when pushed back. 
RWARNING 
Check to see that the seat and seatback 
are latched securely in position. Keep 
floor area free of objects that would 
prevent proper seat engagement. Never 
attempt to adjust the seat while the 
vehicle is in motion.
To inflate the driver’s seatback lumbar 
support (if equipped) for lower back support, or 
to inflate the driver’s seatback side bolster 
supports (if equipped): 
94
95 
Six-Way Power Seat Adjustment 
(if equipped) 
The six-way power seat control lever is located 
on the outermost side of the driver’s seat.
Your seat cushion power adjust lever is operated 
by a motor. To avoid damage to the motor, you 
should avoid operating this feature for an 
extended period of time. You should also avoid 
using the six-way power adjust lever 
continuously with the engine stopped. This 
could run down the battery. 
Use the lever to make only one adjustment at a 
time. 
Using the Split-Folding Rear Seat 
Your vehicle is equipped with split-folding rear 
seats. One or both rear seatbacks can be folded 
down to provide additional cargo space. 
NOTE: When folding down the rear seatback, 
96 
the seat belt tongue should be hanging 
on the hook of the lower, side trim 
panel, near the edge of the side of the 
seat cushion.
97 
To lower the rear seatback: 
To raise the seatback, lift the seatback rearward 
until it latches. Make sure the seatback is locked 
in position by pushing it forward and backward. 
RWARNING 
Check to see that the seat and seatback 
are latched securely in position. Keep 
floor area free of objects that would 
prevent proper seat engagement. Never 
attempt to adjust the seat while the 
vehicle is in motion.
98 
RWARNING 
Cargo should always be secured to 
prevent it from shifting and causing 
damage to the vehicle or harm to 
passengers. 
RWARNING 
Do not remove the floor carpet in your 
vehicle. Emission controls cause high 
exhaust temperatures under the floor. 
NOTE: When returning the folding seats to the 
upright position, remember to return 
rear shoulder belts to their proper 
position. 
NOTE: Your vehicle has stowage hooks on the 
lower rear side trim panel on which to 
hook the safety belts when not in use. 
Simply hook the tongue slot over the 
stowage hook. 
Important Safety Belt Information 
The use of safety belts helps to restrain you and 
your passengers in case of a collision. In most 
states and in Canada, the law requires their use. 
Safety belts provide best restraint when: 
qthe seatback is upright 
qthe occupant is sitting upright (not slouched) 
qthe lap belt is snug and low on the hips 
qthe shoulder belt is snug against the chest 
qthe knees are straight forward
To help you remember to fasten your safety belt, 
a warning light may come on and a chime may 
sound. See Safety Belt Warning Light/Chime in the 
Instrumentation chapter. 
See the following sections in this chapter for 
directions on how to properly use these safety 
belts. Also see Safety Restraints for Children in this 
chapter for special instructions about using 
safety belts for children. 
99 
RWARNING 
Always drive and ride with your seatback 
upright and the lap belt snug and low 
across the hips. 
RWARNING 
Each seating position in your vehicle has a 
specific safety belt assembly which is 
made up of one buckle and one tongue 
that are designed to be used as a pair. 1) 
Use the shoulder belt on the outside 
shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder 
belt under the arm. 2) Never swing it 
around your neck over the inside 
shoulder. 3) Never use a single belt for 
more than one person. 
RWARNING 
Ford recommends that all safety belt 
assemblies and attaching hardware should 
be inspected by a qualified technician 
after any collision. Safety belt assemblies 
not in use during a collision should also 
be inspected and replaced if either 
damage or improper operation is noted.
100 
RWARNING 
Children should always ride with the 
seatback in the fully upright position. 
RWARNING 
Never let a passenger hold a child on his 
or her lap while the vehicle is moving. 
The passenger cannot protect the child 
from injury in a collision. 
RWARNING 
Lock the doors of your vehicle before 
driving to lessen the risk of the door 
coming open in a collision. 
Combination Lap and Shoulder 
Belts 
While your vehicle is in motion, the combination 
lap and shoulder belt adjusts to your movement. 
However, if you brake hard, turn hard, or if 
your vehicle receives an impact of 5 mph 
(8 km/h) or more, the lap/shoulder belt locks 
and helps reduce your forward movement. 
After you get into your vehicle, close the door 
and lock it. Then adjust the driver or passenger 
seat to the position that suits you best. 
Pull the combination lap/shoulder belt from the 
retractor so that the shoulder portion of the belt 
crosses your shoulder and chest. Be sure the belt 
is not twisted. If it is, remove the twist. Insert 
the belt tongue into the proper buckle until you 
hear a snap and feel it latch. Make sure the 
tongue is securely fastened to the buckle by 
pulling on tongue.
Fastening the front seat combination lap and shoulder belt 
NOTE: Be sure to read and understand 
101 
Important Safety Belt Information in 
this chapter. 
Unfastening the combination lap and shoulder belt — front 
and rear seating positions 
While the belt retracts, guide the tongue to its 
original position to prevent it from striking you 
or the vehicle.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Retractors 
(Dual Locking Modes) 
Your vehicle is equipped with a dual locking 
mode retractor on the shoulder belt portion of 
the combination lap/shoulder safety belt for 
passengers. 
Dual locking mode retractors operate in two 
ways: 
Vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode 
In this operating mode, the shoulder belt 
retractor will allow the occupant freedom of 
movement, locking tight only on hard braking, 
hard cornering or impacts of approximately 
5 mph (8 km/h) or more. The retractor can also 
be made to lock by pulling the belt out quickly. 
Automatic locking mode 
In this operating mode, the shoulder belt 
retractor will be automatically locked and will 
remain locked when the combination 
lap/shoulder safety belt is buckled, and does not 
allow the occupant freedom of movement. This 
mode provides the following: 
qA tight lap/shoulder belt on the occupant. 
qChild safety seat installation. 
102 
RWARNING 
Rear-facing child seats or infant carriers 
should never be placed in the front seats.
This mode must be used when installing a child 
seat. To switch the retractor from the emergency 
locking mode to the automatic locking mode, 
perform the following steps: 
1. Buckle the lap/shoulder combination belt. 
2. Pull on the belt until all of the stored belt is 
103 
out of the retractor and a click is heard. 
3. A clicking sound will continue to be heard 
as the belt is allowed to retract. This 
indicates that the retractor is in the 
automatic locking mode. 
NOTE: When the combination lap/shoulder 
belt is unbuckled and allowed to 
retract completely, the retractor will 
switch to the vehicle sensitive 
(emergency) locking mode. See the 
detailed instructions under Safety Seats 
for Children in this chapter. 
Safety Belt Extension Assembly 
A safety belt that is too short even when fully 
extended can be lengthened. You can add about 
eight inches (20 cm) to the belt length with a 
safety belt extension assembly. Safety belt 
extensions are available at no cost from your 
dealer. 
Use only extensions manufactured by the same 
supplier as the safety belt. Manufacturer 
identification is located at the end of the 
webbing on the label. Also, use the safety belt 
extension only if the safety belt is too short for 
you when fully extended. Do not use extension 
to change the fit of the shoulder belt across the 
torso.
104 
RWARNING 
Failure to follow these instructions will 
affect the performance of the safety belts 
and increase the risk of personal injury. 
Safety Belt Maintenance 
Check the safety belt systems periodically to 
make sure that they work properly and are not 
damaged. 
All safety belt assemblies, including retractors, 
buckles, front seat belt buckle support assemblies 
(slide bar) (if equipped), shoulder belt height 
adjusters (if equipped), child safety seat tether 
bracket assemblies (if equipped), and attaching 
hardware, should be inspected after any 
collision. Ford recommends that all safety belt 
assemblies used in vehicles involved in a 
collision be replaced. However, if the collision 
was minor and a qualified technician finds that 
the belts do not show damage and continue to 
operate properly, they do not need to be 
replaced. Safety belt assemblies not in use 
during a collision should also be inspected and 
replaced if either damage or improper operation 
is noted. 
Air Bag Supplemental Restraint 
System (SRS) 
Important Air Bag Precautions 
Your vehicle is equipped with a supplemental 
restraint system designed to work with the 
safety belts to help protect you and your right 
front seat passenger in the event of a collision. 
The Air Bag Supplemental Restraint System is 
primarily designed to reduce certain upper body 
injuries.
105 
RWARNING 
All occupants of the vehicle, including the 
driver, should always wear their safety 
belts, failure to do so may increase the 
risk of personal injury in the event of a 
collision. 
RWARNING 
Do not place objects or mount equipment 
on or near the air bag covers that may 
come into contact with an inflating air 
bag. Failure to follow these instructions 
may increase the risk of personal injury in 
the event of a collision. 
RWARNING 
Do not attempt to service, repair, or 
modify the air bag Supplemental Restraint 
System or its fuses. See your Ford or 
Lincoln-Mercury dealer. 
RWARNING 
If you are close to an inflating air bag, it 
could seriously injure you. Position your 
seat such that it is as far back from the 
steering wheel as possible but still allows 
you to properly control the vehicle.
Children and Air Bags 
NOTE: For additional important safety 
106 
information on the proper use of seat 
belts, child seats, and infant seats, 
please read the entire Safety Restraints 
chapter in this owner guide. 
RWARNING 
Children should always wear their safety 
belts. Failure to follow these instructions 
may increase the risk of personal injury in 
the event of a collision. 
RWARNING 
Rear-facing child seats or infant carriers 
should never be placed in the front seats. 
How Does the Air Bag Supplemental 
Restraint System Work? 
The Air Bag Supplemental Restraint System is 
designed to activate when the vehicle is in a 
collision similar to hitting a fixed barrier head 
on at 8-14 mph. The fact that the air bags did 
not inflate in a collision does not mean that 
something is wrong with the system. Rather, it 
means the forces were not of the type sufficient 
to cause activation.
If the vehicle is in a moderate or severe frontal 
collision, the system is activated and the air bags 
inflate rapidly. After the air bag inflates, it will 
quickly deflate. After the air bag deployment, 
you may notice a smoke-like, powdery residue 
or smell the burnt propellant. This is normal. 
The residue may consist of cornstarch or talcum 
powder (which is used to lubricate the air bag) 
or sodium compounds, such as sodium 
carbonates (e.g. baking soda) that result from the 
combustion process that inflates the air bag. 
Small amounts of sodium hydroxide may be 
present which may irritate the skin and eyes, but 
none of the residue is toxic. The Air Bag 
Supplemental Restraint System will reduce, but 
not eliminate all injuries in an accident. 
107
108 
RWARNING 
Several air bag system components get hot 
after inflation. Do not try to touch them 
after inflation. 
RWARNING 
The air bag will inflate only once. The 
system is designed to function on a 
one-time-only basis. If the air bag is 
inflated, THE AIR BAG WILL NOT 
FUNCTION AGAIN AND MUST BE 
REPLACED IMMEDIATELY. If the air 
bag is not replaced, this will increase the 
risk of injury in a subsequent collision. 
The Air Bag Supplemental Restraint System 
consists of: 
qdriver and passenger air bag modules (which 
include the inflators and air bags), 
qone or more impact and safing sensors, 
qa system diagnostic module, 
qa readiness light and tone, 
qand the electrical wiring which connects the 
components. 
The diagnostic module monitors its own circuits, 
the air bag electrical system, the air bag 
readiness light, the air bag power and the air 
bag inflators.
109 
Inflated driver-side air bag 
Inflated passenger-side air bag
Determining if System Is Operational 
The Air Bag Supplemental Restraint System uses 
a readiness light and a tone to indicate the 
condition of the system. The readiness light is in 
the instrument cluster. When you turn the 
ignition key to ON, this light will illuminate for 
approximately six (6) seconds and then turn off. 
This indicates that the system is operating 
normally. NOTE: Routine maintenance of the air 
bag system is not required. 
A problem with the system is indicated by one 
or more of the following: 
qthe readiness light will either flash or stay lit, 
qthe readiness light will not light immediately 
after ignition is turned on, 
qa group of five beeps will be heard. The tone 
pattern will repeat periodically until the 
problem and light are repaired. 
If any of these things happen, even 
intermittently, have the Air Bag Supplemental 
Restraint System serviced at your Ford or 
Lincoln-Mercury dealer immediately. Unless 
serviced, the system may not function properly 
in the event of a collision. 
Disposal of Air Bags and Air Bag 
Equipped Vehicles 
For disposal of air bags or air bag equipped 
vehicles, see your local Ford or Lincoln-Mercury 
dealer. Air bags MUST BE disposed of by 
qualified personnel. 
110
Safety Restraints for Children 
In the U.S. and Canada, you are required by law 
to use safety restraints for children. If small 
children ride in your vehicle — this generally 
includes children who are four years old or 
younger and who weigh 40 pounds (18 kg) or 
less — you must put them in safety seats that 
are made specially for children. Safety belts 
alone do not provide maximum protection for 
these children. Check your local and state laws 
for specific requirements. 
111 
RWARNING 
Never let a passenger hold a child on his 
or her lap while the vehicle is moving. 
The passenger cannot protect the child 
from injury in a collision. 
RWARNING 
To prevent the risk of injury, make sure 
children sit where they can be properly 
restrained. 
RWARNING 
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a 
cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. 
In a collision, people riding in these areas 
are more likely to be seriously injured or 
killed. Do not allow people to ride in any 
area of your vehicle that is not equipped 
with seats and safety belts. Be sure 
everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and 
using a safety belt properly.
When possible, put children in the rear seat of 
your vehicle. Accident statistics suggest that 
children are safer when properly restrained in 
the rear seating positions than in the front 
seating positions. 
112 
RWARNING 
Failure to follow all instructions on the 
proper use of child seats or the vehicle 
restraint systems can result in serious 
injury or death in the event of a sudden 
stop or collision. 
RWARNING 
Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s 
instructions included with the safety seat 
you put in your vehicle. If you do not 
install and use the safety seat properly, 
the child may be injured in a sudden stop 
or collision. 
RWARNING 
Safety belts and seats can become hot in a 
vehicle that has been closed up in sunny 
weather; they could burn a small child. 
Check seat covers and buckles before you 
place a child anywhere near them. 
RWARNING 
Do not leave children, unreliable adults, 
or pets unattended in your vehicle.
Safety Seats for Children 
Use a safety belt that is recommended for the 
size and weight of the child. Always follow the 
safety seat manufacturer’s instructions when 
installing and using the safety seat. 
Ford recommends the use of a child safety seat 
having a top tether strap. Install the child safety 
seat in a seating position which is capable of 
providing a tether anchorage. For more 
information on top tether straps see Attaching 
Safety Seats With Tether Straps in this chapter. 
When installing a child safety seat, be sure to 
use the correct safety belt buckle for that seating 
position, and make sure the tongue is securely 
fastened in the buckle. For a shoulder/lap belt 
combination with a sliding tongue, make sure 
the retractor is in the automatic locking mode. 
113 
RWARNING 
When using forward-facing child seats 
move the passenger seat as far back from 
the instrument panel as possible. Never 
secure rear-facing child seats or infant 
carriers in the front seat. 
The force of the rapidly inflating passenger air 
bag could push the top of the rear-facing seat 
against the vehicle seatback, armrests or console. 
Rear-facing infant seats must always be secured 
in the rear seat. 
All child restraint systems are designed to be 
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or by the 
lap portion of a lap-shoulder belt.
114 
RWARNING 
If you do not properly secure the safety 
seat, the child occupying the seat may be 
injured during a collision or sudden stop. 
An unsecured safety seat could also injure 
other passengers. 
RWARNING 
Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s 
instructions included with the safety seat 
you put in your vehicle. If you do not 
install and use the safety seat properly, 
the child may be injured in a sudden stop 
or collision. 
Installing Child Safety Seats 
Your vehicle is equipped with a dual locking 
mode retractor on the shoulder belt portion of 
the front passenger seat and both rear seats. The 
automatic locking mode must be used when 
installing a child seat or infant carrier in the 
front passenger seat or rear seats. 
RWARNING 
Rear-facing child seats or infant carriers 
should never be placed in the front seats.
If you choose to install a child safety seat in the 
front seat, move the seat as far back as possible. 
1. Position the child seat or infant carrier on 
115 
the passenger seat of the vehicle. 
2. Pull down on the shoulder belt, then grasp 
the shoulder belt and lap belt together. 
Grasping lap and shoulder belt together
3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt 
116 
portions together, route the tongue through 
the child seat according to the child seat 
manufacturer’s instructions. Be sure the belt 
webbing is not twisted. 
Routing safety belt through child seat or infant carrier
117 
Buckling the belt
4. Grasp the shoulder portion of the belt and 
118 
pull downward until all of the belt is 
extracted and a click is heard. At this time, 
the retractor is in the automatic locking 
mode (child seat restraint mode). 
Setting the retractor to automatic locking mode
119 
5. Allow the belt to retract. Pull up on the 
shoulder webbing. A clicking sound will be 
heard as the belt retracts. This indicates that 
the retractor is in the automatic locking 
mode. Push down on the child seat while 
you pull up on the belt webbbing to remove 
any slack in the belt. 
Removing slack from belt
6. Before placing the child in the child seat or 
120 
infant carrier, forcibly tilt the seat from side 
to side, and tug it forward to make sure that 
the seat is securely held in place. 
Checking that the seat is secure
121 
7. Double check that the retractor is in the 
automatic locking mode. Try to pull more 
belt out of the retractor. If you cannot, the 
belt is in the automatic locking mode. 
Checking the retractor 
8. Check to make sure that the child seat or 
infant carrier is properly secured prior to 
each use. If the belt is not locked, repeat 
steps 4 through 7. 
NOTE: To remove the retractor from automatic 
lock mode, allow seat belt retract fully 
to its stowed position and the retractor 
will automatically switch back to the 
vehicle sensitive locking mode for 
normal adult usage.
122 
RWARNING 
Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s 
instructions included with the safety seat 
you put in your vehicle. If you do not 
install and use the safety seat properly, 
the child may be injured in a sudden stop 
or collision. 
Attaching Safety Seats With Tether Straps 
Some manufacturers make safety seats that 
include a tether strap that goes over the back of 
the vehicle seat and attaches to an anchoring 
point. Other manufacturers offer the tether strap 
as an accessory. Contact the manufacturer of 
your child safety seat for information about 
ordering a tether strap. 
Front Seats 
To install a tether from a child safety seat in the 
front seat: 
1. Buckle the lap/shoulder belt (in the seat 
directly behind the front passenger seat in 
which the child safety seat will be installed). 
2. Pull all the stored belt out of the rear seat 
retractor to switch the retractor to automatic 
locking mode. 
3. Let the retractor wind up the slack from the 
lap/shoulder belt. A clicking sound should 
be heard as the belt retracts, indicating that 
the retractor is in automatic locking mode. 
4. Install the child safety seat in the front seat. 
Refer to the previous section on Installing 
Safety Seats. Hook the tether strap hook 
around the webbing near the center of the 
shoulder portion of the locked lap/shoulder 
belt. 
5. Tighten the tether strap.
Rear Seats 
If you use a tethered safety seat on one of the 
rear seats, install a tether anchor bracket to one 
of the two 0.3 inch (8 mm) weld nuts on the 
rear of the cargo area below the opening for the 
liftgate. 
Tether Anchorage Hardware 
Tether anchor hardware kits can be obtained at 
no charge from any Ford or Lincoln-Mercury 
dealer. 
Be sure to follow the child safety seat 
manufacturer’s instructions. 
123 
RWARNING 
Tighten the anchor according to 
specifications. Otherwise, the safety seat 
may not be properly secured and the child 
may be injured in a sudden stop or 
collision. 
Installing the Anchor Bracket 
1. Open the liftgate and take out the luggage 
compartment cover (if equipped). 
2. The anchorage nuts used to secure the tether 
anchor are located in the rear body panel 
behind the trim at the rear of the luggage 
compartment. Remove the trim panel. The 
backside of the panel is scored at the 
locations of the anchorage nuts. Make a hole 
the size of the scoring in the trim panel to 
provide access to the anchor nut. The hole 
should be made on the same side of the 
vehicle as the child safety seat will be 
located. Reinstall the trim panel.
3. Install the hardware for anchoring the tether 
124 
following the instructions in the tether 
anchorage hardware kit. 
4. Re-install luggage compartment cover. 
Installing the anchor bracket
125 
Starting 
Fuel-Injected Engines 
When starting a fuel-injected engine, the most 
important thing to remember is to avoid 
pressing down on the accelerator before or 
during starting. Only use the accelerator when 
you have problems getting your vehicle started. 
See Starting Your Engine in this chapter for 
details about when to use the accelerator while 
you start your vehicle. 
Starting Your Vehicle 
Preparing to Start Your Vehicle 
RWARNING 
Do not start your vehicle in a closed 
garage or in other enclosed areas. Exhaust 
fumes can be toxic. Always open the 
garage door before you start the engine. 
Before you start your vehicle, do the following: 
1. Make sure all occupants in the vehicle 
buckle their safety belts. See Safety Restraints 
in the Index for more details. 
2. Make sure the headlamps and other 
accessories are turned off when starting.
3. If you have an automatic transaxle, make 
126 
sure that the gearshift is in P (Park) and the 
parking brake is set before you turn the key. 
If you have a manual transaxle, make sure 
that the parking brake is fully set, push the 
clutch pedal to the floor, and put the 
gearshift into Neutral before you turn the 
key. (Remember, the starter will operate 
only if the clutch pedal is pushed all the 
way to the floor.) 
Testing the Warning Lights 
Before you start your vehicle, you should test 
the warning lights on the instrument panel to 
make sure that they work. Refer to the 
Instrumentation chapter. 
Starting Your Engine 
To start your engine: 
1. Follow the steps under Preparing to Start 
Your Vehicle at the beginning of this section. 
2. Keep your foot on the brake pedal and turn 
the ignition key to the ON position. 
3. DO NOT depress the accelerator pedal when 
starting your engine. DO NOT use the 
accelerator while the vehicle is parked. 
4. Turn the key to the START position 
(cranking) until the engine starts. Allow the 
key to return to the ON position after the 
engine has started. 
If you have difficulty in turning the key, 
rotate the steering wheel slightly because it 
may be binding.
127 
For a cold engine: 
qAt temperatures 10°F (-12°C) and below: If 
the engine does not start in fifteen (15) 
seconds on the first try, turn the key to OFF, 
wait approximately ten (10) seconds so you 
do not flood the engine, then try again. 
qAt temperatures above 10°F (-12°C): If the 
engine does not start in five (5) seconds on 
the first try, turn the key to OFF, wait 
approximately ten (10) seconds so you do not 
flood the engine, then try again. 
For a warm engine: 
qDo not hold the key in the START position 
for more than five (5) seconds at a time. If 
the engine does not start within five (5) 
seconds on the first try, turn the key to the 
OFF position. Wait a few seconds after the 
starter stops, then try again. 
Whenever you start your vehicle, release the key 
as soon as the engine starts. Excessive cranking 
could damage the starter. 
After you start the engine, let it idle for a few 
seconds. Keep your foot on the brake pedal and 
put the gearshift lever in gear. Release the 
parking brake. Slowly release the brake pedal 
and drive away in the normal manner. 
NOTE: Automatic transaxle equipped vehicles 
have an interlock that prevents you 
from shifting out of P (Park) unless 
your foot is on the brake pedal.
If the engine does not start after two attempts: 
1. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position. 
2. Press the accelerator all the way to the floor 
128 
and hold it. 
3. Turn the ignition key to the START position. 
4. Release the ignition key when the engine 
starts. 
5. Release the accelerator gradually as the 
engine speeds up. 
If the engine still does not start, the fuel pump 
shut-off switch may have been activated. For 
directions on how to reset the switch see Fuel 
Pump Shut-Off Switch in the index. 
A computer system controls the engine’s idle 
speed. When you start your vehicle, the engine’s 
idle speed normally runs high. These faster 
engine speeds will make your vehicle coast 
slightly faster than its normal idle speed. It 
should, however, slow down after a short time. 
If it does not, have the idle speed checked. 
If the engine idle speed does not slow down 
automatically, do not allow your vehicle to idle 
for more than 10 minutes. Have the vehicle 
checked. 
RWARNING 
Extended idling at high engine speeds can 
produce very high temperatures in the 
engine and exhaust system, creating the 
risk of fire or other damage.
129 
RWARNING 
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in 
dry grass or other dry ground cover. The 
emission system heats up the engine 
compartment and exhaust system, which 
can start a fire. 
Engine Block Heater (If equipped) 
Engine block heaters are strongly recommended 
if you live in a region where temperatures reach 
-10°F (-23°C) or below. An engine block heater 
warms the engine coolant, which improves 
starting, warms up the engine faster, and allows 
the heater-defrost system to respond quickly. 
To turn the heater on, simply plug it into a 
grounded 110-volt outlet. Ford recommends that 
you use a 110-volt circuit that is protected by a 
ground fault circuit interrupter. 
RWARNING 
To prevent electrical shock, do not use 
your heater with ungrounded electrical 
systems or two-pronged (cheater) adapters. 
For best results, plug the heater in at least three 
hours before you start your vehicle. Using the 
heater for longer than three hours will not 
damage the engine, so you can plug it in at 
night to start your vehicle the following 
morning.
If the Engine Cranks but Does 
Not Start or Does Not Start After 
a Collision 
The Fuel Pump Shut-off Switch 
If the engine cranks but does not start or does 
not start even after a small collision, the fuel 
pump shut-off switch may have been activated. 
The shut-off switch is a device intended to stop 
the fuel pump when your vehicle has been 
involved in a substantial jolt. Refer to Roadside 
Emergencies for more information. 
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes 
Carbon monoxide, although colorless and 
odorless, is present in exhaust fumes. Take 
precautions to avoid its dangerous effects. 
130 
RWARNING 
Do not start your vehicle in a closed 
garage or in other enclosed areas. Exhaust 
fumes can be toxic. Always open the 
garage door before you start the engine. 
RWARNING 
If you smell exhaust fumes inside your 
vehicle, have your dealer inspect your 
vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you 
smell exhaust fumes.
Have the exhaust and body ventilation systems 
checked whenever: 
qyour vehicle is raised for service 
qthe sound of the exhaust system changes 
qyour vehicle has been damaged in a collision 
Improve your ventilation by keeping all air inlet 
vents clear of snow, leaves, and other debris. 
If the engine is idling while you are stopped in 
an open area for long periods of time, open the 
windows at least one inch (2.5 cm). Also, adjust 
the heating or air conditioning system to bring 
in outside air. 
qIf you are using the heater, set the fan speed 
on MEDIUM or HIGH with the function 
selector control on VENT. 
qIf you want to use the air conditioner, set the 
function selector control in the NORM A/C 
position which brings in fresh air. 
131
Removing the Key From the 
Ignition 
1. Put the gearshift selector lever in P (Park) 
132 
(automatic transaxle) or 1 (First) (manual 
transaxle). 
2. Set the parking brake fully. 
3. For a manual transaxle: Push in on the lock 
cylinder and turn the key from ACC to 
LOCK. 
For an automatic transaxle: Turn the key to 
LOCK. 
4. Remove the key. 
If the driver or passenger door is open while the 
key is still in the ignition, a warning chime 
sounds. 
RWARNING 
Always set the parking brake fully and 
make sure that the gearshift is securely 
latched in P (Park) (automatic transaxle) or 
in 1 (First) (manual transaxle). 
RWARNING 
Do not leave children, unreliable adults, 
or pets unattended in your vehicle.
133 
Driving 
Brakes 
Applying the Brakes 
Your vehicle may have four-wheel power 
anti-lock disc brakes which adjust automatically 
through everyday use. 
Some models have power front disc brakes and 
rear drum brakes which automatically adjust as 
the brake pads and linings wear down. 
If your vehicle does not have anti-lock brakes, 
apply the brake pedal gradually. Use the 
“squeeze” technique — push on the brake pedal 
with a steadily increasing force. This allows the 
wheels to continue to roll while you are slowing 
down, which lets you steer properly. 
If your vehicle does not have anti-lock brakes, 
extreme braking can make the wheels lock and 
slide, causing you to lose control of the steering. 
If the wheels lock, release the brake pedal and 
repeat the “squeeze” technique. 
Do not drive with your foot resting on the brake 
pedal; you will wear out the linings and increase 
your vehicle’s stopping distance. Brake rotor 
damage may also eventually occur. 
NOTE: If you are driving down a long or 
steep hill, shift to a lower gear and do 
not apply your brakes continuously. If 
you apply your brakes continuously, 
they may overheat and become less 
effective.
Occasional brake noise is normal and often does 
not indicate a performance concern with the 
vehicle’s brake system. In normal operation, 
automotive brake systems may emit occasional 
or intermittent squeal or groan noises when the 
brakes are applied. Such noises are usually 
heard during the first few brake applications in 
the morning; however they may be heard at any 
time while braking and can be aggravated by 
environmental conditions such as cold, heat, 
moisture, road dust, salt or mud. If a 
"metal-to-metal" or "continuous grinding" sound 
is present while braking, the brake linings may 
be worn-out and should be inspected by a 
qualified service technician. 
Anti-lock Brake System (If equipped) 
If your vehicle is equipped with the anti-lock 
brake system (ABS), the wheels will not lock and 
slide when you press down hard on the brake 
pedal. The ABS automatically starts releasing 
and reapplying the front brakes independently 
and the rear brakes together whenever your 
vehicle’s wheels start to lock. When this 
happens, you will feel the brake pedal pulsate. 
This is an indication that the ABS is working 
correctly and is normal. 
If the brake pedal is applied while the vehicle is 
driven over uneven road surfaces, the ABS may 
cycle and the driver may sense a pulsation in 
the brake pedal, accompanied by a slight up and 
down movement of the pedal height and a 
clicking sound. This may also happen when 
driving on an inclined surface such as a 
driveway while making a sharp turn. This is a 
normal condition. 
Each time you turn the ignition key to the ON 
position, the ABS will function through one test 
cycle. When this happens, the ABS light will 
illuminate for up to five seconds. If the light 
illuminates longer than five seconds, shut off the 
134
engine and restart. If it remains illuminated, it 
means the ABS is disabled and should be 
serviced immediately to restore the benefits of 
the anti-lock feature. Normal braking is not 
affected unless the red BRAKE system warning 
light is also illuminated. 
ABS has self-check capabilities. As described 
above, the system turns on the ABS light each 
time you start your engine. After the engine is 
started and the ABS light turns off, the system 
performs another test the first time the vehicle 
reaches 4-9 mph (6-15 km/h). The system turns 
on the ABS pump motor for approximately 1/2 
second. At this time, a mechanical noise may be 
heard. This is a normal part of the self-check 
feature. If a malfunction is found during this 
check the ABS light will come on. 
On vehicles equipped with an antilock braking 
system (ABS), a noise from the hydraulic pump 
motor and pulsation in the pedal may be 
observed during ABS braking events. Pedal 
pulsation coupled with noise while braking 
under panic conditions or on loose gravel, wet 
or snowy roads is normal and indicated proper 
functioning of the vehicle’s antilock brake 
system. If the vehicle has continuous vibration or 
shudder while braking, mainly in the steering 
wheel, the vehicle most likely needs service. 
Ford Motor Company has not found any 
detrimental effects of popular mobile radio 
transmitting equipment installed on vehicles 
equipped with the Anti-lock Brake System if 
normal radio installation practices are rigidly 
followed. However, if after installing mobile 
radio transmitting equipment, the Anti-lock 
Brake System light comes on at any time other 
than immediately after turning the key to the 
135
ON position, or during a sudden stop, have 
your mobile radio dealer inspect the radio 
installation. Proper radio installation procedures 
to be followed are published by the radio 
manufacturer. 
Parking Brake 
The parking brake should be used whenever 
you park your vehicle. 
If the brakes don’t operate while the vehicle is 
in motion, you can make an emergency stop 
with the parking brake, however, the stopping 
distance will be much greater than normal. 
The parking brake lever is located between the 
front seats. To set the parking brake, put your 
foot on the brake pedal while pulling the 
parking brake handle fully and firmly upward. 
Parking brake (handbrake) 
136
137 
R WARNING 
To prevent personal injury, do not release 
the parking brake while outside the 
vehicle. 
R WARNING 
Always set the parking brake fully and 
make sure that the gearshift is securely 
latched in P (Park) (automatic transaxle) or 
in 1 (First) (manual transaxle). 
Always check the Brake Warning Light each 
time you start your engine. Driving with the 
parking brake on will cause the brakes to wear 
out quickly and will reduce the fuel economy. 
R WARNING 
If the parking brake is fully released, but 
the Brake System light remains on, have 
the brakes checked immediately. They 
may not be working properly. 
The parking brake is not designed to stop a 
moving vehicle, but you can use the parking 
brake to stop your vehicle in an emergency if 
the normal brakes fail. However, since the 
parking brake applies only the rear brakes, the 
stopping distance will increase greatly and the 
handling of your vehicle will be adversely 
affected. 
Steering Your Vehicle 
Your vehicle is equipped with power steering. 
Power steering uses energy from the engine to 
help steer your vehicle. 
If the amount of effort needed to steer your 
vehicle changes at a constant vehicle speed, have 
the power steering system checked. If the power
steering system breaks down (or if the engine is 
turned off), you can steer the vehicle manually 
but it takes more effort. 
Never hold the steering wheel to the extreme 
right or left for more than five seconds if the 
engine is running. This can damage the power 
steering pump. 
Procedures for driving your vehicle will vary 
depending on which type of transaxle your 
vehicle has. You may be familiar with the term 
“transmission.” We use transaxle because it is a 
more accurate term for vehicles that have 
front-wheel drive. 
Your vehicle has one of two types of transaxles: 
qa manual five-speed overdrive 
qan automatic four-speed overdrive 
Driving with an Automatic 
Overdrive Transaxle 
Putting Your Vehicle in Gear 
The automatic transaxle on your vehicle is an 
electrically controlled four speed. The highest 
gear is Overdrive. The Overdrive position is 
reflected by D in the shift selector indicator. 
The automatic transaxle uses the conventional 
selector lever, and an Overdrive OFF button. All 
normal driving is done with the selector in the 
D position. 
138
Automatic shift lever 
Your automatic transaxle vehicle has a 
console-mounted shift selector lever. You must 
step on the brake pedal, start the engine, and 
then push in the thumb button to move the shift 
selector lever to the position you choose. 
139
140 
R WARNING 
Hold the brake pedal down while you 
move the gearshift lever from position to 
position. If you do not hold the brake 
pedal down, your vehicle may move 
unexpectedly and injure someone. 
Shift-lock System (If equipped) 
For your safety, the automatic transaxle has a 
shift-lock system, which prevents shifting the 
transaxle out of the P (Park) position without 
depressing the brake pedal when the ignition 
key is in the ON position. 
To shift the transaxle out of the P (Park) 
position: 
1. Depress and hold the brake pedal. 
2. Start the engine. 
3. Push in the thumb button and move the 
shift selector lever. 
4. See Shift Lock Emergency Override in this 
section for more information.
Automatic console-mounted gearshift lever 
NOTE: When the ignition key is in the ACC 
or LOCK position, the transaxle cannot 
be shifted from the P (Park) position. 
If the brake pedal is repeatedly 
depressed and released when the 
ignition is in the ON position and the 
selector lever is in the P (Park) 
position, a chattering near the gearshift 
lever may be heard. This is not a 
malfunction. 
141
NOTE: Your vehicle’s gearshift lever is 
142 
securely latched in P (Park) if you 
cannot move it without pushing in the 
thumb button. Keep the brake pedal 
depressed while moving your gearshift 
lever. 
To make the system more effective, the ignition 
key cannot be removed unless the gearshift 
selector lever is in the P (Park) position. 
Shift lock emergency override 
If the gearshift selector lever should fail to move 
from the P (Park) position with the brake pedal 
depressed, continue depressing the brake pedal. 
1. Remove the shift lock override cover with a 
screwdriver. 
2. Insert the screwdriver into the shift lock 
override opening and push the screwdriver 
down. 
3. Push and hold the thumb button. 
4. Move the shift selector lever. 
If you need to shift out of P (Park) by using the 
alternate procedure described above, it is 
possible that a fuse has blown and that your 
brakelamps may also not be functional. Please 
refer to the chapter titled Roadside Emergencies in 
this Owner Guide for instructions on checking 
and replacing fuses. 
R WARNING 
DO NOT DRIVE YOUR VEHICLE UNTIL 
YOU VERIFY THAT THE BRAKELAMPS 
ARE WORKING.
Once the gearshift is secure in the desired 
position, release the brake pedal and use the 
accelerator as necessary. 
Driving 
When to use Overdrive (D with Overdrive 
activated) 
Overdrive is the usual driving position for an 
automatic overdrive transaxle. It works the same 
way Drive (Overdrive OFF) works, automatically 
upshifting or downshifting as the vehicle speeds 
or slows. 
However, Overdrive also shifts into a fourth 
gear —an overdrive gear — when your vehicle 
cruises at a consistent speed for any length of 
time. This fourth gear will increase your fuel 
economy when you travel at cruising speeds. 
Cancelling Overdrive 
Overdrive may not be appropriate for certain 
terrain. If the transaxle shifts back and forth 
between third and fourth gears while you are 
driving on hilly roads, select Drive (Overdrive 
OFF) by cancelling Overdrive as outlined below. 
The Overdrive Off (O/D OFF) button is located 
on the gearshift. The Overdrive Off (O/D OFF) 
light is located in the instrument cluster. 
The O/D OFF light is not illuminated during 
normal vehicle operation. This allows the 
transaxle to upshift and downshift from 1st 
through 4th gears. When the O/D OFF button is 
pressed, Overdrive is cancelled and the O/D 
OFF light in the instrument cluster illuminates. 
When the O/D OFF light is illuminated, the 
transaxle will upshift and downshift from 1st 
through 3rd gears. 
143
Overdrive OFF indicator light 
To return the transaxle to normal operation (1st 
through 4th gears) press the O/D OFF button 
again. The O/D OFF button may be used to 
cancel Overdrive any time the vehicle is being 
driven. Each time your vehicle is started, the 
Overdrive system will automatically be in the 
normal “overdrive on” mode and the light will 
not be illuminated. 
If the light does not illuminate when the O/D 
OFF button is pressed, or if the light flashes 
when you are driving, have your vehicle 
serviced at the first opportunity. If this 
condition persists, damage could occur to the 
transaxle. 
When to use Drive (D with Overdrive OFF) 
In Drive (Overdrive OFF), your vehicle 
automatically upshifts or downshifts from 1st 
through 4th gears as the vehicle speeds up or 
slows down. It also downshifts when you need 
extra acceleration to pass or when driving up a 
hill. 
Selecting Drive (Overdrive OFF) will eliminate 
the transaxle’s tendency to “hunt” between third 
and fourth gears while driving over hilly terrain. 
It also gives your vehicle more engine braking to 
slow your vehicle than Overdrive does. 
144
When to use 2 (Second) 
Use Second (2) to help drive up moderately 
steep hills or when starting on slick surfaces. It 
prevents the transaxle from frequently shifting 
up and down. It also gives more engine braking 
than Overdrive or Drive when going down hills. 
Do not go faster than 64 mph (102 km/h) with 
the gearshift in the Second (2) position. If you 
shift from Overdrive or Drive to Second because 
of hilly terrain, your transaxle will automatically 
downshift in the proper sequence. 
When to use 1 (First) 
When your vehicle is in First (1), it gives more 
engine braking to slow your car than Drive (D 
with Overdrive OFF) on downgrades. 
Do not go faster than 32 mph (50 km/h) in this 
gear. You can upshift from First (1) into D 
Position at any speed. If you shift from 
Overdrive or Drive to First (1) because of hilly 
terrain, your transaxle will automatically 
downshift in the proper sequence. 
Reverse 
In the Reverse (R) position, the vehicle moves 
only backward. Your vehicle must be stopped 
before shifting into Reverse (R). 
Neutral 
In Neutral (N), the wheels of the transaxle are 
not locked. Your vehicle will roll freely, even on 
the slightest incline, unless the parking brake or 
brakes are on. 
145
Parking 
Always come to a complete stop before you shift 
into P (Park). Make sure that the shift selector 
lever is securely latched in P (Park). This locks 
the transaxle and prevents the front wheels from 
rotating. 
146 
R WARNING 
Always set the parking brake fully and 
make sure the gearshift is latched in P 
(Park). Turn off the ignition whenever you 
leave your vehicle. 
R WARNING 
Never leave your vehicle unattended 
while it is running. 
You can tell the gearshift is securely latched 
when the thumb button has popped out. In this 
position the gearshift selector lever cannot be 
moved unless the button is pushed in. 
R WARNING 
Hold the brake pedal down while you 
move the gearshift lever from position to 
position. If you do not hold the brake 
pedal down, your vehicle may move 
unexpectedly and injure someone.
Driving with a Manual Transaxle 
Using the Clutch 
After the engine starts, allow it to idle for a few 
seconds. Then, hold your right foot on the brake 
pedal, push the clutch pedal to the floor with 
your left foot, and move the shift selector lever 
into 1 (First) or R (Reverse). 
To move the vehicle, lift your right foot off the 
brake pedal and slowly release the clutch pedal. 
(You need to press down slowly on the 
accelerator at the same time you release the 
clutch pedal.) 
Do not drive with your foot resting on the 
clutch pedal and do not use the clutch to hold 
your vehicle at a standstill while waiting on a 
hill. These actions will seriously reduce clutch 
life. 
Driving with your foot resting on the clutch may 
cause the vehicle to jerk sharply when pressing 
or removing your other foot from the 
accelerator. 
147
Shifting the Gears 
The gearshift for a manual transaxle is mounted 
on the floor. The gearshift can be in one of 
seven possible positions, as shown. 
Shift pattern 
Always push the clutch pedal all the way in 
when you shift. You should upshift according to 
the speeds given in the chart later in this 
chapter. 
Sometimes, you will upshift at higher speeds. 
For example, you may want to stay in a lower 
gear to gain more power for passing or for 
climbing a hill. However, you must stay within 
the range when you upshift or downshift. 
148
Backing up 
To shift into R (Reverse): 
1. Bring your vehicle to a complete stop. 
2. Push the clutch pedal in all the way to the 
floor and hold it. If you do not hold the 
clutch pedal in all the way, you may hear a 
grinding noise when you shift. 
3. Put the gearshift in Neutral and wait at least 
3 seconds before shifting into R (Reverse) to 
prevent a grinding noise. Do not release the 
clutch. 
149 
4. Then push the gearshift all the way to the 
right and pull it down into R (Reverse). 
When in 5 (Fifth) gear, you can engage R 
(Reverse) only by moving the gearshift to 
Neutral before you shift into R (Reverse). 
This is a special lockout feature that protects 
you from accidentally shifting into R 
(Reverse) when you downshift from 5 (Fifth) 
gear. 
5. Once R (Reverse) is engaged, slowly release 
the clutch pedal from the floor. 
If R (Reverse) is not engaged, continue to push 
the clutch pedal in while you put the gearshift 
back into Neutral. Then, release the clutch pedal 
for a moment and repeat steps 2 through 5.
Upshifting 
For normal acceleration, you should upshift at 
the following speeds: 
For cruising, you should upshift at the following 
speeds. 
Downshifting 
When you slow down or climb a steep hill, 
always downshift before the engine starts to lose 
power. Downshifting reduces the chance of 
stalling and gives your vehicle better acceleration 
to increase speed again. 
When you drive down steep hills, downshifting 
helps you keep a safe speed and helps prevent 
unnecessary wear on the brakes. 
When you come to a stop, do not downshift 
through each gear. Disengage the clutch and use 
the brake as necessary. Downshifting through 
the gears decreases your vehicle’s fuel economy. 
150
Parking 
To park your vehicle, shift into 1 (First), set the 
parking brake fully, and turn off the ignition. 
151 
WARNING 
Do not park your vehicle in Neutral, it 
may move unexpectedly and injure 
someone. Use 1 (First) gear and set the 
parking brake fully. 
Driving With a Heavy Load 
There are limits to the amount of weight your 
vehicle can carry. The total weight of your 
vehicle, plus the weight of the passengers and 
cargo, should never be more than the Gross 
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). Also, the weight 
that your vehicle carries over each axle should 
never be more than the Gross Axle Weight 
Rating (GAWR) for the respective axle. 
You can find your vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR 
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label on 
the left door lock pillar. 
The weight limits of your vehicle’s tires affect 
the GVWR or GAWR limitations. Usage of 
replacement tires with higher weight limits than 
originals does not increase GVWR or GAWR. 
Usage of lower capacity replacement tires may 
lower GVWR and GAWR limitations. 
WARNING 
Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR 
specified on the Safety Compliance 
Certification Label.
Limiting Your Vehicle’s Load 
The load you add to your vehicle must not 
exceed the maximum load stated on the tire 
information decal. 
To figure the weight of your vehicle’s load, add 
the weights of: 
qthe driver and passengers 
qluggage and any other items that you put in 
your vehicle 
qthe weight of any equipment that has been 
added to your vehicle since it was delivered 
to your dealer 
If you do not know the actual weights of these 
items, use the following procedure to figure the 
weight of a load: 
1. Weigh your vehicle without the driver, 
152 
passengers and luggage. You might take 
your vehicle to a shipping company or an 
inspection station for trucks. 
2. Then weigh your vehicle with the driver, 
passengers and luggage. 
3. Subtract the first reading from the second to 
figure the total weight of the load.
After determining this load, you must also make 
sure that the total weight of your vehicle, plus 
the load it carries, is less than its GVWR. Also, 
make sure that the weight your vehicle carries 
over each axle is less than the GAWR for the 
respective axle. 
If your vehicle exceeds the GVWR, remove cargo 
from your vehicle accordingly. If your vehicle 
exceeds the GAWR for either axle, shift the load 
or remove cargo accordingly. 
153 
WARNING 
Improper distribution of your vehicle’s 
load or carrying weight in excess of the 
amount shown on the tire decal can cause 
rapid tire wear or loss of vehicle control. 
Towing a Trailer 
Do not use your vehicle for towing a trailer. 
Towing Behind Another Vehicle — 
Recreational Vehicle 
Towing an automatic transaxle (ATX) equipped 
vehicle behind another vehicle, such as a 
Recreational Vehicle (RV), is not recommended 
unless a front wheel dolly or trailer is used. Do 
not tow your ATX equipped vehicle with the 
front wheels on the ground or transaxle damage 
may occur.
Towing a manual transaxle (MTX) equipped 
vehicle behind another vehicle, such as a 
Recreational Vehicle (RV), is allowed only if it is 
towed forward. The parking brake must be 
released, the gearshift must be in Neutral, the 
ignition key must be in the ACC position, the 
battery must be disconnected to eliminate battery 
drain, and the steering wheel unlocked. You 
may tow your MTX equipped vehicle only in a 
forward direction with the front wheels on the 
ground without damage to the transaxle. 
Do not tow your manual transaxle equipped 
vehicle at a speed faster than 55 mph 
(88 km/h). The maximum towing distance is 
unlimited. 
154 
WARNING 
Never use a tow bar that attaches to the 
bumper when you tow your vehicle. This 
could damage the bumper and cause an 
accident.
155 
Roadside Emergencies 
Hazard Flasher 
To alert other drivers to hazardous situations, 
press the hazard flasher switch on the top of the 
steering column. All the turn signals will flash 
on and off at the same time. The flashers will 
also operate while the brake pedal is applied. To 
turn the flashers off, press the switch again. 
The flashers work whether your vehicle is 
running or not. The flashers will work for up to 
two hours when the battery is fully charged and 
in good condition. They will not drain the 
battery excessively unless they are left on for an 
extended period of time. 
If the flashers run for longer than 2 hours while 
your engine is not running, or if your battery is 
not fully charged, your battery could be drained.
Hazard warning flasher switch 
If the Engine Cranks but Does 
Not Start or Starting After a 
Collision 
The Fuel Pump Shut-off Switch 
If the engine cranks but does not start or if you 
have had a collision, the fuel pump shut-off 
switch may have been triggered. The shut-off 
switch is a device that stops the fuel pump 
when your vehicle has been involved in a 
substantial jolt. 
Once the shut-off switch is activated, you must 
reset the switch by hand before you can start 
your vehicle. 
156
157 
The location of the fuel pump shut-off switch 
RWARNING 
If you see or smell fuel, do not reset the 
switch or try to start your vehicle. Have 
all the passengers get out of the vehicle 
and call the local fire department or a 
towing service.
If your engine cranks but does not start after a 
collision or substantial jolt: 
1. Turn the key in the ignition to the LOCK 
158 
position. 
2. Check under the vehicle for leaking fuel. 
3. If you do not see or smell fuel, push the red 
reset button on the fuel pump shut-off 
switch down. 
The reset switch on your vehicle is located on 
the left side of the luggage compartment 
under the carpet. The red reset button is 
under the raised area of the rubber cover. 
4. Attempt to start your vehicle. If the vehicle 
starts, let it run a few seconds, then turn the 
key to the LOCK position. 
5. Check under the vehicle again for leaking 
fuel. If you see or smell fuel, do not start 
your vehicle again. If you do not see or 
smell fuel, you can try to start your vehicle 
again. 
Fuses 
If electrical parts in your vehicle are not 
working, the system may have been overloaded 
and blown a fuse. If a fuse blows, all the parts 
of your vehicle that use the fuse will not work. 
Your vehicle has two fuse panels. The interior 
fuse panel is below the instrument panel in front 
of the driver’s door. The main panel is under 
the hood behind the battery.
159 
Fuse panel under instrument panel 
Inside of the instrument fuse panel cover
160
161 
Fuse panel located under hood
Fuses 
Fuse panel cover located under the hood 
162
163
164
165 
To remove and replace a fuse, use the fuse 
puller provided. 
Fuse puller tool and fuse 
Relays
166
167 
RWARNING 
Always replace a fuse with one that has 
the specified amperage rating. Using a 
fuse with a higher amperage rating can 
cause severe wire damage and could start 
a fire. 
To find a fuse’s amperage rating, check the 
number on the fuse or check the color. 
Even after you replace a fuse, it may continue to 
blow if you do not find what caused the 
overload. If the fuse continues to blow, have 
your electrical system checked. 
Changing a Tire 
If you get a flat tire while you are driving, do 
not apply the brake heavily. Instead, gradually 
decrease the speed. Hold the steering wheel 
firmly and slowly move to a safe place on the 
side of the road. Park on a level spot, turn off 
the ignition, set the parking brake, and turn on 
the hazard flashers.
The Temporary Spare Tire 
You may have a high pressure temporary spare 
tire. This spare tire is smaller than a regular tire 
and is designed for emergency use only. Use it 
only when you get a flat tire and replace it as 
soon as you can. This spare tire is marked with 
the words “TEMPORARY USE ONLY” so that 
you can easily identify it. 
168 
RWARNING 
If you use the temporary spare tire 
continuously or do not follow these 
precautions, the tire could fail, causing 
you to lose control of the vehicle, possibly 
injuring yourself or others. 
When you drive with the temporary spare tire, 
DO NOT: 
qexceed 50 mph (80 km/h) under any 
circumstances. 
qload your vehicle so that it is heavier than 
the maximum vehicle load rating listed on 
the tire decal. 
quse tire chains on this tire.
qtry to repair the temporary spare tire or 
remove it from its wheel. 
quse the wheel for any other type of vehicle. 
qdrive through an automatic car wash with 
this tire. Because the temporary spare tire is 
smaller than a conventional tire, it reduces 
the ground clearance. Your vehicle may get 
caught in the rails and it could be damaged. 
Spare Tire Location 
The temporary spare tire is stored in the luggage 
compartment, under the mat and floorboard. 
Location of the temporary spare tire and jacking equipment 
To remove the jack and the temporary spare, 
turn the bolt counterclockwise. 
169
Preparing to Change the Tire 
1. Make sure that your vehicle will not move 
170 
or roll. If you have an automatic transaxle, 
put the gearshift in P (Park). If you have a 
manual transaxle, put the gearshift in 1 
(First). Set the parking brake and block the 
wheel that is diagonally opposite the tire 
that you are changing. 
Blocking the wheel diagonally opposite the tire being 
changed 
When one of the front wheels is off the ground, 
the transaxle alone will not prevent the vehicle 
from moving or slipping off the jack, even if the 
vehicle is in P (Park) or 1 (First). To prevent the 
vehicle from moving when you change one of 
the front tires, put a block behind the wheel that 
is diagonally opposite to the tire. 
RWARNING 
If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or 
someone else could be seriously injured.
171 
2. Get out the spare tire and jack. 
3. Remove any wheelcovers or hubcaps with 
the tapered end of a wheel nut wrench. 
Insert the handle of the wrench and twist it 
against the inner wheelcover flange. Remove 
any chrome nuts or plastic caps covering the 
wheel lug nuts. 
4. Loosen the wheel lug nuts by pulling up on 
the handle of the wrench one half-turn 
counterclockwise. Do not remove the wheel 
lug nuts until you raise the tire off the 
ground. 
Removing and Replacing the Tire 
1. Find the jack notch next to the door of the 
tire that you are changing. Put the jack in 
the jack notch and turn the handle of the 
jack clockwise until the wheel is completely 
off the ground. 
RWARNING 
To lessen the risk of personal injury, do 
not put any part of your body under the 
vehicle while changing a tire. Do not start 
the engine when your vehicle is on the 
jack. The jack is only meant for changing 
the tire.
Jack mounting position 
172
173 
2. Remove the lug nuts by using the lug 
wrench. Never loosen the hub nuts. See the 
following illustration if you are not sure 
where to find the lug nuts. 
Lug nut positions 
3. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire. 
4. Replace the lug nuts and tighten snug. The 
beveled edge faces inward. Do not fully 
tighten the lug nuts until you lower the 
vehicle. If you do, you could force the 
vehicle off the jack.
Your vehicle has metric (12 mm) wheel studs 
and lug nuts. During wheel removal and 
replacement, make certain that you use the same 
lug nuts to reinstall the wheel or replace them 
with nuts of the same metric size and threading. 
174 
RWARNING 
Installation of an English thread nut on a 
metric stud (or vice-versa) will not 
properly secure the wheel to the hub. 
Damaged studs may result in wheel 
separation and possible injury. 
5. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle 
counterclockwise. 
6. Remove the jack and fully tighten the lug 
nuts in the order shown in the illustration 
under step 2. 
7. Put the tire, jack, and wrench away. 
8. Unblock the wheels. 
Jump-Starting Your Vehicle 
Your vehicle has a Motorcraft maintenance-free 
battery. Your vehicle’s battery may die if you 
leave the lights on or any electrical equipment 
on after you turn the engine off. If this happens, 
you may be able to jump-start from a booster 
battery to start your vehicle. 
RWARNING 
The gases around the battery can explode 
if exposed to flames, sparks, or lit 
cigarettes. An explosion could result in 
injury or vehicle damage.
175 
RWARNING 
To protect yourself when charging a 
battery, always shield your face and eyes. 
Make sure that you can breathe fresh air. 
RWARNING 
Applying too much pressure on the ends 
when lifting a battery could cause acid to 
spill. Lift the battery with a carrier or 
with your hands on the opposite corners. 
RWARNING 
Batteries contain sulfuric acid which burns 
skin, eyes, and clothing. 
If the acid touches someone’s skin, eyes, or 
clothing, immediately flush the area with water 
for at least 15 minutes. If someone swallows the 
acid, have him or her drink lots of milk or water 
first, then Milk of Magnesia, a beaten egg, or 
vegetable oil. Call a doctor immediately. 
RWARNING 
Do not push-start your vehicle. You could 
damage the catalytic converter. For further 
information, see Jumper Cables in the 
Index. 
To avoid damaging your vehicle or your battery, 
and to avoid injury to yourself, follow these 
directions for preparing your vehicle to 
jump-start and connecting the jumper cables in 
the order they are given. If in doubt, call for 
road service.
Preparing Your Vehicle 
1. Your vehicle has a 12-volt starting system, so 
176 
you need to use a 12-volt jumper system. 
You will damage your starting motor, 
ignition system, and other electrical parts if 
you connect them to a 24-volt power supply 
(either two 12-volt batteries in series or a 
24-volt generator set). 
2. Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled 
vehicle. You could damage the vehicle’s 
electrical system. 
3. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of 
the disabled vehicle. Make sure the vehicles 
do not touch each other. Set the parking 
brake on both vehicles and stay clear of the 
engine cooling fan and other moving parts. 
4. Check all battery terminals and remove any 
excessive corrosion before you attach the 
jumper cables. 
Connecting the jumper cables 
1. Connect one end of the first jumper cable to 
the positive (+) terminal of the discharged 
battery. (You can connect either jumper cable 
to the positive (+) terminal, as long as you 
use the same cable for both positive 
terminals.) Most jumper cables have a red 
cable and a black cable. The red cable is 
generally used for the positive terminals and 
the black for the negative ones. 
2. Connect the other end of the first cable to 
the positive (+) terminal of the booster 
battery. 
3. Connect one end of the second cable to the 
negative (S) terminal of the booster battery 
— NOT to the discharged battery.
4. Connect the other end of the second cable to 
177 
a good metallic surface on the engine or 
frame of the disabled vehicle. 
RWARNING 
Do not connect the end of the second 
cable to the negative (S) terminal of the 
battery to be jumped. A spark may cause 
an explosion of the gases that surround 
the battery. 
The sequence for connecting the jumper cables
Jump-Starting 
1. Make sure that the jumper cables are not in 
178 
the way of moving engine parts, then start 
the booster vehicle. Run the engine at a 
moderate speed. 
2. Let the discharged battery charge for a few 
minutes and then start the disabled vehicle. 
It may take a couple of tries before the 
vehicle starts. If the vehicle does not start 
after several attempts, there may be a 
different problem. 
3. When both vehicles are running, let them 
idle for a few minutes to charge the 
discharged battery. 
Removing jumper cables 
1. Always remove the jumper cables in 
reverse order. Remove the negative (-) end 
of the jumper cable from the metallic surface 
on the engine or frame of the disabled 
vehicle. 
2. Remove the negative (S) cable from the 
booster battery. 
3. Remove the positive (+) cable from the 
booster battery. 
4. Remove the other end of the positive (+) 
cable from the discharged battery. 
After the vehicle is started, let it idle for a while 
to let the engine “relearn” its idle conditions. 
Drive it around for a while with all electrical 
accessories turned off to let the battery recharge. 
Driveability may be deteriorated slightly until all 
drive modes are “relearned.” You may need to 
use a battery charger to fully recharge the 
battery.
If you need to replace your battery, see Battery 
in the Maintenance and Care chapter. 
Towing Your Vehicle 
If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact 
a professional towing service or, if you are a 
member, your roadside assistance center. 
Recommended towing options include wheel lift 
towing or flat bed towing. 
When calling for a tow truck, tell the operator 
what kind of vehicle you have. A towing 
manual is available from Ford Motor Company 
for all authorized tow truck operators. Have 
your tow truck driver refer to this manual for 
the proper hook-up and towing procedures for 
your vehicle. 
179
Towing With the Back Wheels Off the 
Ground 
For automatic and manual transaxle vehicles, if 
it is necessary to tow your vehicle from the rear 
(with the rear wheels off the ground), a dolly 
must be placed under the front tires to prevent 
transaxle damage. 
If the slingbelt towing method must be used, use 
the following procedure: 
1. Place the front wheels on wheel dollies. 
2. Place T-hooks into the T-hook slots located 
180 
on the frame rail behind the rear wheels. 
3. Route the tow chain to clear the exhaust 
pipes. 
4. Position the tow bar under the rear bumper. 
5. Slowly raise the vehicle off the ground. 
6. Attach safety chains around the rear 
crossmember.
Do not use your vehicle’s steering column lock 
to secure the wheels in a straight-ahead position. 
Always use a steering wheel clamping device 
designed for towing service. 
Refer to Towing behind another vehicle 
—recreational vehicle in the Index for information 
on towing behind an RV. 
181
183 
Maintenance and Care 
Service Made Easy 
Ford has two goals for servicing your vehicle. 
1. When we can, we design parts that do not 
need to be serviced. 
2. We want to make servicing your vehicle as 
easy as possible. To help you: 
qWe highlight do-it-yourself items in yellow in 
the engine compartment so that you can find 
them easily. 
qWhen possible, we design parts that can be 
replaced without tools. 
qWe give you a Maintenance Schedule that 
makes tracking routine service for your 
vehicle easy. The maintenance schedule is 
located in the Maintenance Schedule booklet. 
This chapter tells you about the basic parts that 
you need to check and service regularly. 
If your vehicle needs professional servicing, your 
dealership can provide the parts and service 
required. Check your Warranty Information Booklet 
to find out which parts and services are covered. 
Also see the Customer Assistance chapter of this 
Owner Guide. 
Ford Motor Company recommends that you 
perform the Owner Maintenance Checks listed in 
the Maintenance Schedule booklet. These services 
are important for the proper operation of your 
vehicle. In addition to the conditions listed in
the Owner Maintenance Checklist, be alert for 
any unusual noise, vibration, or other indication 
that your vehicle may need service. If you do 
notice something unusual, see that your vehicle 
is serviced promptly. 
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids, 
and service parts that meet Ford Motor 
Company specifications. Motorcraft parts are 
designed and built to provide the best 
performance in your vehicle. Using these parts 
for replacement is your assurance that Ford-built 
quality stays in your vehicle. 
NOTE: Always dispose of used automotive 
184 
fluids in a responsible manner. Follow 
your community’s standards for 
disposing of these types of fluids. Call 
your local recycling center to find out 
about recycling automotive fluids. 
Precautions When Servicing Your 
Vehicle 
Be especially careful when inspecting or 
servicing your vehicle. Here are some general 
precautions for your safety: 
qDo not work on a hot engine. The engine 
cooling fan may come on unexpectedly. 
Always turn the engine off and let it cool. 
RWARNING 
The cooling fan is automatic and may 
come on at any time. Always disconnect 
the negative terminal of the battery before 
working near the fan. 
qIf you must work with the engine running, 
avoid wearing loose clothing or jewelry that 
could get caught in moving parts. Take 
appropriate precautions with long hair.
qDo not work on a vehicle in an enclosed 
space with the engine running, unless you are 
sure you have enough ventilation. 
qNever get under a vehicle while it is 
supported only by a jack. If you must work 
under a vehicle, use safety stands. 
qKeep all lit cigarettes and other smoking 
materials away from the battery and all 
fuel-related parts. 
If you disconnect the battery, the engine must 
“relearn” its idle conditions before your vehicle 
will drive properly. To find out how the engine 
does this, see Battery in this chapter. 
Working with the engine off: 
1. Set the parking brake fully and make sure 
the gearshift is securely latched in P (Park) 
(automatic transaxle) or Neutral (manual 
transaxle). 
2. Remove the key from the ignition after you 
185 
turn the engine off. 
3. Block the wheels. This will prevent your 
vehicle from moving unexpectedly. 
Working with the engine on: 
1. Set the parking brake fully and make sure 
the gearshift is securely latched in P (Park) 
(automatic transaxle) or Neutral (manual 
transaxle). 
2. Block the wheels. This will prevent your 
vehicle from moving unexpectedly. 
RWARNING 
Do not start your engine with the air 
cleaner removed and do not remove it 
while the engine is running.
Opening the Hood 
1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood release 
186 
handle located under the bottom left corner 
of the instrument panel. 
2. Go to the front of the vehicle and release the 
auxiliary latch that is located under the hood 
at the center of the vehicle. 
3. Lift the hood and set the prop rod in the 
hole in the hood marked with an arrow. 
When you close the hood, make sure the prop 
rod is in its retainer and that the hood latches 
securely. 
The hood release handle
187 
NOTE: Apply lubricant to the hood latch at 
six-month intervals to maintain smooth 
and trouble-free operation. 
NOTE: Read and understand Precautions When 
Servicing Your Vehicle at the beginning 
of this chapter before opening the 
hood. 
Engine Types 
Your vehicle has one of these types of engines: 
qa 2.0L (121 CID) fuel injected 16-valve 
four-cylinder engine. 
qa 2.5L (152 CID) fuel injected 24-valve 
six-cylinder engine.
The 2.0L engine 
188
189 
The 2.5L engine
Engine Oil Recommendations 
We recommend using Motorcraft oil or an 
equivalent oil meeting Ford Specification 
WSS-M2C153-F and displaying the American 
Petroleum Institute CERTIFICATION MARK on 
the front of the container. 
The API Certification Mark 
Never use: 
q“Non-Detergent” oils 
qOils labeled API SA, SB, SC, SD, SE, SF or SG 
qAdditional engine oil additives, oil treatments 
190 
or engine treatments 
Engine oils with an SAE 5W-30 viscosity are 
PREFERRED for your vehicle. They provide the 
best engine performance, fuel economy and 
engine protection for all climates down to -15°F 
(-25°C). 
Synthetic engine oils which are CERTIFIED and 
of the preferred viscosity may be used in your 
engine. The engine oil and oil filter must still be 
changed according to the maintenance schedule.
Checking and Adding Engine Oil 
Since the proper amount of engine oil is 
important for safe engine operation, check the oil 
using the dipstick each time you put fuel in 
your vehicle. Remember the engine must be off, 
the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be 
parked on level ground. 
Checking the engine oil level: 
1. Turn the engine off after it has warmed up 
and allow a few minutes for the engine oil 
to drain back into the oil pan. 
191 
2. Set the parking brake fully and make sure 
that the gearshift is securely latched in P 
(Park) (automatic transaxle) or 1 (First) 
(manual transaxle). 
3. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engine 
heat. 
4. Locate the engine oil dipstick (highlighted in 
yellow) and carefully pull it out of the 
engine. 
5. Wipe the dipstick clean and put it back into 
position, making sure it is fully seated. 
Engine oil dipstick
6. Carefully, pull the dipstick out again. If the 
192 
oil level is below the L line, add engine oil 
as necessary. If the oil level is beyond the 
letter F, engine damage or high oil 
consumption may occur and some oil must 
be removed from the engine. 
7. Put the dipstick back in and make sure it is 
fully seated. 
Adding engine oil 
It may be necessary to add some oil between oil 
changes. Make sure you use a CERTIFIED 
engine oil of the preferred viscosity. Your 
vehicle’s warranty coverage may not apply if 
engine damage is caused by the use of improper 
engine oil. 
Add engine oil through the oil filler cap 
highlighted in yellow. To add oil, remove the 
filler cap and use a funnel to pour oil into the 
opening. Be careful not to overfill the engine. 
Recheck the oil level after you finish adding oil. 
Changing the Engine Oil and the Oil Filter 
Change the engine oil and oil filter per the 
following, whichever occurs first.
193 
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule booklet for 
additional information. 
NOTE: Always dispose of used automotive 
fluids in a responsible manner. Follow 
your community’s standards for 
disposing of these types of fluids. Call 
your local recycling center to find out 
about recycling automotive fluids. 
NOTE: Ford production and aftermarket 
(Motorcraft) oil filters are designed for 
added engine protection and long life. 
If a replacement oil filter is used that 
does not meet Ford material and design 
specifications, startup engine noises or 
knock may be experienced. It is 
recommended you use the appropriate 
Motorcraft oil filter (or another brand 
meeting Ford specifications) for your 
engine application. 
RWARNING 
Continuous contact with USED motor oil 
has caused cancer in laboratory mice. 
Protect your skin by washing with soap and 
water. 
Brake Fluid 
Under normal circumstances, your vehicle 
should not use up brake fluid rapidly. However, 
expect the level of the brake fluid to slowly fall 
as you put more mileage on your vehicle and 
the brake pads wear. 
Check the brake fluid at least once a year. You 
can do this by looking at the fluid level in the 
plastic reservoir on the master cylinder. (See The 
Engine Types earlier in this chapter to locate the 
master cylinder.) The fluid level should be at or 
near the MAX mark.
194 
RWARNING 
Brake fluid is toxic. 
If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with 
running water for 15 minutes. Get medical 
attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, 
drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical 
attention immediately. 
Brake fluid level 
If the fluid is low, carefully clean and remove 
the cap from the reservoir. Fill the reservoir to 
the MAX line with Ford High Performance DOT 
3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AA or DOT 3 
equivalent fluid meeting Ford specification 
ESA-M6C25-A. 
RWARNING 
If you use a brake fluid that is not DOT 
3, you will cause permanent damage to 
your brakes. 
Do not fill the reservoir above the MAX line. 
If you find that the fluid level is excessively low 
— below the seam or ridge on the outside of the 
plastic reservoir — have the brake system 
inspected.
195 
RWARNING 
Do not let the reservoir for the master 
cylinder run dry. This may cause the 
brakes to fail. 
Windshield Washer Fluid 
Washer Fluid 
Check the level of the windshield washer fluid 
every time you stop for fuel. The reservoir for 
the windshield washer fluid is located in the 
engine compartment. Visual inspection can 
determine if the washer fluid is adequate. Do 
not operate the washer when the reservoir is 
empty. 
Windshield washer fluid reservoir
196 
RWARNING 
Do not put windshield washer fluid in the 
container for the engine coolant. 
Use specially formulated windshield washer 
fluid rather than plain water, because specially 
formulated washer fluids contain additives that 
dissolve road grime. For safety reasons, washer 
fluids containing an appropriate antifreeze such 
as methanol should be used in freezing weather 
(temperatures below 32°F [0°C]). State or local 
regulations on Volatile Organic Compounds 
(VOCs) may restrict use of the most common 
antifreeze, methanol. Washer fluids containing 
non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used 
only if they provide cold weather protection 
without damaging the vehicle’s paint finish, 
wiper blades, and windshield washer system. 
Engine Coolant 
Adding Engine Coolant 
RWARNING 
Be careful not to add engine coolant to 
the windshield washer fluid reservoir. If 
sprayed on the windshield, engine coolant 
could make it difficult to see through the 
windshield. 
When the engine is cool, add a 50/50 mixture of 
engine coolant and water to the engine coolant 
recovery reservoir — DO NOT ADD DIRECTLY 
TO THE RADIATOR. Add straight water only in 
an emergency, but you should replace it with a 
50/50 mixture of coolant and distilled water as 
soon as possible.
Check the coolant level in the coolant recovery 
reservoir the next few times you drive the 
vehicle. If necessary, add enough of a 50/50 
mixture of coolant and water to bring the liquid 
level to the fill line on the reservoir. 
197 
RWARNING 
Never remove the coolant recovery cap 
while the engine is running or hot. 
If you must remove the coolant recovery cap, 
follow these steps to avoid personal injury 
caused by escaping steam or engine coolant: 
1. Before you remove the cap, turn the engine 
off and let it cool. 
2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick cloth 
around the cap and turn it slowly, 
counterclockwise to the first stop. 
3. Step back while the pressure releases.
4. When you are sure that all the pressure has 
198 
been released, use the cloth to press the cap 
down, turn it counterclockwise, and remove 
it. 
Use Ford Premium Engine Coolant 
E2FZ-19549-AA (in Canada, Motorcraft CXC-8-B) 
or an equivalent premium engine coolant that 
meets Ford specification ESE-M97B44-A. Ford 
Premium Engine Coolant is an optimized 
formula that will protect all metals and rubber 
elastomers used in Ford cooling systems for 4 
years or 50,000 miles (80,000 km). 
Do not use alcohol or methanol antifreeze or any 
engine coolants mixed with alcohol or methanol 
antifreeze. Do not use supplemental coolant 
additives in your vehicle. These additives may 
harm your engine cooling system. The use of an 
improper coolant may void the warranty of 
your vehicle’s engine cooling system. 
Recycled engine coolant 
Ford Motor Company recommends that Ford 
and Lincoln-Mercury dealers use recycled engine 
coolant produced by Ford-approved processes. 
Not all coolant recycling processes produce 
coolant which meets Ford specification 
ESE-M97B44-A, and use of such coolant may 
harm engine and cooling system components. 
Always dispose of used automotive fluids in a 
responsible manner. Follow your community’s 
regulations and standards for recycling and 
disposing of automotive fluids. 
Coolant refill capacity 
To find out how much fluid your vehicle’s 
cooling system can hold, see Refill capacities in 
the Capacities and Specifications chapter.
Have your dealer check the engine cooling 
system for leaks if you have to add more than a 
quart (liter) of engine coolant each month. 
Severe winter climate 
If you drive in extremely cold climates (less than 
S34°F [S36°C]), it may be necessary to increase 
the coolant concentration above 50%. Refer to 
the chart on the coolant container to ensure the 
coolant concentration in your vehicle is such that 
the coolant will not freeze at the temperature 
level in which you drive during winter months. 
Never increase the engine coolant concentration 
above 60%. Leave a 50/50 mixture of engine 
coolant and water in your vehicle year-round in 
non-extreme climates. 
Checking Hoses 
Check all engine and heater system hoses and 
hose connections for deterioration, leaks, and 
loose hose clamps as specified in the maintenance 
schedule. Repair or replace with Motorcraft hoses 
or equivalent as necessary. 
Power Steering Fluid 
Check the level of the power steering fluid at 
least twice a year (i.e., every Spring and Fall). 
Checking and Adding Power Steering 
Fluid 
1. Start the engine and let it run until the 
power steering fluid reaches normal 
operating temperature. The power steering 
fluid will be at the right temperature when 
the engine coolant temperature gauge in the 
instrument cluster is near the center of the 
NORMAL operating temperature range. 
199
2. While the engine idles, turn the steering 
200 
wheel back and forth several times. Make 
sure that the cap assembly is installed at this 
time. 
3. Turn the engine off and check the level on 
the power steering reservoir. 
Where to check for power steering fluid 
4. Remove the dipstick to read the power 
steering fluid level. If the power steering 
fluid is low, add fluid in small amounts, 
continuously checking the level, until you 
reach the HIGH line. Do not overfill. To find 
out how much fluid your vehicle’s power 
steering fluid reservoir will hold, see Refill 
capacities for fluids in the Index. 
5. When you are finished, put the dipstick back 
in and make sure that it fits snugly. 
If the power steering fluid is low, do not drive 
your vehicle for a long period of time before 
adding fluid. This can damage the power 
steering pump. 
If you must check the power steering fluid 
before it reaches normal operating temperature, 
make sure that the fluid reaches the “L” (LOW) 
line range in the reservoir. The reading will only 
be accurate if the fluid temperature is 
approximately 70° to 100°F (21° to 38°C).
Automatic Transaxle Fluid 
Under normal circumstances, you do not need to 
check the fluid level of the transaxle, since your 
vehicle does not use up transaxle fluid. Refer to 
the Maintenance Schedule booklet for replacement 
intervals. However, if the transaxle is not 
working properly — for instance, the transaxle 
may slip or shift slowly, or you may notice 
some sign of fluid leakage — the fluid level 
should be checked. 
If you must check the transaxle fluid in an 
emergency, make sure that your vehicle is on 
level ground, start the engine, and move the 
gearshift through all of the gears allowing 
sufficient time for each position to engage. 
Securely latch the gearshift in P (Park). Set the 
parking brake and leave the engine running. 
Wipe off the dipstick cap, pull the dipstick out 
and wipe the indicator end clean. Put the 
dipstick back into the filler tube. Make sure the 
dipstick is fully seated in the filler tube; 
otherwise, you will not get an accurate reading. 
Pull the dipstick out and read the fluid level. 
The fluid level must be above the lower mark. If 
it is not, you should not drive your vehicle until 
more fluid is added. Ideally, the fluid level 
should be within the specified area of the 
dipstick. 
NOTE: The fluid level indication on the 
dipstick will be different at operating 
temperature and room temperature. For 
the correct fluid level reading on the 
dipstick, follow the appropriate 
instructions. 
201
At normal operating temperature (approximately 
20 miles [32 km] of vehicle operation), the level 
on the dipstick should be within the specified 
area on the “Safe level when hot” temperature 
scale. At room temperature, the level should be 
within the specified area on the “Safe level when 
cold” temperature scale. If your vehicle has not 
been operated for some time and outside 
temperature is below 50°F (10°C) the fluid must 
be warmed by running the engine. 
Automatic transaxle fluid dipstick on 2.5L engine vehicles 
Automatic transaxle fluid dipstick on 2.0L engine vehicles 
202
If you must add transaxle fluid in an emergency, 
use only MERCONH fluid, such as Motorcraft 
MERCONH Multi-Purpose ATF. Add the fluid in 
1/2-pint increments until you raise the fluid 
level to within the crosshatched area on the 
dipstick. Never overfill the transaxle. If the fluid 
level gets too high, remove the excess fluid as 
soon as possible; otherwise, you could damage 
the transaxle. 
Manual Transaxle Fluid 
The lubricant level and quality should not 
deteriorate under normal use. However, you 
should periodically have your Ford Dealer check 
the fluid level during regular oil changes. 
NOTE: Always dispose of used automotive 
fluids in a responsible manner. Follow 
your community’s standards for 
disposing of these types of fluids. Call 
your local recycling center to find out 
about recycling automotive fluids. 
Constant Velocity Joints 
Inspect all rubber boots for signs of cracks, tears, 
or splits. Inspect underneath of your car for any 
indication of grease splatter in the areas of 
constant velocity joint boots, outboard and 
inboard locations; grease splatter is an indication 
of boot and/or clamp damage. 
Battery 
The Motorcraft maintenance-free battery does 
not require additional water during its life of 
service. The vents are part of the cover and 
cannot be removed. For longer, trouble-free 
operation, keep the top of the battery clean and 
dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are 
tightly fastened to the battery terminals. 
203
If you see any corrosion on the battery cables or 
terminals, remove the cables from the terminal 
and clean them both with a wire brush. You can 
neutralize the acid with a solution of baking 
soda and water. Reinstall the cables when you 
are done cleaning them, and apply a small 
quantity of grease to the top of each battery 
terminal to help prevent corrosion. 
Battery replacement 
When the original equipment maintenance-free 
battery is replaced under warranty, it may be 
replaced by a low-maintenance battery. 
The low-maintenance battery has removable vent 
caps for checking the electrolyte level and 
adding water, if necessary. 
The electrolyte level should be checked at least 
every 24 months or 24,000 miles (40,000 km) in 
temperatures up to 90°F (32°C) and more in 
temperatures above 90°F (32°C). Keep the 
electrolyte level in each cell up to the level 
indicator. Do not overfill. 
If the level gets low, you can add plain tap 
water to the battery, provided the water isn’t 
hard or doesn’t have a high mineral or alkali 
content. However, if possible, refill with distilled 
water. If the battery needs water quite often, 
have the charging system checked for a possible 
problem. 
If you ever disconnect the battery or install a 
new battery, you must allow the computer to 
“relearn” its idle condition before your vehicle 
will drive properly. To begin this process, put 
the gearshift in P (Park) (automatic transaxle) or 
N (Neutral) (manual transaxle), set the 
emergency brake, turn off all the accessories, and 
start the vehicle. Bring the engine to normal 
operating temperature. 
204
If you do not let the engine relearn its idle, the 
idle quality of your vehicle may be adversely 
affected until the idle is relearned. Your vehicle 
will eventually relearn its idle while you drive 
it, but it takes much longer than if you use the 
previous procedure. 
Help Us Protect Our Environment 
Ford Motor Company strongly recommends that 
used lead-acid batteries be returned to an 
authorized recycling facility for disposal. 
205 
Battery recycling symbol 
RWARNING 
The gases around the battery can explode 
if exposed to flames, sparks, or lit 
cigarettes. An explosion could result in 
injury or vehicle damage. 
RWARNING 
To protect yourself when charging a 
battery, always shield your face and eyes. 
Make sure that you can breathe fresh air. 
RWARNING 
Batteries contain sulfuric acid which burns 
skin, eyes, and clothing.
If the acid touches someone’s skin, eyes, or 
clothing, immediately flush the area with water 
for at least 15 minutes. If someone swallows the 
acid, have him or her drink lots of milk or water 
first, then Milk of Magnesia, a beaten egg, or 
vegetable oil. Call a doctor immediately. 
206 
RWARNING 
Applying too much pressure on the ends 
when lifting a battery could cause acid to 
spill. Lift the battery with a carrier or 
with your hands on the opposite corners. 
Wiper blade maintenance 
Check the windshield wiper blades at least twice 
a year. Also check them whenever they seem 
less effective than usual. Such substances as tree 
sap and some hot wax treatments used by 
commercial car washes reduce the effectiveness 
of wiper blades. 
If the blades do not wipe properly, clean both 
the windshield and the wiper blades. Use 
undiluted windshield washer solution or a mild 
detergent. Rinse thoroughly with clear water. Do 
not use fuel, kerosene, paint thinner, or other 
solvents to clean your wiper blades. These will 
damage your blades. 
To make reaching the wiper blades easy, simply 
turn the ignition switch to ACC and turn your 
wipers on. Wait for them to reach a vertical 
position and turn the ignition to OFF. Do not 
move the wipers manually. Moving the wipers 
manually may damage them.
Wiper blade replacement 
If the wipers still do not work properly after 
you clean them, you may need to replace the 
wiper blade assembly. When replacing the wiper 
blade assembly always use a Motorcraft part or 
equivalent. 
To replace the wiper blades: 
1. Pull the wiper arm away from the 
207 
windshield and into the lock position. 
2. Turn the blade at an angle from the wiper 
arm. Push the lock pin with a screwdriver to 
release the blade and pull the wiper blade 
down toward the windshield to remove it 
from the arm. 
3. Attach a new wiper blade to the wiper arm 
and press it into place until you hear it click.
Replacing the wiper blades 
Tires 
Look at your tires each time you fill your fuel 
tank. If one tire looks lower than the others, 
check the pressure in all of them. Always follow 
these precautions: 
qUse an accurate tire pressure gauge. 
qCheck the tire pressure when tires are cold, 
208 
after the vehicle has been parked for at least 
one hour or has been driven less than 3 miles 
(5 km).
qMake sure the weight of your load is evenly 
distributed. 
qAdjust tire pressure to recommended 
specifications found on the Safety Compliance 
Certification Label. 
If you do not take these precautions, your tires 
may fail or go flat. 
Ford Motor Company recommends obeying 
posted speed limits. 
209 
RWARNING 
Driving too fast for conditions creates the 
possibility of loss of vehicle control. 
Driving at very high speeds for extended 
periods of time may result in damage to 
vehicle components. 
At least once a month, check the pressure in all 
your vehicle’s tires, including the spare. Use an 
accurate tire pressure gauge. Check the tire 
pressure when tires are cold, that is, after the 
vehicle has been parked for at least one hour or 
has been driven less than 3 miles (5 km). 
You can find your vehicle’s proper tire inflation 
pressure on the tire decal on the right door lock 
pillar. 
RWARNING 
Improperly inflated tires can affect vehicle 
handling and can fail suddenly, possibly 
resulting in loss of vehicle control.
Tire Inspection and Maintenance 
Inspect the tire treads, and remove stones, nails, 
glass or other objects that may be wedged in the 
tread grooves. Check for holes or cuts that may 
permit air to leak from the tire, and make the 
necessary repairs. 
Inspect the tire sidewalls for cuts, bruises and 
other damage. If you suspect internal damage to 
the tire, have it removed and checked. You may 
need to repair or replace it. 
Tire Rotation 
Because your vehicle’s front and rear tires 
perform different jobs, they often wear 
differently. To make sure your tires wear evenly 
and last longer, rotate them as indicated in the 
following diagram. 
Do not include the spare tire as part of your 
rotation. 
For tire rotation intervals, see the Maintenance 
Schedule booklet. If you notice the tires wearing 
unevenly, have them checked. 
Rotating the tires 
210
Replacing the Tires 
We recommend that you use the same size and 
type when making tire replacements. The 
standard model uses P195/65 R14 tires, and the 
GT model is equipped with P225/50VR16 tires. 
If your standard model vehicle is equipped with 
a 3-spoke aluminum wheel, you will need 
P205/55H R15 tires. 
Replace any tires that show wear bands. When 
your tire shows a wear band, it has only 1/16 
inch (2 mm) of tread left. 
A worn-out tire 
Because your vehicle’s tires may wear unevenly, 
you may need to replace them before a wear 
band appears across the entire tread. 
211 
RWARNING 
When replacing full size tires, never mix 
radial, bias-belted, or bias-type tires. Use 
only the tire sizes that are listed on the 
tire pressure decal. Make sure that all tires 
are the same size, speed rating, and 
load-carrying capacity. Use only the tire 
combinations recommended on the decal. 
If you do not follow these precautions, 
your vehicle may not drive properly and 
safely.
Tires that are larger or smaller than your 
vehicle’s original tires may also affect the 
accuracy of your speedometer. 
Wheel and Tire Matching 
See an authorized tire dealer for proper 
servicing procedures. Wheels and tires must be 
properly removed, matched and remounted to 
maintain the best possible ride. 
Information About Tire Quality Grades 
New vehicles are fitted with tires that have their 
Tire Quality Grade (described below) molded 
into the tire’s sidewall. These Tire Quality 
Grades are determined by standards that the 
United States Department of Transportation has 
set. 
Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic 
tires for use on passenger cars. They do not 
apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, 
space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires 
with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches or 
limited production tires as defined in Title 49 
Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104(c)(2). 
U.S. Department of Transportation — Tire 
quality grades: The U.S. Department of 
Transportation requires Ford to give you the 
following information about tire grades exactly 
as the government has written it. 
Treadwear 
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating 
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested 
under controlled conditions on a specified 
government test course. For example, a tire 
graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) 
times as well on the government course as a tire 
graded 100. The relative performance of tires 
212
depends upon the actual conditions of their use, 
however, and may depart significantly from the 
norm due to variations in driving habits, service 
practices and differences in road characteristics 
and climate. 
Traction A B C 
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are 
A, B, and C, and they represent the tire’s ability 
to stop on wet pavement as measured under 
controlled conditions on specified government 
test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire 
marked C may have poor traction performance. 
213 
RWARNING 
The traction grade assigned to this tire is 
based on braking (straightahead) traction 
tests and does not include cornering 
(turning) traction. 
Temperature A B C 
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, 
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the 
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate 
heat when tested under controlled conditions on 
a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. 
Sustained high temperature can cause the 
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire 
life, and excessive temperature can lead to 
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to 
a level of performance which all passenger car 
tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle 
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A 
represent higher levels of performance on the 
laboratory test wheel than the minimum 
required by law.
214 
RWARNING 
The temperature grade for this tire is 
established for a tire that is properly 
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive 
speed, underinflation, or excessive 
loading, either separately or in 
combination, can cause heat buildup and 
possible tire failure. 
Snow tires 
During the winter months in some climates, you 
may need to use snow tires and occasionally 
chains for your tires. 
RWARNING 
Snow tires must be the same size and 
grade as the tires you currently have on 
your vehicle. 
Use chains on the tires only in an emergency or 
if the law requires them where you live. If you 
choose to use chains on your vehicle’s tires, be 
aware of the following: 
qTire chains may scratch or chip aluminum 
wheels. IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT TIRE 
CHAINS ARE INSTALLED ON STEEL 
WHEELS ONLY. Be sure to remove wheel 
covers (if equipped) from steel rims before 
using tire chains to avoid scratches or 
damage. 
qDo not use tire chains if you have the GT 
model. 
qLocal regulations may prohibit or restrict the 
use of tire chains. Investigate the laws and 
regulations in your area before installing 
chains.
qPut the chains on the front tires tightly with 
the ends held down securely. Retighten the 
chains after driving 1/2 mile (1 km). Follow 
the chain manufacturer’s instructions. 
qDo not drive faster than 30 mph (50 km/h) 
or the chain manufacturer’s recommended 
speed limit, whichever is lower. Avoid 
bumps, holes and sharp turns. If you can 
hear the chains rub or bang against your 
vehicle, remove the chains to prevent damage 
to your vehicle. 
qTire chains may affect vehicle handling. Drive 
carefully and avoid hard braking. 
qDo not use chains on temporary spare tires. 
They may damage the vehicle and the tire. 
qRemove tire chains at the first opportunity 
after using them on snow and ice. Do not use 
the chains on dry roads. 
Filling the Fuel Tank 
Fuel filler door release lever 
Your vehicle is equipped with a fuel filler door 
release. To open the fuel filler door, pull up on 
the release lever which is located in front of the 
driver’s seat and near the door. 
Remote Fuel Filler-Lid Release Override 
If the release does not operate, open the 
hatchback, remove the trim on the left rear side, 
reach into the opening and pull the latch toward 
the rear (see the service manual for trim 
removal). You should wear gloves to protect 
your hands from any sharp edges when you use 
the fuel filler-lid release override. 
215
Manual fuel filler-lid override (behind left rear trim panel 
in hatch) 
To fill the fuel tank: 
1. After opening the fuel filler door, remove 
216 
the cap carefully and slowly by turning it 
counterclockwise 1/2 to 3/4 turn. 
RWARNING 
The fuel system may be under pressure. If 
the fuel cap is venting vapor or if you 
hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops 
before completely removing the cap. 
2. Put the nozzle all the way inside the fuel 
filler pipe before pumping the fuel.
217 
NOTE: If you spill any fuel on the body of 
your vehicle, clean it off immediately. 
The fuel may dull or soften the paint 
if you do not wash it off. 
3. Replace the fuel cap completely when you 
are finished. Turn it clockwise 1/4 turn until 
it is tight. It will click when it is fully 
tightened. 
4. Push the fuel door closed. 
If you lose the fuel cap, replace it with an 
authorized Motorcraft or equivalent part. 
RWARNING 
If you do not use the proper fuel cap, the 
pressure in the fuel tank can damage the 
fuel system or cause it to work improperly 
in a collision. 
NOTE: If you replace your fuel cap with an 
aftermarket fuel filler cap, the customer 
warranty may be void for any damage 
to the fuel tank and/or fuel system. 
Choosing the Right Fuel 
Use only UNLEADED FUEL. The use of leaded 
fuel is prohibited by law and could damage 
your vehicle. The damage may not be covered 
by your warranty. 
Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel 
containing manganese-based additives such as 
MMT. Additionally, vehicles certified to 
California emission standards (indicated on the 
underhood Vehicle Emissions Control 
Information label) are designed to operate on 
California reformulated gasolines. If California 
reformulated gasoline is not available when you
refuel, your vehicle can be operated on 
non-California fuels. However, even though your 
engine will perform adequately on other 
gasolines, the performance of the emission 
control devices and systems may be adversely 
affected. Repair of damage caused by using a 
fuel that your vehicle was not designed for may 
not be covered by your warranty. 
Octane Recommendations 
Your 2.0L engine is designed to use regular 
gasoline with an (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87. 
We do not recommend gasolines labeled as 
“regular” in high altitude areas that are sold 
with octane ratings of 86 or even less. 
Your 2.5L engine is designed to use premium 
gasoline for optimum performance with an 
(R+M)/2 octane rating of 91 or higher. Gasolines 
with lower octane ratings can be used, but 
performance may decrease. We do not 
recommend gasolines labeled as “premium” in 
high altitude areas that are sold with octane 
ratings less than 91. 
Do not be concerned if your vehicle sometimes 
knocks lightly. However, if it knocks heavily 
under most driving conditions on the 
recommended octane fuel, see your dealer or a 
qualified service technician to prevent any 
engine damage. 
Fuel Quality 
If you are experiencing starting, rough idle or 
hesitation problems try a different brand of fuel. 
If the condition persists, see your dealer or a 
qualified service technician. 
The American Automobile Manufacturers 
Association (AAMA) issued a gasoline 
specification to provide information on high 
218
quality fuels that optimize the performance of 
your vehicle. We recommend the use of 
gasolines that meet the AAMA specification if 
they are available. 
It should not be necessary to add any 
aftermarket products to your fuel tank if you 
continue to use a high-quality fuel. 
Cleaner Air 
Ford approves the use of gasolines to improve 
air quality, including reformulated gasolines that 
contain oxygenates such as a maximum of 10% 
ethanol or 15% MTBE. There should be no more 
than 5% methanol with cosolvents and additives 
to protect the fuel system. 
Safety Information Relating to Automotive 
Fuels 
219 
RWARNING 
Automotive fuels can cause serious injury 
or death if misused or mishandled. 
qTurn vehicle off when refueling. 
qDo not smoke when refueling. Fuels are 
extremely flammable. 
qDo not siphon any fuel by mouth. 
RWARNING 
Gasoline or gasoline blended with 
methanol can cause blindness and 
possible death when swallowed. If any 
fuel is swallowed, call a physician or 
poison control center immediately.
qAvoid breathing vapors while refueling. 
qIf fuel is splashed on the skin, wash with 
soap and water. 
qIf fuel is splashed in the eyes, remove contact 
lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15 
minutes, and seek medical attention. 
Gasoline and gasoline blends may contain small 
amounts of carcinogens, such as benzene. 
Long-term exposure to unleaded gasoline vapors 
has caused cancer in laboratory animals. 
If you are taking the medication “Antabuse” or 
other forms of disulfiram for the treatment of 
alcoholism, vapor or skin contact with a 
gasoline-methanol blend may cause the same 
kind of adverse reaction as drinking an alcoholic 
beverage. In sensitive individuals, serious 
personal injury or sickness could result. Consult 
a physician promptly if you experience an 
adverse reaction. 
Running Out of Fuel 
NOTE: Avoid running out of fuel because this 
220 
situation may have an adverse effect on 
modern powertrain components. 
You may need to crank the engine several times 
before the fuel system starts to pump fuel from 
the tank to the engine. 
Fuel Economy 
Fuel economy is an estimate of the efficiency of 
your vehicle and can be calculated as Miles Per 
Gallon (MPG) or Liters Per 100 Kilometers 
(L/100K). 
Do not calculate fuel economy during your 
vehicle’s break-in period. This would not be an 
accurate estimate of how much fuel your vehicle 
will normally use.
221 
To calculate fuel economy: 
1. Fill the tank completely and record the 
initial odometer reading. 
2. Every time you buy fuel record the 
amount (in gallons or liters) purchased. 
3. After at least three to five tankfuls, fill the 
fuel tank and record the final odometer 
reading. 
4. Use these equations to calculate your fuel 
economy: 
qEnglish: MPG = (total miles driven) v 
(gallons used) 
qMetric: L/100k = (liters used) v 
(100 kilometers) 
Comparisons With EPA Estimates 
EPA fuel economy figures are obtained from 
laboratory tests under simulated road conditions 
and may not reflect the actual conditions you 
experience or your style of driving. The EPA 
fuel economy estimate is not a guarantee that 
you will achieve the fuel economy shown. 
The following decrease fuel economy: 
qLack of regular, scheduled maintenance 
qRapid acceleration and excessive speed 
qDriving with your foot on the brake 
qSudden stops 
qExtended engine idling 
qUsing speed control in hilly terrain
qExtended use of the A/C, defroster, rear 
window defroster and other accessories 
qUnderinflated tires 
qHeavy loads 
qAftermarket add-ons such as bike, ski or 
luggage racks, bug deflectors, etc. 
Air Conditioning Refrigerant 
Whenever service to the air conditioning system 
is required, make sure the service facility uses a 
refrigerant recycling system. These systems will 
capture the refrigerant for reuse. Releasing 
certain refrigerants into the atmosphere can 
damage our environment. 
Emission Control System 
Your vehicle is equipped with a catalytic 
converter which enables your vehicle to comply 
with applicable exhaust emission requirements. 
222 
RWARNING 
Exhaust leaks may result in the entry of 
harmful and potentially lethal fumes into 
the passenger compartment. Under 
extreme conditions excessive exhaust 
temperatures could damage the fuel 
system, the interior floor covering, or 
other vehicle components, possibly 
causing a fire.
To make sure that the catalytic converter and the 
other emission control parts continue to work 
properly: 
qUse only unleaded fuel. 
qAvoid running out of fuel. 
qDo not turn off the ignition while your 
vehicle is moving, especially at high speeds. 
qDo not push start your vehicle. 
qHave the services listed in your Maintenance 
Schedule booklet performed according to the 
specified schedule. 
223 
RWARNING 
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in 
dry grass or other dry ground cover. The 
emission system heats up the engine 
compartment and exhaust system, which 
can start a fire. 
Watch for fluid leaks, strange odors, smoke, loss 
of oil pressure, the charge warning light, the 
check engine light, or the temperature warning 
light. These sometimes indicate that the emission 
system is not working properly. 
Do not make any unauthorized changes to your 
vehicle or engine. Changes that cause more 
unburned fuel to reach the exhaust system can 
increase the temperature of the engine or 
exhaust system. 
In general, maintenance, replacement, or service 
of the emission control devices or systems in 
your new Ford Motor Company vehicle or 
engine may be performed at your expense by 
any automotive repair establishment or 
individual using automotive parts equivalent to 
those with which your vehicle or engine was 
originally equipped.
By law, anyone who manufactures, repairs, 
services, sells, leases, trades vehicles, or 
supervises a fleet of vehicles is not permitted to 
intentionally remove an emission control device 
or prevent it from working. In some of the 
United States and in Canada, vehicle owners 
may be liable if their emission control device is 
removed or is prevented from working. 
Never use a metal exhaust collector when you 
service your vehicle. If the metal collector 
contacts any of your vehicle’s plastic trim or 
bumper parts they could melt or deform. 
Do not drive your vehicle if it does not operate 
properly. See your dealer if the engine runs on 
for more than five seconds after you shut it off 
or if it misfires, surges, stalls, or backfires. 
Information about your vehicle’s emission 
control system is on the Vehicle Emission 
Control Information decal located on or near the 
engine. This decal identifies engine displacement 
and gives some tune-up specifications. 
How to Prepare Your Vehicle for 
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) Testing 
In some localities it may become a legal 
requirement to pass an 
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of the 
On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) II system. If the 
vehicle’s powertrain system or its battery has 
just been serviced, the OBD II system is reset to 
a not ready for I/M testing condition. To 
prepare for I/M testing, the law specifies that 
additional mixed city and highway driving is 
required to complete the check of the OBD II 
system. 
224
The driving modes required to reach the ready 
condition consist of a minimum of 30 minutes of 
city and highway driving as described below. 
q20 minutes of driving in stop and go 
city-type traffic with at least four idle periods. 
q10 minutes of driving on an expressway or 
highway 
Before completing the above driving modes, the 
engine must be warmed up and at operating 
temperature. Once started, the vehicle must not 
be turned off during the above driving modes. If 
the vehicle owner is unable to meet the I/M 
requirements by using these driving patterns, an 
authorized service center can perform a detailed 
OBD II drive cycle as it would any other type of 
repair work. 
Lights and Bulb Replacement 
It is a good idea to check the operation of the 
following lights frequently: 
qheadlamps 
qtail lamps 
qbrakelamps 
qhazard flasher 
qturn signals 
qside markers 
qlicense plate lamps 
qfog lamps (GT model) 
225
The alignment of your headlamps should be 
checked if: 
qoncoming motorists frequently signal you to 
turn off your vehicle’s high beams when you 
do not have the high beams on 
qthe headlamps do not seem to give you 
enough light to see clearly at night 
qthe headlamp beams are pointed substantially 
away from a position slightly down and to 
the right 
Headlamp Bulb 
Your vehicle has retractable halogen headlamps. 
If you need to replace a headlamp, have it done 
by a Ford service technician. 
High-Mount Brakelamp Bulb 
To replace the bulb: 
1. Remove the two side trim liftgate panels. 
2. Remove the liftgate trim clip and the liftgate 
226 
trim. 
3. Remove the bulb from the socket by pushing 
it in and turning it counterclockwise. 
4. Install the bulb by pushing straight into the 
lamp socket and turning it clockwise until it 
locks in place. 
5. Replace the liftgate trim and trim clip. 
6. Replace the two side trim liftgate panels.
227 
High-mount brakelamp 
Rear Lamp Bulbs 
To replace a bulb: 
1. Remove the attaching screw and the rear 
lens cover. 
Removing the attaching screw and lens
2. Partially remove the rear lens by pulling the 
228 
lock tabs out of the slots. 
Pulling out the lock tabs 
3. Turn the socket counterclockwise to remove 
it from the lens. 
4. Remove the bulb from the socket by pushing 
it in and turning it counterclockwise.
The rear lamps 
5. Install the bulb by pushing it into the socket 
229 
and turning it clockwise. 
6. Install the socket by pushing it into its 
housing and turning it clockwise. The arrow 
on the socket must align with the arrow on 
the housing when installed. 
7. Replace the rear lens and rear lens cover.
Bulb Specifications 
Cleaning Your Vehicle 
Washing and Polishing Your Vehicle 
Wash the outside of your vehicle, including the 
underside, with a mild detergent. 
DO NOT: 
qWash your vehicle with hot water 
qWash your vehicle while it sits in direct 
sunlight 
qWash your vehicle while the body is hot 
Pollen, bird droppings and tree sap can damage 
the paint, especially in hot weather. Wash your 
vehicle as often as necessary to keep it clean. 
Take similar precautions if your vehicle is 
exposed to chemical industrial fallout. 
230
Paint damage resulting from fallout is not 
related to a defect in paint materials or 
workmanship and therefore is not covered by 
warranty. Ford, however, believes that continual 
improvement in customer satisfaction is a high 
priority. For this reason, Ford has authorized its 
dealers to repair, at no charge to the owner, the 
surfaces of new vehicles damaged by 
environmental fallout within 12 months or 12,000 
miles (20,000 km) of purchase, whichever comes 
first. Customers may be required to bring their 
vehicle in for inspection by a Ford 
representative. 
Polish your vehicle to remove harmful deposits 
and protect the finish. 
Cleaning Chrome and Aluminum Parts 
Wash chrome and aluminum parts with a mild 
detergent. Do not use steel wool, abrasive 
cleaners, fuel or strong detergents. 
Cleaning Plastic Parts 
Some of your vehicle’s exterior trim parts are 
plastic. Clean with a tar and road oil remover if 
necessary. Use a vinyl cleaner for routine 
cleaning. 
Do not clean plastic parts with thinners, solvents 
or petroleum-based cleaners. 
If you have your vehicle rustproofed, remove 
oversprayed rustproofing with a tar and road oil 
remover. If rustproofing is not removed from 
plastic and rubber parts, it can cause 
deterioration. 
Because your vehicle’s side mouldings are 
painted in lacquer, do not use thinners or 
solvents to clean them. 
231
Cleaning the Exterior Lamps 
Do not use dry paper towel, chemical solvents 
or abrasive cleaners to clean the lamps, as these 
may cause scratches or crack the lamps. 
Cleaning the Engine 
A clean engine is more efficient because the 
engine is able to cool properly. A build up of 
grease and dirt acts as an insulator, keeping the 
engine warmer than normal. 
qExtreme care must be used if a power washer 
is used to clean the engine. The high pressure 
fluid could penetrate sealed parts and 
assemblies causing damage or malfunctions. 
qIn order to avoid possible cracking of the 
engine block or fuel injection pump, do not 
spray a hot engine or injection pump with 
cold water. 
qThe alternator, distributor and air intake must 
be covered. Covering these components will 
help prevent water damage. 
Never wash or rinse the engine while it is 
running. Water getting into the engine may 
cause internal damage. 
Cleaning the Wheels 
Wash the wheels with the same detergent you 
use to wash your vehicle’s body. Do not use 
acid-based wheel cleaners, steel wool, abrasives, 
fuel, or strong detergents. These substances will 
damage protective coatings. Use tar and road oil 
remover to remove grease and tar. 
NOTE: Before going to a car wash, find out if 
232 
the brushes are abrasive.
If you have whitewall tires that are difficult to 
clean with regular detergent, use whitewall tire 
cleaner. Follow the directions on the container 
and rinse the tires with plenty of clean water. 
Cleaning the Interior Lamps 
Your interior dome lamps and map lamps are 
plastic and should be cleaned with a mild 
detergent diluted in water. Rinse them with clear 
water. 
Cleaning the Instrument Panel Lenses 
To clean the lenses on your instrument panel, 
use Ford Glass Cleaner and a soft cloth. Never 
use paper towels or abrasive cleaners; they can 
scratch the lenses. 
Cleaning the Seats 
Leather 
For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with a 
soft, damp cloth. For more thorough cleaning, 
wipe the surface with a leather and vinyl cleaner 
or a mild soap. 
Fabric 
Remove dust and loose dirt with a whisk broom 
or a vacuum cleaner. Remove fresh spots 
immediately. Follow the directions that come 
with the cleaner. 
NOTE: Before using any cleaner, test it on a 
small, hidden area of fabric. If the 
fabric’s color or texture is adversely 
affected by a particular cleaner, do not 
use it. 
233
Cleaning the Safety Belts 
Clean the safety belts with any mild soap 
solution that is recommended for cleaning 
upholstery or carpets. Do not bleach or dye the 
belt webbing because this may weaken it. 
Vehicle Storage 
Maintenance Tips 
If you plan on storing your vehicle for an 
extended period of time (60 days or more), refer 
to the following maintenance recommendations 
to ensure your vehicle stays in good operating 
condition. 
General 
qStore all vehicles in a dry, ventilated place. 
qProtect from sunlight, if possible. 
qIf vehicles are stored outside, they require 
234 
regular maintenance to protect against rust 
and damage. 
Body 
qWash vehicle thoroughly to remove dirt, 
grease, oil, tar or mud from exterior surfaces, 
rear wheel housing and underside of front 
fenders. 
qPeriodically wash vehicles stored in exposed 
locations. 
qTouch-up raw or primed metal to prevent 
rust. 
qCover chrome and stainless steel parts with a 
thick coat of auto wax to prevent 
discoloration. Re-wax as necessary when the 
vehicle is washed.
qLubricate all hood, door and trunk lid hinges 
and latches with a light grade oil. 
qCover interior soft trim to prevent fading. 
qKeep all rubber parts free from oil and 
solvents. 
Engine 
qStart engine every 15 days. Run at fast idle 
until it reaches normal operating temperature. 
qWith your foot on the brake, shift through all 
the gears while the engine is running. 
Fuel system 
qFill fuel tank with high-quality unleaded fuel 
235 
until the first automatic shutoff of the fuel 
pump nozzle. 
NOTE: During extended periods of vehicle 
storage (60 days or more), fuel may 
deteriorate due to oxidation. This can 
damage rubber and other polymers in 
the fuel system and may also clog 
small orifices. 
Ford Gas Stabilizer should be added whenever 
actual or expected storage periods exceed 60 
days. Follow the instructions on the label. The 
vehicle should then be operated at idle speed to 
circulate the additive throughout the fuel system. 
A volatile corrosion inhibitor added to the fuel 
system will protect the fuel system’s inner 
surfaces from corrosion. Follow the instructions 
packaged with the product.
Cooling system 
qProtect against freezing temperatures. 
Battery 
qCheck and recharge as necessary. 
qKeep connections clean and covered with a 
236 
light coat of grease. 
Brakes 
qMake sure brakes and parking brake are fully 
released. 
Tires 
qMaintain recommended air pressure. 
Miscellaneous 
qMake sure all linkages, cables, levers and 
clevis pins under vehicle are covered with 
grease to prevent rust. 
qMove vehicles at least 25 feet (10 m) every 15 
days to lubricate working parts to prevent 
corrosion.
237 
Capacities and 
Specifications 
Refill Capacities, Motorcraft Parts, 
and Lubricant Specifications 
Motorcraft Parts
Refill Capacities (Approximate) 
238
Lubrication Specifications 
The transaxle and steering systems in your 
vehicle are filled at the factory with high-quality, 
long-lasting lubricants or fluids that do not 
require periodic draining or refilling except 
under severe-duty conditions. However, when 
refilling or adding is required, it should be with 
the proper lubricant or fluid meeting Ford 
technical specifications. See the Maintenance 
Schedule booklet for instructions on maintaining 
proper fluid levels. 
239
Lubricant Specification Charts 
240
241
242
243 
Reporting Safety Defects 
(U.S. Only) 
Reporting Safety Defects 
(U.S. Only) 
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect 
which could cause a crash or could cause injury 
or death, you should immediately inform the 
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration 
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford Motor 
Company. 
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may 
open an investigation, and if it finds that a 
safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may 
order a recall and remedy campaign. However, 
NHTSA cannot become involved in individual 
problems between you, your dealer, or Ford 
Motor Company. 
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto 
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 
366-0123 in the Washington, D.C. area) or write 
to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation, 
400 Seventh Street, Washington D.C. 20590. You 
can also obtain other information about motor 
vehicle safety from the Hotline.
245 
Customer Assistance 
Roadside Assistance 
Ford Motor Company has set up a 24-hour, 
seven-day-a-week hotline with trained operators 
who put you in touch with the help you need if 
you experience a problem with your vehicle. 
This complimentary service is provided to you 
throughout your warranty period of 3 years or 
36,000 miles (60,000 km), whichever comes first. 
To purchase Roadside Assistance coverages 
beyond this period (available through Ford Auto 
Club in the United States or Ford and 
Lincoln-Mercury dealers in Canada), contact 
your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer. Additional 
Roadside Assistance coverage is unavailable in 
Puerto Rico and the Virgin Islands. 
Roadside Assistance will cover the following: 
qMount your spare if you have a flat tire. 
qJump-start your battery if it is dead. 
qUnlock your vehicle if you are locked out. 
qBring you fuel if you run out. 
qTow your vehicle if you are stranded. Even 
non-warranty related tows, like accidents or 
getting stuck in mud or snow, are covered 
(some exclusions apply, such as impound 
towing and repossession).
How to use Roadside Assistance 
Your Roadside Assistance identification card can 
be found in the Owner Guide portfolio in your 
glove compartment. Complete the card and place 
it in your wallet for quick reference. 
To receive roadside assistance in the United 
States call 1-800-241-FORD (in Canada call 
1-800-665-2006). 
Should you need to arrange for roadside 
assistance yourself, Ford Motor Company will 
reimburse the reasonable cost. To obtain 
information about reimbursement call 
1-800-241-FORD (in Canada call 1-800-665-2006). 
If You Have a Service Problem 
Ford Motor Company has authorized Ford and 
Lincoln-Mercury dealerships that can service 
your vehicle for you. This chapter tells you how 
to get service or maintenance for your vehicle. 
Service/Maintenance Concerns 
(U.S. or Canada) 
Ford recommends taking your vehicle to your 
selling dealer who wants to ensure your 
continued satisfaction. You may, however, take 
your vehicle to any authorized Ford or 
Lincoln-Mercury dealer. In most cases, your 
dealer will be able to resolve your concern. 
If you are not satisfied with the service you 
received from your dealership’s service 
department, talk to the service manager at the 
dealership, or if you still are not satisfied, talk to 
the owner or general manager of the dealership. 
In most cases, you will have your concern 
resolved at this level. 
246
If you are away from home when your vehicle 
needs to be serviced, or if you need more help 
than the dealer gave you, contact the Ford 
Customer Assistance Center to find an 
authorized dealership that may be able to help. 
To process your request, the Ford Customer 
Assistance Center needs the following 
information: 
qyour telephone number (both business and 
home) 
qthe name of the dealer and the city where the 
dealership is located 
qthe year and make of your vehicle 
qthe date purchased 
qthe current mileage on your vehicle 
qyour Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) 
If you still have a complaint involving a 
warranty dispute, you may wish to contact the 
Dispute Settlement Board. 
A warranty dispute must be submitted to the 
Dispute Settlement Board before taking action 
under the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, or to 
the extent allowed by state law, before pursuing 
replacement or repurchase remedies provided by 
certain state laws. This dispute handling 
247
procedure is not required prior to enforcing state 
created rights or other rights which are 
independent of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty 
Act or state replacement or repurchase laws. 
The Dispute Settlement Board 
The Dispute Settlement Board is: 
qan independent, third-party arbitration 
program for warranty disputes 
qavailable free to owners and lessees of 
qualifying Ford Motor Company vehicles 
The Dispute Settlement Board may not be 
available in all states. Ford Motor Company 
reserves the right to change eligibility 
limitations, modify procedures and/or 
discontinue this service without notice and 
without incurring obligations. 
What Kinds of Cases Does the Board 
Review? 
The Board reviews all warranty performance 
complaints on Ford, Mercury and Lincoln cars 
and Ford and Mercury light trucks under the 
new vehicle limited warranty that have not been 
resolved by either a dealer or Ford Motor 
Company, except those involving: 
qa non-Ford product 
qa non-Ford dealership 
qa vehicle sales transaction 
qrequest for reimbursement of consequential 
expenses. Expenses incidental to the warranty 
complaint being reviewed are eligible for 
consideration 
qitems not covered by the new vehicle limited 
warranty 
248
qitems covered by a service contract 
qalleged liability claims 
qproperty damage where the damage is 
significant when compared to the economic 
loss alleged under the warranty dispute 
qcases currently in litigation 
qvehicles not used primarily for family, 
personal or household purposes (except in 
states where the Dispute Settlement Board is 
required to review commercial vehicles) 
Complaints involving vehicles in which 
applicable new vehicle limited warranties have 
expired at receipt of your application are not 
eligible. Eligibility may differ according to state 
law. For example, see the unique brochures for 
California and Wisconsin purchasers/lessees. 
How Does the Board Work? 
The Board consists of: 
qthree consumer representatives 
qa Ford or Lincoln/Mercury dealer 
Consumer candidates for Board membership are 
recruited and trained by an independent 
consulting firm. Dealers are chosen because of 
their business leadership qualities. 
249
What the Board needs 
To have your case reviewed you must complete 
the application in the DSB brochure and mail it 
to the address provided on the application form. 
Your application is reviewed and, if it is 
determined to be eligible, you will receive an 
acknowledgment indicating: 
qthe file number assigned to your application 
qthe toll-free phone number of the DSB’s 
250 
independent administrator 
Your dealership and a Ford Motor Company 
representative are asked to submit statements at 
this time. 
To review your case properly, the Board needs 
the following information: 
qlegible copies of all documents and 
maintenance or repair orders relevant to the 
case 
qthe year, make, model and Vehicle 
Identification Number (VIN) listed on your 
vehicle ownership license 
qthe date of repair(s) and mileage at the time 
of occurrence(s) 
qthe current mileage 
qthe name of the dealer who sold or serviced 
the vehicle 
qa brief description of your unresolved concern 
qa brief summary of the action taken with the 
dealer and Ford Motor Company
qthe names (if known) of all the people you 
contacted at the dealership 
qa description of the action you expect to 
resolve your concern 
Should your case NOT qualify for review, a 
letter of explanation will be mailed to you. 
Oral presentations 
If the involved vehicle is within 36 months and 
36,000 miles of the warranty start date, you have 
the right to make an oral presentation before the 
Board. Indicate your choice to do so on the 
application. Oral presentations may also be 
requested by the Board. 
Making a decision 
Board members will review all available 
information related to the complaint, including 
oral presentations, if necessary. They then arrive 
at a fair and impartial decision, decided by a 
simple majority vote. 
Because the Board usually meets only once a 
month, some cases may take longer than 30 days 
to be reviewed. The Board makes every effort to 
resolve each case within 40 days of receiving the 
consumer application form. 
After a case is reviewed, the Board mails you a 
decision letter. The Board also provides a form 
on which to accept or reject the Board’s decision. 
The decisions of the Board are binding on the 
dealer and Ford, but not on consumers who may 
elect to pursue other remedies available to them 
under state and federal law. Decisions of the 
Board may be presented as evidence by any 
party in subsequent legal proceedings that may 
be initiated, where allowed by law. 
251
To Request a DSB Brochure/Application 
For a brochure/application, speak to your dealer 
or write to the Board at the following address: 
Ford of Canada Customer 
Assistance 
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited 
If you live in Canada and have any questions or 
concerns that the dealership cannot answer, 
contact the Customer Assistance Centre. 
Please have the following information available 
when contacting the Customer Assistance Centre: 
qyour telephone number (both business and 
home) 
qyour Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) 
listed on your vehicle ownership license 
qthe year and make of your vehicle 
qthe date purchased 
252
qthe name of the dealer and the city where the 
dealership is located 
qthe current mileage on your vehicle 
Mediation/Arbitration Program 
(Canada Only) 
In those cases where you continue to feel that 
the efforts by Ford and the dealer to resolve a 
factory-related vehicle service concern have been 
unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada participates in an 
impartial third party mediation/arbitration 
program administered by the Canadian Motor 
Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP). 
The CAMVAP program is a straight-forward and 
relatively speedy alternative to resolve a 
disagreement when all other efforts to produce a 
settlement have failed. This procedure is without 
cost to you and is designed to eliminate the 
need for lengthy and expensive legal 
proceedings. 
In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party 
Arbitrators conduct hearings at mutually 
convenient times and places in an informal 
environment. These impartial Arbitrators review 
the positions of the parties, make decisions and, 
where appropriate, render awards to resolve 
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair and 
final as the arbitrator’s award is binding on both 
you and Ford of Canada. 
CAMVAP services are available in all territories 
and provinces, except Quebec. For more 
information, without charge or obligation, call 
your CAMVAP Provincial Administrator directly 
at 1-800-207-0685. 
This plan is not available in the province of 
Quebec. 
253
Getting Help Outside the U.S. 
and Canada 
Before you export your vehicle to a foreign 
country, contact the appropriate foreign embassy 
or consulate to make sure local regulations do 
not prevent you from registering your vehicle. 
Officials at the embassy can also help you decide 
whether you should import your vehicle to that 
country. 
Officials at the embassy or consulate can tell you 
where to get unleaded fuel. If you cannot get 
unleaded fuel or can get only fuel with an 
anti-knock index that is lower than your vehicle 
needs, contact a district or owner relations office 
before you leave the U.S. or Canada. 
Use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without a 
proper conversion may damage the effectiveness 
of your emissions control system and may cause 
engine knocking or serious engine damage. Ford 
Motor Company is not responsible for any 
damage that is caused by use of improper fuel. 
You may also have difficulty importing your 
vehicle back into the U.S. if you use leaded fuel. 
254
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are 
traveling or living in Central or South America, 
the Caribbean, or the Middle East, contact the 
nearest Ford dealership. If the dealership cannot 
help you, write to: 
If you are in other foreign countries, contact the 
nearest Ford dealership. If the dealership cannot 
help you, they can direct you to the appropriate 
Ford affiliate office. 
If you buy your vehicle in North America and 
then relocate outside of the U.S. or Canada, 
register your Vehicle Identification Number and 
new address with Ford Motor Company Export 
Operations. 
255
257 
Accessories 
Ford Accessories for Your Vehicle 
Ford has many fine products available from 
your dealer to clean your vehicle and protect its 
finishes. For best results, use the following, or 
products of equivalent quality: 
A wide selection of accessories is available 
through your local authorized dealer. These fine 
accessories have been engineered specifically to 
fulfill your automotive needs. They are custom 
designed to complement the style and 
aerodynamic appearance of your Ford-built 
vehicle. In addition, each accessory is made from 
high quality materials and meets or exceeds 
Ford’s rigid engineering and safety specifications. 
That is why Ford brand accessories are 
warranted for up to 12 months or 12,000 miles 
(20,000 km), whichever comes first. See your 
dealer for complete warranty information and 
accessory availability.
Comfort and Convenience 
Protection and Appearance 
NOTE: When adding accessories, equipment, 
258 
passengers, and luggage to your 
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight 
capacity of the vehicle or of the front 
or rear axle (GVWR, GAWR as shown 
on the Safety Compliance Certification 
Label). Consult your dealer for specific 
weight information.
259 
NOTE: The Federal Communications 
Commission (FCC) or the Canadian 
Radio Telecommunications Commission 
(CRTC) regulates the use of mobile 
communications systems — such as 
two-way radios, telephones, and theft 
alarms — that are equipped with radio 
transmitters. Any such equipment 
installed in your vehicle should comply 
with FCC or CRTC regulations and 
should be installed only by a qualified 
technician. 
NOTE: Mobile communications systems may 
harm the operation of your vehicle, 
particularly if they are not properly 
designed for automotive use or are not 
properly installed. For example, when 
operated, such systems may cause the 
engine to stumble or stall. In addition, 
such systems may themselves be 
damaged or their operation affected by 
operating your vehicle. (Citizens band 
[CB] transceivers, garage door openers, 
and other transmitters whose power 
output is 5 watts or less will not 
ordinarily affect your vehicle’s 
operation.) 
NOTE: Because we have no control over the 
installation, design, or manufacture of 
such systems, Ford cannot assume 
responsibility for any adverse effects or 
damage that may result if you use this 
equipment.
260
265
Front Exterior View — GT model 
266
267 
Rear Exterior View — standard model
Entrance View 
268
269 
Driver’s Door
Instrument Panel 
270
271 
Instrument Cluster
Hatchback 
272
273 
2.0L Engine Compartment
2.5L Engine Compartment 
274
Index 275 
Index 
A 
ABS warning light 
(see Anti-lock brake system) . . . . . . . 13 
Accessory position on the ignition . . . . . 61 
Additives, engine oil . . . . . . . . . . 190 
Air bag supplemental restraint system 
and child safety seats . . . . . . . . . 113 
description. . . . . . . . . . . . 104, 106 
driver air bag . . . . . . . . . . 104, 106 
indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 
passenger air bag. . . . . . . . . . . 106 
service and information labels . . . . . 106 
tone generator . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 
Air cleaner filter, specifications . . . . . . 237 
Air conditioning, electronic automatic 
temperature control system . . . . . . . 49 
Aluminum wheels. . . . . . . . . . . . 214 
Antenna, radio (see Electronic 
sound system) . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 43 
Antifreeze (see Engine coolant). . . . . . 196 
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) 
description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 
see also Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 
warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 
warninig light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 
Assistance (see Customer assistance) . . . 245 
Audio system (see Electronic 
sound system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 
Autolamp system (see Headlamps) . . . . . 63 
Automatic transaxle 
driving with . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 
fluid, adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 
fluid, checking . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
B 
Backing up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 
Basic vehicle warranty . . . . . . . . . . . 4 
Battery 
acid, treating emergencies . . . . . 175, 205 
disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 
how to service . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 
jumping a disabled battery. . . . . . . 174 
maintenance-free . . . . . . . . . . . 203 
proper disposal, recycling . . . . . . . 205 
replacement, specifications . . . . . . . 237 
servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 
when storing your vehicle . . . . . . . 236 
Brake fluid 
brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . 12 
checking and adding . . . . . . . . . 193 
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 
Brakes 
adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 
anti-lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 
anti-lock brake system (ABS) 
warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 
applying the brakes . . . . . . . . . . 133 
brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . 12 
fluid, checking and adding. . . . . . . 193 
fluid, refill capacities . . . . . . . . . 193 
front disc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 
if brakes do not grip well . . . . . . . 133 
master cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 
new brake linings . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 
noise. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 
parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 
power braking . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 
servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 
when storing your vehicle . . . . . . . 236 
Break-in period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 
Brights (high beams). . . . . . . . . . . . 15 
276 Index
Bulbs, replacing 
halogen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 
headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 
C 
Canada, customer assistance . . . . . . . 252 
Canada, warranty information . . . . . . . 4 
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan 
(CAMVAP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 
Carbon monoxide in exhaust. . . . . . . 130 
Car seats for children 
(see Child safety seats) . . . . . . . . 113 
Cassette tape player (see Electronic 
sound system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 
Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . 222 
CD player (see Electronic sound system) . . 28 
Chains, tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 
Changing a tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 
Child safety restraints . . . . . . . . . . 111 
child safety seats . . . . . . . . . . . 113 
Child safety seats 
and air bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 
attaching with tether straps . . . . . . 122 
automatic locking mode 
(retractor) . . . . . . . . . . . 102, 113 
in front seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 
in rear outboard seat . . . . . . . . . 113 
in rear seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 
tether anchorage hardware . . . . . . 122 
Chime, safety belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 
Cleaning your vehicle 
CD player and discs . . . . . . . . . . 31 
chrome and aluminum parts. . . . . . 231 
engine compartment . . . . . . . . . 232 
exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 
exterior lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 
fabric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 
headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 
instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . 49, 231 
Index 277
Cleaning your vehicle (continued) 
interior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 
interior lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 
plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 
polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 
rear windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 
rustproofing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 
safety belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 
tail lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 
upholstery and interior trim . . . . . . 233 
washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 
waxing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 
wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 
windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 
Clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 43 
Clutch 
fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 
operation while driving . . . . . . . . 147 
recommended shift speeds . . . . . . . 150 
shifting the gears . . . . . . . . . . . 148 
Cold engine starting . . . . . . . . . . . 127 
Combination lap and shoulder belts . . 98, 100 
Compact disc player (see Electronic 
sound system) . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 28 
Compact disc radio (see Electronic 
sound system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 
Console, description . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 
Controls, mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 
Convenience kit in cargo area . . . . . . 169 
Coolant (see Engine coolant) 
checking and adding . . . . . . . . . 196 
preparing for storage . . . . . . . . . 236 
temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . 18 
warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 
Cooling fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 
Crankcase emission filter. . . . . . . . . 237 
Customer Assistance Center, Ford (U.S.) . . 247 
Customer Assistance Centre, 
Ford of Canada. . . . . . . . . . . . 252 
278 Index
D 
Daytime running light system . . . . . . . 63 
Defects, reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 
Dipstick 
automatic transaxle fluid . . . . . . . 201 
engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 
power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . 199 
Disabled vehicle (see Towing) . . . . . . 179 
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 
Driving under special conditions 
heavy load. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 
towing a trailer. . . . . . . . . . . . 153 
E 
Electrical system, relays . . . . . . . . . 165 
Electronic radio with cassette 
(see Electronic sound system) . . . . . . 34 
Electronic sound system 
antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 
radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 
tuning the radio . . . . . . . . . . 23, 37 
warranty and service information . . . . 46 
Electronic stereo cassette radio 
(see Electronic sound system) . . . . . . 34 
Electronic stereo radio (see Electronic 
sound system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 
Emergencies, roadside 
assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 
battery acid spills. . . . . . . . . 175, 206 
fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 
jump-starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 
towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 
Emergency brake (parking brake). . . . . 134 
Emission control system 
catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . 222 
emissions warranty . . . . . . . . . 4, 222 
Index 279
Engine 
check engine warning light . . . . . . . 15 
does not start. . . . . . . . . . . 128, 130 
fuel injected engine, starting . . . . . . 125 
fuel pump shut-off switch . . . . . . . 130 
preparing to start . . . . . . . . . . . 125 
starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 
starting after a collision . . . . . . . . 130 
storing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 234 
Engine block heater . . . . . . . . . . . 129 
Engine coolant 
checking and adding . . . . . . . . . 196 
checking hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 
disposal . . . . . . . . . . . 184, 193, 203 
preparing for storage . . . . . . . . . 236 
proper solution . . . . . . . . 184, 193, 203 
temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . 18 
Engine coolant temperature gauge 
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 
mechanical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 
Engine coolant temperature 
gauge:electronic. . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 
Engine fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 
Engine:idle speed control. . . . . . . . . 128 
Engine oil 
changing oil and oil filter . . . . . . . 191 
checking and adding . . . . . . . . . 191 
dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 
disposal . . . . . . . . . . . 184, 193, 203 
engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . 17 
filter, specifications . . . . . . . . . . 237 
specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 
synthetic oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 
“break-in” oils . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 
viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 
Exhaust fumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 
280 Index
F 
Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 
engine fan, avoiding injury . . . . . . 184 
Federal Communications Commission. . . . 45 
Federal Highway Administration 
Regulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 
Flashers, hazard. . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 
Flashing the lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 
Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 
Foglamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 
Ford Customer Assistance Center. . . . . 247 
Ford Motor Company of Canada . . . . . 252 
Ford of Canada Customer 
Assistance Centre. . . . . . . . . . . 252 
Foreign registration . . . . . . . . . . . 254 
French owner guides, how to obtain . . . . 3 
Fuel 
calculating fuel economy . . . . . . . 220 
choosing the right fuel . . . . . . . . 217 
filling your vehicle with fuel. . . . . . 215 
filter, specifications . . . . . . . . . . 237 
fuel filler door release lever . . . . . . 215 
fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 
octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 
quality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 
running out of fuel . . . . . . . . . . 220 
safety information relating to 
automotive fuels . . . . . . . . . . 219 
storing your vehicle. . . . . . . . . . 235 
treating emergencies . . . . . . . . . 219 
Fuel cap 
removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 
replacing. . . . . . . . . . . . . 215, 217 
Fuel filler door 
remote release . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 
Fuel filter, specifications . . . . . . . . . 237 
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 
Index 281
Fuel pump shut-off switch 
engine does not start . . . . . . . . . 130 
starting after a collision . . . . . . . . 130 
G 
Gas cap (see Fuel cap) . . . . . . . . . . 215 
Gas mileage (see Fuel economy) . . . 217, 220 
Gasoline (see Fuel). . . . . . . . . . . . 215 
Gauges, Electronic 
engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . 18 
fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 
odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 
speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 
Gauges, Mechanical 
engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . 18 
engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . 17 
fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 
odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 
speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 
tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 
trip odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) 
calculating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 
definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 
driving with a heavy load . . . . . . . 151 
Gearshift 
automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . 138 
column-mounted . . . . . . . . . . . 138 
downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 
floor-mounted . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 
locking the gearshift. . . . . . . . . . . 61 
positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138, 148 
shifting the gears . . . . . . . . . 138, 148 
upshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 
Gearshift:shifting the gears . . . . . . 138, 148 
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) 
calculating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 
definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 
driving with a heavy load . . . . . . . 151 
282 Index
H 
Hazard flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 
Headlamps 
aiming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 
checking alignment . . . . . . . . . . 226 
cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 
daytime running lights . . . . . . . . . 63 
flashing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 
replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 
High beams, indicator light . . . . . . . . 15 
Hood 
latch location. . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 
release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 
working under the hood . . . . . . . 184 
Hoses, checking. . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 
I 
Identification Number, Vehicle (VIN) . . . 252 
Idle 
relearning . . . . . . . . . . . . 178, 184 
speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 
Ignition, positions of the ignition . . . . . . 61 
Indicator lights and chimes (see Lights) . . . 7 
Infant seats (see Safety seats). . . . . 111, 113 
Instrument cluster. . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 
lighting up panel and interior . . . . . . 58 
Interval wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 
J 
Jack 
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 
positioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 
storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 
Jump-starting your vehicle 
attaching cables. . . . . . . . . . . . 176 
disconnecting cables. . . . . . . . . . 178 
Index 283
K 
Keys 
positions of the ignition . . . . . . . . . 61 
stuck in lock position . . . . . . . . . . 61 
L 
Lamps 
checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 
daytime running light system . . . . . . 63 
dome lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 
flashing the lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . 66 
fog lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 
hazard flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 
instrument panel, dimming . . . . . . . 58 
interior lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 
replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 
Lane change indicator 
(see Turn signal) . . . . . . . . . . 62, 67 
Lights, warning and indicator 
air bag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 
anti-lock brakes (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . 13 
brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 
check engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 
engine oil pressure . . . . . . . . . . . 17 
hazard warning light . . . . . . . . . 155 
high beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 
oil pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 
rear ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 
safety belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 
service engine soon . . . . . . . . . . . 15 
testing the warning lights . . . . . . . 126 
turn signal indicator. . . . . . . . . 62, 67 
Load limits 
GAWR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 
trailer towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 
284 Index
Lug nuts 
standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 
tightening sequence. . . . . . . . . . 170 
M 
Maintenance schedule and record 
(see separate Maintenance Schedule 
and Record booklet) . . . . . . . . . . 3 
Maintenance (see Servicing) . . . . . . . 183 
Maintenance (see servicing) . . . . . . . 183 
Manual transaxle 
backing up (reverse) . . . . . . . . . 149 
clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 
shifting gears. . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 
shift speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 
Map pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 
Master cylinder, brakes . . . . . . . . . 193 
Mileage, calculating fuel economy . . . . 220 
Mirrors 
rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 
side view mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . 78 
Moon roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 
Motorcraft parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 
N 
National Highway Traffic Safety 
Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 
New vehicle break-in . . . . . . . . . . . 6 
O 
Octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 
Odometer 
description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 
trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 
Oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192, 237 
Oil (see Engine oil) . . . . . . . . . . . 190 
Index 285
Oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 
On-board diagnostic (OBD II) system . . . 224 
Order forms, service information . . . . . . 24 
Overseas offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 
P 
Parking brake 
operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 
warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 
Parts (see Motorcraft Parts). . . . . . . . 237 
PCV valve, specifications. . . . . . . . . 237 
Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 
Power features 
door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 
mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 
moon roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 
windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 
Power steering 
dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 
driving with power steering . . . . . . 137 
fluid, checking and adding. . . . . . . 199 
servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 
Prop rod, hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 
R 
Radio (see Electronic sound systems) . . . . 21 
Rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 
washer reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . 195 
Regulations, National Highway Traffic 
Safety Administration . . . . . . . . . 243 
Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 
Remote entry system 
replacement/additional transmitters. . . . 88 
replacing the batteries . . . . . . . . . . 87 
Reporting safety defects . . . . . . . . . 243 
286 Index
Restraints, safety (see Safety restraints) 
adult . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89, 98 
child. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 
head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 
infant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111, 113 
Roadside assistance . . . . . . . . . . . 245 
Roadside emergencies . . . . . . . . . . 155 
Rotating the tires . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 
S 
Safety belts (see Safety restraints). . . . . . 98 
Safety defects, reporting . . . . . . . . . 243 
Safety information relating to 
automotive fuels . . . . . . . . . . . 219 
Safety restraints 
adjusting the safety belts . . . . . . . 100 
automatic locking mode. . . . . . . . 102 
automatic locking mode (retractor) . . . 102 
cleaning the safety belts . . . . . . . . 234 
extension assembly . . . . . . . . . . 103 
for adults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 
for children . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 
for infants . . . . . . . . . . . . 111, 113 
for pregnant women . . . . . . . . 89, 98 
head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 
lap and shoulder belts . . . . . . . 98, 100 
maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 
proper use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 
replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 
warning light and chime . . . . . . . . 11 
Safety seats for children 
and air bags . . . . . . . . . . . 102, 113 
attaching with tether straps . . . . . . 122 
automatic locking mode 
(retractor) . . . . . . . . . . . 102, 113 
in front seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 
in rear outboard . . . . . . . . . . . 113 
in rear seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 
tether anchorage hardware . . . . . . 122 
Index 287
Seat belts (see Safety restraints). . . . . . . 98 
Seats 
child safety seats . . . . . . . . . . . 113 
cleaning upholstery . . . . . . . . . . 233 
folding rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 
head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 
rear seat access . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 
split-folding rear seat . . . . . . . . . . 96 
Serial number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . 252 
Service concerns. . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 
Servicing your vehicle 
precautions when servicing . . . . . . 184 
servicing when you tow . . . . . . . . 179 
Shift positions (see Gearshift). . . . . 138, 148 
Shoulder and lap belts 
(see Safety restraints) . . . . . . . 98, 100 
Shoulder belts (see Safety restraints). . . . 100 
Side mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 
Sliding moon roof (see Moon roof) . . . . . 74 
Snow tires and chains . . . . . . . . . . 214 
Spare tire 
changing the tire . . . . . . . . . 167, 170 
conventional spare . . . . . . . . . . 169 
finding the spare . . . . . . . . . . . 169 
removing the spare tire . . . . . . . . 169 
storing the flat tire . . . . . . . . 169, 171 
temporary spare . . . . . . . . . . . 168 
Spark plugs, specifications . . . . . . . . 237 
Speed control, turning off . . . . . . . . . 72 
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 
Starting your vehicle 
preparing to start your vehicle . . . . . 125 
starting a cold engine . . . . . . . . . 127 
starting after a collision . . . . . . . . 130 
starting a warm engine . . . . . . . . 127 
starting your vehicle if the battery 
is disabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 
Steering, power . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 
Steering wheel, locking. . . . . . . . . . . 61 
Storage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . 80 
288 Index
Storage compartments (continued) 
center console . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 
map pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 
Storing your vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . 234 
Sunroof (moon roof). . . . . . . . . . . . 74 
Supplemental air bag readiness light . . . . 11 
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) . . . 104 
T 
Tachometer 
mechanical cluster . . . . . . . . . . . 19 
Tail lamps 
bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 225 
cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 
Temperature control (see Climate control) . . 49 
Testing the warning lights . . . . . . . . 126 
Tether anchor installation 
(see Child restraints) . . . . . . . . . 122 
Tires 
changing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 
checking the pressure . . . . . . . . . 208 
cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 
inspection and maintenance . . . . 208, 210 
replacing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 
rotating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 
snow tires and chains . . . . . . . . . 214 
spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 
storing your vehicle. . . . . . . . . . 236 
tire grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 
treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 
wear bands . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 
wheel and tire matching. . . . . . . . 212 
Towing a trailer (see Trailer towing) . . . 153 
Towing your vehicle 
using wheel dollies . . . . . . . . . . 179 
with a tow truck . . . . . . . . . . . 179 
Transaxle 
automatic operation. . . . . . . . . . 138 
fluid, checking and adding 
(automatic) . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 
Index 289
Transaxle control switch . . . . . . . . . 143 
Trip odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 
Tune-up specifications (VECI). . . . . . . 224 
Turn signal 
indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 
lever. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 67 
U 
Upshift speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 
Used engine oil, disposal. . . . . 184, 193, 203 
V 
Variable interval wipers . . . . . . . . . . 68 
VECI (Vehicle Emission Control Information) 
decal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . 252 
Vehicle loading 
automatic transaxles. . . . . . . . . . 152 
calculating the load . . . . . . . . . . 152 
manual transaxles. . . . . . . . . . . 152 
understanding loading information . . . 151 
Vehicle storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 
Ventilating your vehicle 
(see Climate control) . . . . . . . . . . 49 
Viscosity (see Engine oil). . . . . . . . . 190 
W 
Warm engine, starting . . . . . . . . . . 127 
Warning chimes, safety belt . . . . . . . . 11 
Warning lights, testing. . . . . . . . . . 126 
Warning lights (see Lights). . . . . . . . . 7 
Warranties 
basic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 
Canada. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 
radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 
290 Index
Warranty Information Booklet . . . . . . . 4 
Washer fluid 
rear window reservoir . . . . . . . . 195 
reservoir. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 
windshield. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 
Weight limits (GAWR, GVWR) . . . . . . 151 
Wheel and tire matching. . . . . . . . . 212 
Wheel dollies (see Towing). . . . . . . . 179 
Wheels 
cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 
covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 
inspection and maintenance . . . . . . 208 
lug nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 
replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 
Windows 
one-touch down . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 
power windows, operating . . . . . . . 77 
Windshield, washing . . . . . . . . . . . 68 
Windshield washer fluid and wipers 
checking and adding fluid. . . . . . . 195 
liftgate reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . 195 
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 
reservoir. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 
specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 
variable interval wipers . . . . . . . . . 68 
Windshield wipers and washer. . . . . . . 68 
Wrecker towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 
Index 291
Service Station 
Information 
292

More Related Content

PDF
96 escort
PDF
96 tracer
PDF
96 crown victoria
PDF
96 probe
PDF
96 explorer
PDF
96windstar
PDF
96aerostar
PDF
96 grand marquis
96 escort
96 tracer
96 crown victoria
96 probe
96 explorer
96windstar
96aerostar
96 grand marquis

What's hot (18)

PDF
Ford+ranger+1995
PDF
96 aspire
PDF
96tau rus
PDF
96 mustang
PDF
96 thunderbird
PDF
96bronco
PDF
96 cougar
PDF
96 sable
PDF
97 tow ncar
PDF
96villager
PDF
96 mystique
PDF
97mark8
PDF
97mustang
PDF
96 econolinee150 250-350-450
PDF
96 f series150
PDF
96 motorhome
PDF
97grandmarquis
PDF
97continental
Ford+ranger+1995
96 aspire
96tau rus
96 mustang
96 thunderbird
96bronco
96 cougar
96 sable
97 tow ncar
96villager
96 mystique
97mark8
97mustang
96 econolinee150 250-350-450
96 f series150
96 motorhome
97grandmarquis
97continental
Ad

Viewers also liked (17)

PDF
13f53 59motorhome
PDF
13mustang
PDF
00 sable
PDF
13flex1
PDF
13mkx
PDF
97escort
PDF
00 postal explorer
PDF
Connect(cg3526ru)04 2010 light
PDF
Mondeo 10-2011-ava-avto.ru
PDF
13navigator
PDF
97exp lorer
PDF
97e150 audio
PDF
97f150 250liht
PDF
2013 diesel
PDF
97taurus
PDF
Escape 2008
PDF
98 navigator
13f53 59motorhome
13mustang
00 sable
13flex1
13mkx
97escort
00 postal explorer
Connect(cg3526ru)04 2010 light
Mondeo 10-2011-ava-avto.ru
13navigator
97exp lorer
97e150 audio
97f150 250liht
2013 diesel
97taurus
Escape 2008
98 navigator
Ad

Similar to 97probe (18)

PDF
96 ranger
PDF
96tau rus
PDF
97aerostar
PDF
97aerostar
PDF
96countur
PDF
96countur
PDF
97crown
PDF
97ranger
PDF
97 f 53motorhome
PDF
97thanderbird
PDF
97cougar
PDF
97f250heavy 350-superduty
PDF
97aspire
PDF
97aspire
PDF
98 villager
PDF
97continental
PDF
97viliger
PDF
97windstar
96 ranger
96tau rus
97aerostar
97aerostar
96countur
96countur
97crown
97ranger
97 f 53motorhome
97thanderbird
97cougar
97f250heavy 350-superduty
97aspire
97aspire
98 villager
97continental
97viliger
97windstar

97probe

  • 3. Table of Contents Introduction .................................................... 1 Instrumentation .............................................. 7 Electronic Sound Systems ......................... 21 Controls and Features ................................ 47 Seating and Safety Restraints .................. 89 Starting ......................................................... 125 Driving ......................................................... 133 Roadside Emergencies .............................. 155 Maintenance and Care ............................. 183 Capacities and Specifications ................. 237 Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Only) .................................................. 243 Customer Assistance ................................. 245 Accessories .................................................. 257 Quick Index ................................................ 265 Index ............................................................. 275 Service Station Information .................... 292
  • 4. Introductory Information Ford’s Commitment to You At Ford Motor Company, excellence is the continuous commitment to achieve the best result possible. It is dedication to learning what you want, determination to develop the right concept, and execution of that concept with care, precision, and attention to detail. In short, excellence means being the standard by which others are judged. Our Guiding Principles n Quality comes first. For your satisfaction, the quality of our 1 products and services must be our number one priority. n You are the focus of everything we do. Our work must be done with you in mind, providing better products and services than our competition. n Continuous improvement is essential to our success. We must strive for excellence in everything we do: in our products — in their safety and value — and in our services, our human relations, our competitiveness, and our profitability. n Employee involvement is our way of life. We are a team. We must treat one another with trust and respect. n Dealers and suppliers are our partners. We must maintain mutually beneficial relationships with dealers, suppliers, and our other business associates. n Integrity is never compromised. Our conduct worldwide must be pursued in a manner that is socially responsible and commands respect for its integrity and for its positive contributions to society.
  • 5. Things to Know About Using This Guide Congratulations on the purchase of your new vehicle. This guide has information about the equipment and the options for your new vehicle. You may not have bought all of the options available to you. If you do not know which information applies to your vehicle, talk to your dealer. This guide describes equipment and gives specifications for equipment that was in effect when this guide was approved for printing. Ford may discontinue models or change specifications or design without any notice and without incurring obligation. NOTES and WARNINGS NOTES give you additional information about the subject matter you are referencing. WARNINGS remind you to be especially careful in those areas where carelessness can cause damage to your vehicle or personal injury to yourself, your passengers or other people. Please read all WARNINGS carefully. 2 RWARNING Finding Information in This Guide After you have read this guide once, you will probably return to it when you have a specific question or need additional information. To help you find specific information quickly, you can use the Quick Index, Table of Contents, or the Index. The Quick Index at the end of the book provides a page number following each item which indicates where detailed information can be found.
  • 6. Introductory Information To use the Index, turn to the back of the book and search in the alphabetical listing for the word that best describes the information you need. If the word you chose is not listed, think of other related words and look them up. We have designed the Index so that you can find information under a technical term. Canadian Owners — French Version French Owner Guides can be obtained from your dealer or by writing to Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited, Service Publications, P.O. Box 1580, Station B, Mississauga, Ontario L4Y 4G3. Your Maintenance Schedule and Record Booklet The Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet lists the services that are most important for keeping your vehicle in good condition. A record log is also provided to help you keep track of all services performed. About the Warranties Your vehicle is covered by three types of warranties: Basic Vehicle Warranty, Extended Warranties on certain parts, and Emissions Warranties. Read your Warranty Information Booklet carefully to find out about your vehicle’s warranties and your basic rights and responsibilities. If you lose your Warranty Information Booklet, you can get a new one free of charge. Contact any Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer, or refer to the addresses and phone numbers on the first page of this owner guide. 3
  • 7. Buying a Ford Extended Service Plan If you bought your vehicle in the U.S., you can buy a Ford Extended Service Plan for your vehicle. This optional contract provides service protection for a longer period of time than the basic warranty that comes with your vehicle. You do not have to buy this option when you buy your vehicle. However, your option to purchase the Ford Extended Service Plan runs out after 18 months or 18,000 miles. See your dealer for more details about the Ford Extended Service Plan. If you purchased a Canadian vehicle and did not take advantage of the Ford Extended Service Plan at the time of purchase, you may still be eligible. See your dealer for the details. Special Notice NOTICE TO OWNERS OF UTILITY-TYPE VEHICLES As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or an accident. Be sure to read the Additional Special Driving Instructions for Utility Vehicles in this book and the special supplement included with four-wheel drive vehicles entitled 4-Wheeling with Ford. Although this special supplement is primarily directed to four-wheel drive vehicle operators, these principles of safe driving also apply to operators of the two-wheel drive Explorer. Even though you may not select a 4WD or AWD option for your Explorer, many of its operating characteristics are similar to those of a four-wheel drive vehicle. For this reason, Ford urges you to read and understand the contents of the 4-Wheeling with Ford supplement. 4
  • 8. Introductory Information 5 AMBULANCE PACKAGES RWARNING Do not use this vehicle as an ambulance. Breaking Your Vehicle In Your new vehicle goes through an adjustment or break-in period during the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) that you drive it. During the break-in period, you need to pay careful attention to how you drive your vehicle. n Avoid sudden stops. Because your vehicle has new brake linings, you should take these steps: — Watch traffic carefully so that you can anticipate when to stop. — Begin braking well in advance. — Apply the brakes gradually. The break-in period for new brake linings lasts for 100 miles (160 km) of city driving or 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of highway driving. n Wheel lug nuts must be retightened to proper torque specifications at 500 miles/800 km of new vehicle operation. Proper torque specifications are provided in this guide. Also retighten to proper torque specification at 500 miles/800 km after any wheel change or any other time the wheel lug nuts have been loosened. n Use only the type of engine oil that Ford recommends. See Engine oil recommendations in the Index. Do not use special “break-in” oils.
  • 9. Some vehicles are equipped with a Powertrain Control Module that limits engine speeds with a cut-out mode to promote durability. Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle Pollen, bird droppings and tree sap can damage the paint, especially in hot weather. Wash your vehicle as often as necessary to keep it clean. Take similar precautions if your vehicle is exposed to chemical industrial fallout. Paint damage resulting from fallout is not related to a defect in paint materials or workmanship and therefore is not covered by warranty. Ford, however, believes that continual improvement in customer satisfaction is a high priority. For this reason, Ford has authorized its dealers to repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of new vehicles damaged by environmental fallout within 12 months or 12,000 miles (20,000 km) of purchase, whichever comes first. Customers may be required to bring their vehicle in for inspection by a Ford representative. Washing and Polishing Your Vehicle Wash the outside of your vehicle, including the underside, with a mild detergent. DO NOT: n Wash your vehicle with hot water n Wash your vehicle while it sits in direct sunlight n Wash your vehicle while the body is hot Polish your vehicle to remove harmful deposits and protect the finish. 6
  • 10. Introductory Information Cleaning Chrome and Aluminum Parts Wash chrome and aluminum parts with a mild detergent. Do not use steel wool, abrasive cleaners, fuel or strong detergents. Cleaning Plastic Parts Some of your vehicle’s exterior trim parts are plastic. Clean with a tar and road oil remover if necessary. Use a vinyl cleaner for routine cleaning. Do not clean plastic parts with thinners, solvents or petroleum-based cleaners. If you have your vehicle rustproofed, remove oversprayed rustproofing with a tar and road oil remover. If rustproofing is not removed from plastic and rubber parts, it can cause deterioration. Because your vehicle’s side mouldings are painted in lacquer, do not use thinners or solvents to clean them. 7
  • 11. 7 Instrumentation The instrument panel (dashboard) on your vehicle is divided into several different sections. The illustrations on the following pages show the major parts of the instrument panel that are described in this chapter. Some items shown may not be on all vehicles. In your vehicle, the warning lights and gauges are grouped together on the instrument panel. We call this grouping an instrument cluster.
  • 12. The Mechanical Cluster Instrument cluster 8
  • 13. 9 Warning light locations on the instrument cluster
  • 14. The instrument cluster on the Probe GT model is similar to the one shown. The two exceptions are: the speedometer on the GT model shows 140 mph (225 km/h) and it has a 7,000 rpm red-line tachometer. GT model speedometer and tachometer The following warning lights and gauges are on the cluster. All of the warning lights and gauges alert you to possible problems with your vehicle. The following sections detail what each of these indicators means. 10
  • 15. Indicator Lights and Chimes Safety Belt Warning Light and Chime This warning light and chime remind you to fasten your safety belt. If you do not fasten your safety belt before the ignition is turned to ON, the chime will sound for 4 to 8 seconds and the warning light will illuminate for 1 to 2 minutes, or until the safety belt is fastened. If you fasten the safety belt before the ignition is turned to ON, neither the light nor chime will activate. Safety belt light Air Bag Readiness Light This light illuminates for six seconds when the ignition is turned to the ON position. If the light fails to illuminate, continues to flash, remains on, or if a series of five beeps is heard, have the system serviced as soon as possible. 11 Air bag readiness light
  • 16. 12 RWARNING If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the air bag system serviced at your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer immediately. Brake System Warning Light Your vehicle has a divided brake system. If one part isn’t working, the other part can still work and stop you. For good braking, though, you need both systems working well. If the warning light illuminates, there could be a problem. Have your brake system inspected right away. This light should illuminate as you start the vehicle. If it doesn’t illuminate then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s a problem. Brake system and parking brake light This light illuminates briefly when you turn the ignition key to START. It normally goes off shortly after the engine starts and you release the parking brake, but it may stay on for up to 60 seconds. If the light stays on for longer than 60 seconds or comes on after you have fully released the parking brake, have the hydraulic brake system serviced.
  • 17. This light will also illuminate if the parking brake does not release fully. If it does stay on after the parking brake is fully released, it means there may be a brake problem. Pull off the road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is harder to push, the pedal may go closer to the floor, or it may take longer to stop the vehicle. Try the brakes again after you have stopped. 13 RWARNING The BRAKE light indicates that the brakes may not be working properly. Have the brakes checked immediately. Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the anti-lock brake system warning light will illuminate. When the engine is started, the anti-lock brake system control unit will determine if all components of the system are operating correctly. The warning light could remain on for two to four seconds. The anti-lock brake system warning light RWARNING If the anti-lock brake system warning light remains on or comes on while driving, have the braking system checked by a qualified service technician as soon as possible.
  • 18. NOTE: If a fault occurs in the anti-lock 14 system, and the brake warning light is not lit, the anti-lock system is disabled but normal brake function remains operational. NOTE: If your vehicle must be jump-started because of a low battery, the Anti-Lock Brake System warning light could remain on. This is due to low battery voltage and does not indicate a malfunction in the system. Under these circumstances, you should drive your vehicle only after the battery has had time to charge and the light has gone out. The Low Fuel Light This light illuminates when fuel level in your tank has reached approximately 2-3 gallons (7-10 liters). Low fuel light
  • 19. 15 High Beam Light This light illuminates when the headlamps are turned to high beam or when you flash the lights. High beam light Check Engine Warning Light This light illuminates when the electronic engine control system is not working properly. This is the computer that controls the operating conditions of the engine. Check engine warning light This light illuminates briefly when you turn the ignition to the ON position, but should turn off when the engine starts. If the light does not come on when you turn the ignition to the ON position or if it comes on and stays on when you are driving, have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible. This indicates a possible problem with one of the engine’s emission control systems. You do not need to have your vehicle towed in.
  • 20. If the light flashes briefly while you are driving, it means that the condition is no longer present. O/D OFF Light (If equipped) This light tells you that the overdrive off (O/D OFF) button on the shift selector has been pushed. When the light is on, the transaxle will not shift into overdrive. Depressing the button on the shift selector again will return the vehicle to “overdrive on” mode. The transaxle will be in the “overdrive on” mode when the vehicle is started even if the O/D OFF mode was selected when the vehicle was last shut off. Refer to the Driving chapter for more information. If the light does not illuminate when the O/D OFF button is pressed, or if the light flashes when you are driving, have your vehicle serviced at the first opportunity. If this condition persists, damage could occur to the transaxle. Overdrive OFF light Gauges Fuel Gauge The fuel gauge displays approximately how much fuel you have in the fuel tank. The ignition must be turned off while putting fuel in the tank in order to get a correct fuel gauge reading after the ignition is turned on. 16
  • 21. The fuel gauge indicator may vary slightly while the vehicle is in motion. This is the result of fuel movement within the tank. You can get a more accurate reading with the vehicle on smooth, level ground. Charging System Gauge This gauge tells you your battery’s voltage when you turn your ignition key to ON. When you start your engine, the pointer should move to the NORMAL range if you are not operating any electrical accessories. (If electrical accessories are operating and the engine is not running, the pointer may move into the red area). If the pointer moves into the red area when no electrical accessories are operating, have the vehicle’s electrical system checked. Engine Oil Pressure Gauge The gauge needle should stay in the NORMAL range (indicating normal engine oil pressure). If the needle drops below the NORMAL range into the low range, there is a loss of oil pressure. If this happens: 1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible. 2. Shut off the engine immediately or severe 17 engine damage could result. 3. Check the oil level when the vehicle is on level ground. 4. Add only as much oil as the engine needs before you drive the vehicle again. Do not overfill the oil reservoir. For more information, see Adding engine oil in the Index.
  • 22. Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge This gauge indicates the temperature of the engine coolant, not the coolant level. If the coolant is not at its proper level or mixture, the gauge indication will not be accurate. The pointer usually moves from C (cold) into the NORMAL band as your vehicle warms up. Under most driving conditions, the pointer should stay in the NORMAL band. If you are driving in heavy traffic or on an extended grade in hot weather, the pointer may reach to the top of the NORMAL band. If, under any circumstances, the pointer moves above the NORMAL band, the engine is overheating and continued operation may cause engine damage. If your engine overheats: 1. Pull off the road as soon as it is safely 18 possible. 2. Shut off the engine immediately or severe engine damage could result. 3. Let the engine cool. 4. Check the coolant level following the instructions on checking and adding coolant to your engine. (See Engine coolant in the Index.) If you do not follow these instructions, you or others could be injured. For instructions on checking and adding coolant to your engine, see Engine coolant in the Index. If you do not follow these instructions, you or others could be injured.
  • 23. 19 5. Refer to Adding Engine Coolant in the Maintenance and Care chapter. Add as much coolant as your engine needs. If the engine continues to overheat, have the cooling system serviced. Speedometer The speedometer tells you how many miles (kilometers) per hour your vehicle is moving. Odometer The odometer tells you the total number of miles (kilometers) your vehicle has been driven. Trip Odometer Use the trip odometer to track your mileage. Simply set the trip odometer to zero by pressing the reset button. Tachometer The tachometer indicates approximate engine revolutions per minute, and is located on the right-hand side of the instrument cluster. The tachometer pointer may move slightly when the key is placed in the ACC or ON position, with the engine off. This pointer movement is normal, and will not affect the accuracy of the tachometer once the engine is running.
  • 24. 21 Electronic Sound Systems Compact Disc Radio
  • 25. Compact Disc Radio The Compact Disc Radio combines the Electronic Stereo Radio with the Ford Compact Disc Player. Using the Controls on Your New Radio/CD Player Most of the features of this unit work for both radio and CD operation, depending on which mode the unit is in. Also, some of the buttons control several different functions, so be sure to read all of the operating instructions carefully. How to turn the radio on and off Press the “POWER” button to turn the radio on. Press it again to turn it off. How to adjust the volume Press the (R/S) side of the “VOL” button to increase/decrease the volume. Bars illuminate in the display to show the relative volume level. NOTE: If the volume level is set above a 22 certain listening level when the ignition switch is turned off, when the ignition switch is turned back on, the volume will come back to a “nominal” listening level. However, if the radio power is turned off, the volume will remain in the position it was set at when radio power was switched off. Selecting the AM or FM frequency band Push the “AM/FM” button to select the desired frequency band. When in the radio mode, pushing the button more than once will alternate between AM, FM1 and FM2. These functions are used with the station memory buttons described under How to tune radio stations.
  • 26. How to tune radio stations There are four ways for you to tune in a particular station. You can manually locate the station using the “SCAN/TUNE” button, “SEEK” the station, “SCAN” to the station or select the station by using the memory buttons, which you can set to any desired frequency. These four methods are described below. qUsing the “SCAN/TUNE” button to manually tune You can change the frequency up or down one increment at a time (FM changes in increments of 200kHz; AM changes in increments of 10kHz) by first pressing the “SCAN/TUNE” button twice (display shows “TUNE”), then — within approximately five seconds —pressing and releasing either the top (b) or bottom (a) half of the “SEEK” button. To change frequencies quickly, press and hold down either the top or bottom half of the “SEEK” button. Manual tuning adjusts your radio to any allowable broadcast frequency, whether or not a station is present on that frequency. (See All About Radio Frequencies in this section.) qUsing the “SEEK” function This feature on your radio allows you to automatically select listenable stations up or down the frequency band. Press the top (a) half of the “SEEK” button to select the next listenable station up the frequency band. Press the bottom (b) half of the button to select the next listenable station down the frequency band. By pressing and holding the button, listenable stations can be passed over to reach the desired station. 23
  • 27. qUsing the “SCAN/TUNE” button to scan radio stations Pressing the “SCAN/TUNE” button once enters the scan mode (display will indicate “SCN”). Pushing the top (a) half of the “SEEK” button will begin the scan mode up the frequency band, stopping on each listenable station for approximately five seconds. Pushing the bottom (b) half of the “SEEK” button will begin the scan mode down the frequency band, again stopping on each listenable station for approximately five seconds. To stop the scan mode on the presently sampled station, press the “SCAN/TUNE” button again. qSetting the Station Memory Preset buttons 24 Your radio is equipped with 5 station memory buttons. These buttons can be used to select up to 5 preset AM stations and 10 FM stations (5 in FM1 and 5 in FM2). Follow the easy steps below to set these buttons to the desired frequencies. 1. Select a band, then select a frequency. 2. Press one of the memory preset buttons and hold the button until the sound returns. That station is now held in memory on that button. 3. Follow the two steps above for each station memory preset button you want to set. NOTE: If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected, the clock and station memory preset buttons will need to be reset.
  • 28. 25 qUsing the Automatic Memory Load feature You can activate the Auto Memory Load feature by pressing and holding the “AUTO PRESET” button for approximately three seconds. Auto Memory Load sets all memory buttons in AM, FM1 and FM2 sequentially by seeking out the first five strong stations for the respective band and storing them in memory buttons 1-5. (FM2 will store the second set of strong stations from the FM band.) With Auto Memory Store, you can continually set strong stations into your memory buttons without losing your existing memory presets, which is especially helpful while traveling. Your radio will automatically set your memory buttons to the strong local stations so you don’t have to continually manually tune to existing stations. Activate Auto Memory Store by pushing the “AUTO PRESET” button once. Your radio will set the first five strong stations of the band you are in (AM, FM1 or FM2) into the memory buttons. The display will show “AUTO,” then run through the frequencies, stopping momentarily on the stations being set into the memory buttons. The radio is now in the “AUTO” mode and the display will show “AUTO” each time a preset is activated. NOTE: If there are fewer than five strong stations in the frequency band, the remaining unfilled buttons will store the last strong station detected on the band. After all stations have been filled, the radio will begin playing the station stored on memory button 1.
  • 29. To deactivate the Auto Memory Store mode and return to the manually-set memory button stations (or those stations set using Auto Memory Load), simply push the “AUTO PRESET” button. Display will show “AUTO” then “OFF.” The next time Auto Memory Store is activated on that band, the radio will store the next set of five strong stations. Using the “AUDIO” button to adjust the tone balance and speaker output qIncreasing or decreasing bass response Push the “AUDIO” button repeatedly until the display reads “BASS.” Push the “+” side of the “VOL” button to increase bass (more “lows”), and push the “-” side to decrease bass (less “lows”). qIncreasing or decreasing treble response Push the “AUDIO” button repeatedly until the display reads “TREB.” Push the “+” side of the “VOL” button to increase treble (more “highs”), and push the “-” side to decrease treble (less “highs”). qAdjusting speaker balance 26 Balance control allows you to adjust the sound distribution between the right and left speakers. Push the “AUDIO” button repeatedly until the display reads “BAL.” Push the “+” side of the “VOL” button to shift the sound to the right speakers, and push the “-” side to shift the sound to the left speakers.
  • 30. 27 qAdjusting speaker fader Fade control allows you to adjust the sound distribution between the front and rear speakers. Push the “AUDIO” button repeatedly until the display reads “FADE.” Push the “+” side of the “VOL” button to shift the sound to the front speakers, and push the “-” side to shift the sound to the rear speakers. NOTE: Illuminated bars in the display show relative levels of bass and treble and positions of speaker balance and fader functions after adjustments are made, then revert to volume level set. Clock operation When in the radio mode, push the “CLOCK” button to switch from radio frequency to clock. Only the clock numerals will be displayed in the clock mode — there is no A.M./P.M. indication. When in the clock mode, the time will be displayed until the button is pushed again. However, if you retune the radio while it is in the clock mode, the new radio frequency will be displayed for approximately ten seconds and then change back to clock. When in the CD mode, push the “CLOCK” button to change the display from elapsed time mode to track number mode to clock mode. If the CD track selection is changed when you are in the clock or elapsed time mode, the new track number will be displayed for approximately ten seconds and then revert back to the previous mode.
  • 31. To set the clock, simultaneously press the “CLOCK” button and either the bottom (b) half of the “SEEK” button to set hours, or the top (a) half of the “SEEK” button to set minutes. Using the Controls on Your New Compact Disc Player Your new Ford Compact Disc Player is capable of playing 12 cm or 8 cm discs, without an adapter. The player operates when the power is on and a disc is inserted (label side up). Handle the disc by its edge only. (Be sure to read and follow all of the care and cleaning instructions under How To Take Care of and Clean Your CD Player and Discs.) NOTE: If after you insert a disc, the disc is 28 ejected and “ERROR” begins scrolling in the display, remove the disc and reinsert it right side up (label side up). The digital display on your CD player will either show the track (selection) number or the elapsed time. (The display mode can be selected by pressing the “CLOCK” button.) Indicators for play (a), stop (X) and compression on (“C”) are also in the display. (These features are described later.) Once a disc is inserted, operation of the CD player will override that of the radio. NOTE: The volume, bass, treble, balance and fader controls on the radio are also used with the CD player. Refer to earlier operating instructions on these controls.
  • 32. 29 How to insert a disc and begin play Insert one disc, label side up into the disc opening. When inserted, the disc automatically loads into the unit and play starts at the beginning of the first track (selection). When the disc reaches the end, the disc player automatically returns to the beginning of the disc and resumes playing. NOTE: Once a disc is inserted, the disc opening is secured to prevent the accidental insertion of a second disc. NOTE: The CD player has heat protection circuitry to protect the laser diode. If the temperature of the player reaches 167°F (75°C), the heat detection circuit will shut off the player and “TOO HOT” will scroll in the display for approximately five seconds (radio will resume playing). When the temperature returns to normal operating range, the CD player will again be operational. How to stop and restart the CD player When a disc is loaded, the unit automatically enters the play mode and the play indicator (a) illuminates. To stop temporarily, press the “PLAY/STOP” button or the “AM/FM” button. The stop indicator (X) in the display illuminates and operation returns to the radio mode. To resume CD play, press the “PLAY/STOP” button once again. NOTE: If the ignition key is turned OFF during play and then is set to the ON or ACCESSORY position, the CD player will resume playing in the mode it was in when ignition was turned off.
  • 33. Using the “SEEK” feature The “SEEK” feature allows you to quickly find a particular selection on the disc. Press the bottom (b) half of the “SEEK” button once to repeat the current playing selection. Press the top (a) half of the “SEEK” button to advance to the next selection. Pressing and holding the bottom (b) or top (a) half of the “SEEK” button will scroll backward and forward respectively through the tracks. How to fast forward or reverse your CD player To quickly search for a particular point in a selection, press the “FF” button (to fast forward) or the “REV” button (to reverse). While either button is pressed, the disc goes forward or backward at two different speeds depending on how long the button is held down. (Pressing either button for more than three seconds will speed up the process.) Release the button at the desired point (found by watching the elapsed playing time in the display or by listening to the sound during fast forward or reverse). When you have reached the beginning of track 1, the CD player will begin playing. When you have reached the end of the disc by keeping the fast forward button pressed, the display will show “END” and the player will go into pause mode. Push the “PLAY/STOP” button to begin playing the first track of the disc, press the “REV” button to back up from the end of the disc, or use the “SEEK” function to locate a desired track. 30
  • 34. Using the “SCAN” function Press the “SCAN/TUNE” button to enter the scan mode. Once in the scan mode, press the top (b) or bottom (a) half of the “SEEK” button to scan forward or reverse, respectively. The CD player will begin scanning the disc, stopping on each listenable track for approximately an eight-second sampling. This continues until you press the “SCAN/TUNE” button a second time. How to eject the disc Push the “EJECT” button to stop play, eject the disc and resume radio operation of your audio system. NOTE: You can eject the disc while the radio 31 power and/or ignition is on or off. How To Take Care of and Clean Your CD Player and Discs To ensure the continued performance of your Ford Compact Disc Player, carefully read the following precautions: qAlways handle the disc by its edge. Never touch the playing surface. qBefore playing, inspect the disc for any contamination. If needed, clean the disc with an approved disc cleaner, such as the DiscwasherH Compact Disc Cleaner or the Allsop 3H Compact Disc Cleaner, by wiping from the center out to the edges. Do not use a circular motion to clean. qDo not clean discs with solvents such as benzine, thinner, commercially available cleaners or antistatic spray intended for analog records.
  • 35. qDo not expose the disc to direct sunlight or heat sources such as defroster and floor heating ducts. Do not leave any discs in a parked car in direct sunlight where there may be a considerable rise in temperature or damage may result. qAfter playing, store the disc in its case. qIf a disc has already been inserted, do not try to insert another disc. Doing so may damage the disc player. qDo not insert anything other than a disc into the disc player. NOTE: The use of optical instruments with 32 this product will increase eye hazard as the laser beam used in this compact disc player is harmful to the eyes. Do not attempt to disassemble the case. Refer servicing to qualified personnel only. Common Operating Conditions of Your CD Player The following information is designed to help you recognize typical situations that could be mistakenly interpreted as mechanical malfunctions of the disc player. qA disc is already loaded. qThe disc is inserted with the label surface downward. qThe disc is dusty or defective. qThe player’s internal temperature is above 140°F (60°C). Allow the player to cool off before operating.
  • 36. qDifferent manufacturers of compact discs may produce discs with different dimensions or tolerances, some of which may not be within industry standards or in accordance with the CD format. Because of this, a new disc that is free of dust and scratches could be defective and may not play on your Ford Compact Disc Player. If play does not begin after the CD button is pushed: qThe radio is not on. qThe unit is in the stop mode. qMoisture may have condensed on the lenses within the unit. If this occurs, remove the disc and wait approximately an hour until the moisture evaporates. 33 If the sound skips: qBadly scratched discs or extremely rough roads will cause the sound to skip. Skipping will not damage the disc player or scratch the discs.
  • 37. Electronic Stereo and Stereo Cassette Radios Electronic Stereo Radio 34
  • 38. 35 Electronic Stereo Radio with Cassette
  • 39. Using the Controls on Your New Radio How to turn the radio on and adjust the volume Press the “POWER” button to turn the radio on. Press it again to turn it off. Press the right (+) side of the “VOLUME” button to increase the volume. Press the left (S) side of the button to decrease the volume. Illuminated bars in the display show the relative volume level. NOTE: If the volume level is set above a 36 certain listening level when the ignition switch is turned off, when the ignition switch is turned back on, the volume will come back to a “nominal” listening level. However, if the radio power is turned off, the volume will remain in the position it was set at when radio power was switched off. Selecting the AM or FM frequency band Push the “AM/FM” button to select the desired frequency band. Pushing the button more than once will alternate between AM, FM1 and FM2. These functions are used with the station memory buttons described under How to tune radio stations. How to tune radio stations (Stereo Radio) There are three ways for you to tune in to a particular station. You can manually locate the station by using the “TUNE” button, “SEEK” the station or select the station by using the memory preset buttons, which you can set to any desired frequency.
  • 40. How to tune radio stations (Stereo Cassette Radio) There are four ways for you to tune in to a particular station. You can manually locate the station by using Automatic Music Search “AMS”, “SEEK” the station, “SCAN” to the station or select the station by using the memory buttons, which you can set to any desired frequency. qUsing the “TUNE” function (Stereo Radio) You can change the frequency up or down one increment at a time by pressing and releasing either the right (+) or left (S) side of the “TUNE” button. To change frequencies quickly, press and hold down either the right or left side of the “TUNE” button. Manual tuning adjusts your radio to any allowable broadcast frequency, whether or not a station is present on that frequency. (See All About Radio Frequencies in this section.) qUsing the “AMS” function to manually tune your radio (Stereo Cassette Radio) You can change the frequency up or down one increment at a time by first pressing the “AMS” button (display shows “TUNE”) then within approximately five seconds pressing and releasing either the right a or left b side of the “SEEK” button. To change frequencies quickly, press and hold down either the right or left side of the “SEEK” button. 37
  • 41. qUsing the “SEEK” function This feature on your radio allows you to automatically select listenable stations up or down the frequency band. Press the right a side of the “SEEK” button to select the next listenable station up the frequency band. Press the left b side of the button to select the next listenable station down the frequency band. By holding the button down, listenable stations can be passed over to reach the desired station. qUsing the “SCAN” function (Stereo Cassette Radio) Press the “SCAN” button to enter the scan mode. The radio will begin scanning up the frequency band, stopping on each listenable station for approximately a five-second sampling. This continues until you press the “SCAN” button a second time. qSetting the Station Memory Preset buttons 38 Your radio is equipped with 5 station memory buttons. These buttons can be used to select up to 5 preset AM stations and 10 preset FM stations (5 in FM1 and 5 in FM2). Follow the easy steps below to set these buttons to the desired frequencies: 1. Select a band, then select a frequency. 2. Press one of the memory preset buttons and hold the button until the sound returns. That station is now held in memory on that button. 3. Follow the two steps above for each station memory preset button you want to set.
  • 42. NOTE: If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected, 39 the clock and station memory preset buttons will need to be reset. Adjusting the tone balance and speaker output of your radio qIncreasing or decreasing bass response Push the “AUDIO” button repeatedly until the display reads “BASS.” Push the right (+) side of the “VOLUME” button to increase bass (more “lows”), and push the left (S) side to decrease bass (less “lows”). qIncreasing or decreasing treble response Push the “AUDIO” button repeatedly until the display reads “TREB.” Push the right (+) side of the “VOLUME” button to increase the treble (more “highs”), and push the left (S) side to decrease treble (less “highs”). Speaker features and operation qAdjusting speaker balance Balance control allows you to adjust the sound distribution between the right and left speakers. Push the “AUDIO” button repeatedly until the display reads “BAL.” Push the right (+) side of the “VOLUME” button to shift the sound to the right speakers, and push the left (S) side to shift the sound to the left speakers.
  • 43. qAdjusting speaker fader 40 Fade control allows you to adjust the sound distribution between the front and rear speakers. Push the “AUDIO” button repeatedly until the display reads “FADE.” Push the right (+) side of the “VOLUME” button to shift the sound to the front speakers, and push the left (S) side to shift the sound to the rear speakers. NOTE: Illuminated bars in the display show relative levels of bass and treble and positions of speaker balance and fader functions after adjustments are made, then revert to volume level set. Using the Controls of Your Cassette Tape Player (If equipped) How to insert a tape Insert a cassette (with the open edge to the right) firmly into the tape door opening, making sure the cassette is completely in and “seated.” NOTE: A cassette tape can be loaded with the ignition on whether or not the radio power is on. Inserting a cassette tape with the radio power off will turn the audio system on. After the cassette is ejected, radio play will return. How to locate a desired track on the tape NOTE: The tape track or side number indicated in the display does not necessarily correspond to the tape track or side number on the cassette label. It is used only to indicate when the tape mechanism reverses tracks.
  • 44. qUsing the Automatic Music Search (“AMS”) function with cassette tape player Press and hold the “AMS” button (“AMS” will appear in the display). Then, push the lefth button to rewind to the beginning of the current selection or press the rightgbutton to fast forward to the beginning of the next selection. qFast forwarding the tape 41 Push the rightgbutton to fast forward the tape. qRewinding the tape Push the lefthbutton to rewind the tape. qHow to change the side of the tape being played The alternate track (other side) of the tape can be selected at any time by pushing both fast-wind buttons (handg) at the same time. The number in the display will alternate between 1 and 2. How to eject the tape To stop the tape and eject the cassette, press the eject (i) button. The radio will resume playing. Using the DolbyH B noise reduction feature NOTE: Noise reduction system manufactured under license from Dolby Labs Licensing Corporation. “Dolby” and double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Push station memory button 3 to activate DolbyH B Noise Reduction.
  • 45. Tips on Caring for the Cassette Player and Tapes In order to keep your cassette tape player performing the way it was meant to, read and follow these simple precautions: qUsing a Ford or equivalent cassette cleaning cartridge to clean the tape player head after 10-12 hours of play will help maintain the best playback sound and proper tape operation. qOnly cassettes that are 90 minutes long or less should be used. Tapes longer than 90 minutes are thinner and subject to breakage or may jam the tape player mechanism. qProtect cassettes from exposure to direct sunlight, high humidity and extreme heat or cold. If they are exposed to extreme conditions, allow them to reach a moderate temperature before playing. qIf a tape is loose inside the cassette, tighten it before playing by putting your finger or a pencil into one of the holes and turning the hub until the tape is tight. qLoose labels on cassette tapes can become lodged in the mechanism. Remove any loose label material before inserting a cassette. qDo not leave a tape in the cassette tape player when not in use. High heat in the vehicle can cause the cassette to warp. 42
  • 46. Clock Operation How to view the clock mode Press the “CLOCK” button to alternate the frequency and time in the display. In the clock mode, pressing any radio function will automatically display the radio frequency for approximately ten seconds before changing back to the clock mode. How to set the clock 1. Turn the radio on. 2. Press and hold in the “CLOCK” button. Press the “SEEK” button left (b) to advance the hours and right (a) to advance the minutes. 43 NOTE: The clock displays 12-hour time with no AM/PM indications. Radio Antenna The radio antenna is mounted on the rear passenger side quarter panel of the vehicle. It is a fixed mast antenna and cannot be retracted. Common Radio Reception Conditions Several conditions prevent FM reception from being completely clear and noise-free, such as the following: 1. Distance/Strength The strength of the FM signal is directly related to the distance the signal must travel. The listenable range of an average FM signal is approximately 25 miles (40 kilometers). Beyond this distance, the radio is operating in a fringe area and the signal becomes weaker.
  • 47. 2. Terrain The terrain (hilly, mountainous, tall buildings) of the area over which the signal travels may prevent the FM signal from being noise-free. Repeated pops and hisses which are heard during an otherwise clear broadcast can occur near the station because of the “line of sight” characteristic of FM radio waves. If there is a building or large structure between the antenna and station, some of the signal “bends” around the building, but certain spots receive almost no signal. Moving out of the “shadow” of the structure will allow the station to return to normal. When the radio waves are reflected off objects or structures, the reflected signal cancels the normal signal, causing the antenna to pick up noise and distortion. Cancellation effects are most prominent in metropolitan areas, but also can become quite severe in hilly terrain and depressed roadways. To minimize these conditions, a stereo/mono blend circuit has been incorporated into this system. This feature automatically switches a weak stereo signal to a clearer monaural signal, which improves the quality of reception. Several sources of static are normal conditions on AM frequencies. These can be caused by power lines, electric fences, traffic lights and thunderstorms. Another reception phenomenon is Strong Signal Capture and Overload. This can occur when listening to a weak station and when passing another broadcast tower. The close station may capture the more distant station, although the 44
  • 48. displayed frequency does not change. While passing the tower, the station may switch back and forth a few times before returning to the original station. When several broadcast towers are present (common in metropolitan areas), several stations may overload the receiver, resulting in considerable station changing, mixing and distortion. Automatic gain control circuitry for both AM and FM bands has been incorporated into this system to reduce strong signal capture and overload. All About Radio Frequencies The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) establish the frequencies that AM and FM radio stations may use for their broadcasts. The allowable frequencies are, AM: 530, 540...1600, 1610 kHz in 10 kHz steps; FM: 87.9, 88.1...107.7, 107.9 MHz in 0.2 MHz steps. Not all frequencies will be assigned to a given area. This radio will tune to each of these frequencies using manual tune and no fine tuning is necessary as radio stations may not use other frequencies. Some FM radio stations advertise a “rounded-off” frequency which is not the frequency they actually broadcast on. For example, a radio station that is assigned a frequency of 98.7 MHz may call itself “Radio 99” even though 99.0 MHz is not an allowable FM broadcast frequency. 45
  • 49. Important Warranty and Service Information qWarranty Your sound system is warranted for three years or 36,000 miles (60,000 kilometers), whichever comes first. Consult your vehicle warranty booklet for further information. Ask your dealer for a copy of this limited warranty. qService At Ford, we stand behind our audio systems with a comprehensive service and repair program. If anything should go wrong with your Ford audio system, return to your dealer for service. There is a nationwide network of qualified Ford authorized repair centers to assist you. 46
  • 50. 47 Controls and Features Your vehicle has a variety of features designed for your comfort, convenience and safety. Read this chapter to find out about standard and optional features. The main controls for the climate control system, clock, and radio are on the instrument panel.
  • 52. NOTE: Any cleaner or polish that increases the 49 gloss (shine) of the upper part of the instrument panel should be avoided. The dull finish in this area is to help protect the driver from undesirable windshield reflection. The Climate Control System Heating Only System (Without Air Conditioning) Function selection The heater in your vehicle has three controls used for air direction, temperature and fan speed. The function selector control lets you direct heated or unheated air through the instrument panel registers, or down to the floor. It also allows you to vent your vehicle with outside air. Heating only system control panel Turning the function selector control all the way to the right (V) directs air to defroster vents and the side window defoggers only. With the function selector control in the MIX position, air is directed out the defrosters, side defoggers and the floor heater outlets.
  • 53. The FLOOR position directs air out the floor outlets and the side window defoggers. Ventilate your vehicle with outside air by choosing the VENT position. Temperature control The air temperature can be adjusted by moving the marker on the temperature control to the red area for warm air, or to the blue area for unheated air. The air will become warmer or cooler depending on how far the control is turned. Fan speed control Fan speed can be controlled by turning the control from LO to HI. Turning On the Heat To heat the inside of your vehicle: 1. Turn the function selector control to FLOOR. 50 When FLOOR is selected, air is directed through the floor registers, and a little air is also directed at the windshield and side windows to help prevent fogging. 2. Turn the temperature control all the way to the right in the red area, or to the desired temperature. 3. Set the fan at the desired speed.
  • 54. 51 Defrosting the Windshield and Side Windows 1. Turn the function selector control to the defrost position. When V is selected, air is directed to the windshield and side windows. 2. Turn the temperature control to the desired temperature. 3. Set the fan at the desired speed. Heating and Defrosting at the Same Time 1. Set the function selector control to MIX. 2. Set the temperature and fan speed as desired. Ventilating Your Vehicle With Outside Air On mild days, you may want to ventilate your vehicle with outside air. To open the vents: 1. Turn the function selector control to VENT. When VENT is selected, air is directed out of the panel registers. 2. Turn the temperature control to the desired temperature. 3. Set the H (fan speed) as desired.
  • 55. Tips for controlling the temperature in your vehicle qTo vary the temperature inside your vehicle, move the temperature selector toward the red area for warmer air and toward the blue area for cooler air. qIf you drive with the fan off and the windows closed, the windows may fog up. To prevent fogging: 1. Set the function selector control to VENT, 52 MIX, FLOOR or the V position. 2. Set the desired temperature. 3. Set the H (fan speed) to the desired position. qDo not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the flow of air to the back seats. qRemove any snow, ice, or leaves from the area below the windshield on the outside of your vehicle. They could block the air intake.
  • 56. Air Conditioning System (If equipped) Operate the air conditioning by using the climate controls on the center of the instrument panel. Air conditioning controls Sometimes you may notice slight engine surging if you have the air conditioner on. This is normal, as the system is designed to cycle the compressor on and off to maintain desired cooling. The reduced compressor operation should benefit fuel economy. On some vehicles with air conditioning, wide-open throttle acceleration will temporarily cut off the air conditioning. Since the air conditioner removes a lot of moisture from the air during operation, it is normal for water to drip on the pavement under the air conditioner drain after you have stopped the vehicle. Action for heating and windshield defrosting are identical for cars equipped with either the Heating Only System or the Heating and Air Conditioning System. For instructions about these functions, see the previous section, Heating Only System. For instructions about using the air conditioning, see the following sections. 53
  • 57. If the inside of your vehicle is very warm, drive for a few minutes with the windows down. This forces most of the hot, stale air out of the vehicle and helps the air conditioning cool the vehicle faster. MAX A/C When MAX A/C is selected, cooled interior air is recirculated through the system. This position is more efficient than NORM A/C. To cool your vehicle quickly in warm weather: 1. Turn the function selector control to MAX 54 A/C. 2. Turn the temperature control to the blue (cool) area. 3. Set the fan at the desired speed. Because MAX A/C uses recirculated air, MAX is usually more efficient than NORM A/C. You can switch to outside air NORM A/C at any time, especially after the vehicle has cooled down. You may notice a slight odor when using the MAX A/C position. This is normal. If the odor becomes annoying, switch the function selector to NORM A/C. To provide the most quiet operation when using MAX A/C, reduce the fan speed after a comfortable temperature has been reached. NORM A/C When maximum air conditioning is not needed, you can use the NORM A/C position to cool your vehicle with outside air. Cooling your vehicle this way brings in outside air and is quieter, but it is less efficient.
  • 58. To cool your vehicle using outside air: 1. Turn the function selector control to NORM 55 A/C. 2. Turn the temperature control all the way to left to the blue (cool) area. 3. Set the fan at the desired speed. In mild weather, setting the function selector control in the VENT position will add cool air to your vehicle without using the air conditioning. You will get better fuel economy without using the air conditioning. Engine Idle Speed Control System Genuine Ford air conditioning (either factory-installed or dealer-installed) has an engine idle speed control system that compensates for engine speed loss that may occur when the air conditioning compressor is running. This idle speed control holds the engine idle essentially constant, regardless of whether the air conditioning system is on or off. NOTE: Whenever service to the air conditioning system is required, make sure the service facility uses a refrigerant recycling system. These systems will capture the refrigerant for reuse. Releasing certain refrigerants into the atmosphere is hazardous to the environment.
  • 59. Rear Window Defroster (If equipped) Rear window defroster button The defroster for the rear window clears frost, fog, or thin ice from both the inside and outside of the rear window. The rear window defroster button is located on the lower right of the instrument panel below the climate control panel. This button is also used to activate your heated power mirrors (if equipped). To defrost the rear window: 1. Clear any snow and/or ice from the rear 56 window. 2. Get in your vehicle and start the engine. 3. Press the rear defrost button. The indicator light turns on. The defroster turns off automatically after 15 to 25 minutes. If the window is not clear, turn on the defroster again. It will also automatically shut off any time the engine is shut off. NOTE: Never use sharp instruments or window cleaners with abrasives to clean the inside of your rear window. If you do, you may damage the heating elements that are bonded to the inside of the rear window and cause damage to the rear window defroster.
  • 60. Rear Window Wiper and Washer The rear window wiper and washer buttons are located on the instrument panel below the climate control panel. To operate the rear wiper, push the rear window wiper button. Push the button a second time to turn the wiper off. To operate the rear washer, push and hold the rear window washer button in. The washer will spray until the button is released. Fog Lamps (If equipped) The fog lamps only operate when the headlamps are on low beam. To activate fog lamps, push the button on the control panel below the climate controls. An indicator light on the button will illuminate. Push the button again to turn the fog lamps off. 57 Fog lamp button
  • 61. Interior Lights Lighting Up the Interior and Instrument Panel With the parking lamps or headlamps on, the brightness of the instrument panel lighting can be adjusted. To brighten or dim the instrument panel lighting, rotate the dimmer control thumbwheel as desired. Dimmer control thumbwheel The dimmer control thumbwheel is located to the left of the steering wheel on the instrument panel. Dome Lamp The dome lamp illuminates whenever one of the front doors is opened and turns off automatically when the doors are closed. You may turn the dome lamp on and off while the doors are closed by using the ON/OFF switch located on the interior/map lamp control panel. 58
  • 62. Interior/map lamp control panel Map lamps (if equipped) The map lamps can be turned on by using the interior/map lamp control panel located between the sun visors. There are two map lamps, one for the driver and one for the passenger. To turn on the map lamp, push the button that is next to the lamp. Push the buttons again to turn the map lamps off. 59
  • 63. Radio For information about the radio in your vehicle, refer to the Electronic Sound Systems chapter in this Owner Guide. Clock Controls on Electronic Radios The electronic radios have a built-in clock. For complete operating instructions, refer to the Electronic Sound Systems chapter in this Owner Guide. 60
  • 64. Ignition Understanding the Positions of the Ignition Ignition lock cylinder LOCK locks the steering wheel. It also locks the gearshift lever in P (Park) (automatic transaxle). LOCK is the only position that allows you to remove the key. The LOCK feature helps to protect your vehicle from theft. To remove the key if you have a manual transaxle, push the key in while turning it to the LOCK position. If your key is stuck in the LOCK position and will not turn, move your steering wheel left or right until the key turns freely. ACC (Accessory) allows some of your vehicle’s electrical accessories to operate while the engine is not running. ON allows you to test your vehicle’s warning lights (except the brake system warning light) to make sure they work before you start the engine. The key returns to the ON position once the engine is started and remains in this position while the engine runs. 61
  • 65. START cranks the engine. Release the key once the engine starts so that you do not damage the starter. The key should return to ON when you release it. The START position also allows you to test the brake warning light. The Turn Signal Lever You can use the turn signal lever on the left side of the steering column to: qoperate the headlamps and parking lamps qoperate the turn signals and cornering lamps qturn the high beams on/off qflash the lamps Headlamps and Parking Lamps To turn the parking lamps or headlamps on, twist the knob at the end of the turn signal lever. FIRST STOP — Turning the knob to the first stop (g) will turn on the the license plate lamps, parking lamps, side marker lamps, tail lamps and instrument panel lamps. SECOND STOP — Turning the knob to the second stop (B) will turn on the headlamps, license plate lamps, parking lamps, side marker lamps, tail lamps, and instrument panel lamps. Headlamp control 62
  • 66. Daytime Running Light System (Canadian vehicles only) In Canada, the lights illuminate during daytime operation. The Daytime Running Light system (DRL) automatically illuminates when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position. The daytime running lights are switched off under the following conditions: qwhen the headlamps are switched on qwhen the parking brake is applied qwhen the flash-to-pass system is used 63 WARNING The Daytime Running Light (DRL) system will not illuminate the tail lamps and parking lamps. Turn on your headlamps at dusk. Failure to do so may result in a collision. Raising the Headlamps Manually If the power headlamp door system becomes inoperative, your vehicle has a manual retractor system that allows you to raise the headlamps manually (the headlamps will not turn on). The retractors are located under the hood and behind each headlamp. Remove the cap and turn the knob. Each headlamp must be raised separately. Before using the manual retractors to raise your headlamps, the RETRA fuse must be removed.
  • 67. Open the main fuse panel. Refer to the underhood fuse panel in Servicing Your Probe later in this owner guide. Pull the RETRA (20A) fuse straight out. Inspect the removed fuse. If it is blown, replace it with a new one of the same rating. If it isn’t blown or if a new fuse does not solve the problem, remove it and operate the headlamp manually. 64 WARNING Always remove the RETRA (20A) fuse before manually operating a headlamp retractor or attempting to remove anything from the headlamp. Failure to remove the RETRA fuse could cause injury to a hand or fingers. WARNING When reinstalling the RETRA fuse, make sure nothing is near the headlamp retractor. It may move suddenly while the fuse is being inserted, causing injury to hands and fingers.
  • 68. Manual headlamp retractors located behind the headlamps High Beams and Flashing the Lamps To turn on the high beams, turn the headlamp control knob to the headlamp ON position and push the turn signal lever away from you until it latches. When the high beams are ON, the high beam indicator light on the instrument panel comes on. To turn off the high beams, pull the lever toward you until it latches. The high beam indicator light turns off. 65
  • 69. Flashing the Lights To flash the headlamps, pull the lever toward you for a moment and then release it. The headlamps will flash whether the headlamp knob is in the on or off position. Highbeam and flash-to-pass operation If the headlamps are retracted when you pull the lever toward you, they will pop up and flash. 66
  • 70. Turn Signals Move the lever up to signal a right turn. Move it down to signal a left turn. The corresponding indicator light in the instrument cluster will flash. If the turn signal stays on after you turn, move the lever back to the center (OFF) position. For lane changes, move the lever far enough to signal but not to latch. The lever will return to the off position when you release it. 67 Turn signal
  • 71. Windshield Wipers and Washer To operate the windshield wipers and washers, make sure your ignition key is turned to the ON position. The windshield wipers have two speeds. To operate the wipers, pull down the lever on the right side of your steering column. The first position is LO (Low) and the second position is HI (High). To turn the wipers off, return the lever to the uppermost position. Windshield wiper control ONE-TOUCH WIPER CONTROL (If equipped) — For one wiping cycle, push the lever away from you and release it with the lever in the OFF or interval position. The ignition switch must be in the ON position for this operation. One touch wiper control 68
  • 72. Interval Wipers (If equipped) In addition to two speed wipers, your vehicle may have wipers that you can set to operate at varying intervals. For example, you can set the interval so they wipe less often when it drizzles and more often in heavier rain. Variable interval wiper control To set the interval wipers, pull the lever down to the first position. Turn the ring on the lever to the frequency of wiper operation you desire. Windshield Washer To clean the windshield, pull the wiper lever toward you. Washer fluid sprays until the lever is released. 69 Windshield washer/control
  • 73. If the washer does not work, check the washer fluid level visually and fill if needed. See Servicing Your Probe later in this owner guide. If there is fluid in the reservoir, and your washer doesn’t work, consult your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer. Do not try to clean the windshield when the washer fluid container is empty or activate the washers at any time for more than 15 seconds continuously. This could damage the washer pump system. 70 WARNING Always warm up the windshield with the defroster before you use the washer fluid. In freezing weather, the washer solution may freeze on the windshield and obscure your vision.
  • 74. 71 Tilt Steering Column (If equipped) WARNING Never adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is moving. To change the position of the steering column/wheel, pull the release lever on the column toward you. Tip the steering wheel to the desired position. Release the lever to lock the steering wheel in place. Tilt steering column
  • 75. Speed Control (If equipped) Speed control switches on the steering wheel To Turn Speed Control Off Press OFF, or Turn off the vehicle ignition. Once speed control is switched off, the previously programmed set speed will be erased. To Turn Speed Control On Press ON To Set a Speed Press SET ACC. For speed control to operate, the speed control must be ON and the vehicle speed must be greater than 30 mph (48 km/h). If you drive up or down a steep hill, your vehicle speed may vary slower or faster than the set speed. This is normal. 72
  • 76. Speed control cannot reduce the vehicle speed if it increases above the set speed on a downhill. If your vehicle speed is faster than the set speed while driving on a downhill in j (Overdrive), you may want to shift to the next lower gear to reduce your vehicle’s speed. 73 WARNING To keep your vehicle under control, do not use speed control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, slippery, or unpaved. To Set a Higher Speed Press and hold SET ACC. Release the switch when the desired vehicle speed is reached, or Press and release SET ACC. Each press will increase the set speed by 1 mph (1.6 km/h) (2.0L with automatic transmission only), or Accelerate with your accelerator pedal, then press SET ACC. You may accelerate with the accelerator pedal at any time during speed control usage. Releasing the accelerator pedal will return your vehicle speed to the previously programmed set speed. To Set a Lower Set Speed Press and hold CST. Release the switch when the desired vehicle speed is reached, or Press and release CST. Each press will decrease the set speed by 1 mph (1.6 km/h) (2.0L with automatic transmission only), or Depress the brake pedal. When the desired vehicle speed is reached, press SET ACC.
  • 77. To Disengage Speed Control Depress the brake pedal, or Depress the clutch pedal (if equipped). Disengaging the speed control will not erase the previously programmed set speed. To Return to a Set Speed Press RSM. For RSM to operate, the vehicle speed must be faster than 30 mph (48 km/h). Moon Roof (If equipped) The control switch for the sliding moon roof is on the interior/map lamp control panel located above the windshield and between the sun visors. The ignition must be in the ON position for the moon roof to be operational. To open the sliding moon roof to the vent position, push the recessed part of the moon roof switch until the back of the moon roof tilts into the vent position. You must release the switch after opening the vent before pressing it again to slide the moon roof open. To close, push the other side of the switch until the moon roof sets back into place. 74
  • 78. Sliding moon roof control switch Press the switch until the moon roof is opened to the desired position. When you release the switch, the moon roof will stop sliding open. To close the moon roof, press the other side of the switch and hold it until the roof is closed to the desired position. 75
  • 79. Doors The inside of the door If you close the door with the lock button depressed, the door will remain locked. Power Door Locks (If equipped) If your vehicle has power door locks, the controls to lock the doors are below the inside door handles on each door. When you close the doors after you set the door locks, the doors remain locked. If the power mechanism ever fails, the manual door locks will override the power controls. NOTE: Vehicles equipped with power locks 76 have a safety feature which allows you to unlock one or both front doors from either door key lock cylinder. To unlock the driver’s or passenger door only, insert the key in the door lock cylinder and turn to the left (counterclockwise) to the first position. To unlock the other door at the same time, simply continue turning the key to the left to the second position. Both doors are locked by turning the key to the right (clockwise).
  • 80. Power locks on the driver’s door Windows Using the Power Windows (If equipped) Each door has a power control that opens and closes the window on that door. The driver’s door has a master control panel that operates both windows. To use your power windows, your ignition switch must be placed in the ON position. Press the recessed end of the power window switch to lower a window, press the raised end of the switch to raise a window. NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a “one touch down” feature. This feature allows the driver to fully open the driver’s window by firmly pressing the switch and then releasing. The switch will release when the window has fully opened. 77
  • 81. 78 WARNING Do not let children play with the power windows. Master window control on the driver’s door Mirrors WARNING The right side view mirror makes objects appear smaller and farther away than they actually are.
  • 82. 79 Dual-Electric Remote Control Mirrors (If equipped) Dual-electric remote control mirrors are collapsible. The mirror heads can be folded rearward to prevent damage when using an automatic car wash. To adjust the side mirrors: 1. Locate the control switch in the power control panel on the driver’s door. 2. Select the right or left mirror by moving the selector switch right or left. 3. Push the control switch in the direction you want to move the mirror. 4. Return the selector switch to the middle OFF position to keep the mirror in place. Dual-electric side mirror control switches
  • 83. Console A fully-equipped console on your vehicle will include the following items: qashtray and lighter qparking brake lever qcupholder or storage compartment with cupholder Storage Compartments Your vehicle may have several small storage compartments: qa glove compartment that locks and unlocks using the ignition key qtwo map pockets on the door panels (if equipped) qstorage compartment below the climate controls qa storage bin in the center console 80 WARNING Do not put objects on the ledge between the back seat and the rear window, as they can become dangerous projectiles and injure someone.
  • 84. Center Console Storage (If equipped) To open the center console storage bin, push the button and slide the lid back. When it is back as far as it will go, push the button and lift the lid. Cupholders The cupholders are located inside the center console storage bin. The driver cupholder is integrated in the storage bin. To use the passenger cupholder, rotate it upward then twist the cupholder until it is in a horizontal position. When the passenger cupholder is not in use, twist it back to the vertical position and rotate it into the storage bin. NOTE: Do not place heavy objects in the 81 cupholders. Using the cupholders
  • 85. Hatchback Opening and Closing the Hatchback To open the hatchback from the outside: 1. Put the key into the lock located on the right 82 side, in the tail lamp just above the bumper. 2. Turn the key to the right to unlock. 3. Remove the key before you close the hatchback. NOTE: When the hatch is unlocked the cargo lamp will illuminate. 4. Using both hands, shut the hatchback completely. Do not slam it. 5. Pull up on the hatchback to make sure it is securely latched. To prevent premature wear or damage to the hatchback lift cylinders and attaching hardware, the hatchback must be fully closed before you drive your vehicle. WARNING If you drive with the hatchback lid open, you will draw dangerous exhaust fumes into your vehicle. If you must drive like this, keep the vents open so outside air comes into the vehicle.
  • 86. Using the Remote Control for the Hatchback To release the hatchback from inside the vehicle, simply pull up on the remote release lever, which is located in front of the driver’s seat, near the door. Remote control for the hatchback Using the Luggage Compartment Cover This cover lets you conceal cargo in the luggage compartment. The cover will lift automatically when the hatchback lid is opened. 83 WARNING Do not put objects on the ledge between the back seat and the rear window, as they can become dangerous projectiles and injure someone.
  • 87. To remove the luggage compartment cover: 1. Raise the hatchback to the fully open 84 position. 2. Standing outside the vehicle, unfasten the lift cords from the hatchback lid. 3. Disconnect the two front package tray lift cords from the lower trunk side trim. 4. Lower the cover and slide it rearward to disengage it from the sockets and remove it. The luggage compartment and cover
  • 88. 85 WARNING The cover may cause injury in a sudden stop or accident if it is not securely installed. To install the luggage compartment cover: 1. Raise the hatchback to the fully open position. 2. From outside the vehicle, position the cover in its sockets. 3. Attach the lift cords to the hatchback lid. 4. Connect the two front luggage compartment cover lift cords to the lower trunk side trim. 5. Close the hatchback. WARNING Do not push down on the luggage compartment cover when the lift cords are attached to the open hatchback lid. This could cause the hatchback lid to close unexpectedly. Remote Keyless Entry System (If equipped) Your vehicle may be equipped with a remote keyless entry system. This option will allow you to open your vehicle using a remote transmitter from distances of up to 33 feet (10 meters) away. The remote feature will operate only when the ignition is in the OFF position. The transmitter can unlock the driver’s door, unlock all doors, lock all doors, or activate the vehicle’s horn and hazard warning lamps for the panic alarm feature.
  • 89. By pressing the UNLOCK button on the transmitter once, you can unlock the driver side door. Pressing the UNLOCK button a second time within five seconds of unlocking the driver’s door will unlock the other doors. You can lock all your vehicle doors by pressing the LOCK button. If you press the LOCK button a second time within five (5) seconds, the horn will sound briefly to verify that the doors have been locked. When the PANIC button is pressed, the horn will sound and the hazard warning lamps will flash. This will continue for up to approximately two minutes and 45 seconds unless it is turned off by pressing the PANIC button a second time. The panic mode can also be cancelled by turning the ignition key to ON or ACC. Up to four transmitters can be programmed for your vehicle. Your vehicle comes with two transmitters. Additional transmitters can be ordered from your dealer. Remote keyless entry transmitter 86
  • 90. The remote keyless entry system is equipped with an illuminated entry system. When the system is activated, the dome lamp will illuminate and will stay lit for approximately 25 seconds. The dome lamp will shut off when the doors are closed. Replacing the Batteries The remote entry transmitter is powered by two coin type three-volt lithium 1616 batteries (included) that should last for several years of normal use. If you notice a significant decrease in operating range, the batteries should be replaced. Replacement batteries can be purchased at most pharmacies, watch stores or at your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer. NOTE: The operating range of the remote entry system can also be affected by weather conditions (such as very cold temperatures) or structures around the vehicle (buildings, other vehicles, radio and TV towers, etc.). Typical operating range will allow you to be up to 33 feet (10 meters) away from your vehicle. 87 Opening the remote transmitter
  • 91. The transmitter can be snapped apart to replace the batteries by twisting a thin coin between the two halves of the transmitter. DO NOT TAKE THE FRONT PART OF THE TRANSMITTER APART. Carefully remove the old batteries. When installing the new batteries, be sure to place the positive (+) side down as marked. Snap the two halves back together. Replacement/additional transmitters In the event a transmitter is lost, return the remaining transmitter(s) to your dealer for reprogramming of your remote entry system. This is necessary to prevent unauthorized use of the lost transmitter. Additional transmitters may be purchased from your dealer (remote entry system will work with up to four transmitters). Follow the same programming procedure as above. All transmitters must be programmed (or reprogrammed) at the same time. If the programming mode is entered and the transmitters are not programmed (or reprogrammed) at the same time, they will not operate with the system. 88
  • 92. 89 Seating and Safety Restraints Seats RWARNING Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the vehicle is moving. RWARNING Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips. RWARNING Children should always ride with the seatback in the fully upright position. Head Restraints Head restraints help protect your head and neck in a collision. The head restraints on your vehicle are not adjustable. Manual Seat Adjustments You can move the front seats forward or backward or tilt the back of the seat forward or backward. The driver’s seat also has controls for lumbar support (if equipped) and side bolster support (if equipped).
  • 93. 90
  • 94. 91 To move the seat forward or backward: Manual seat controls for front seats
  • 95. To recline the seatback: 92
  • 96. To gain access to the rear seat on the driver’s or passenger’s side: 93 Seatback release lever for rear seat access The seatback will return to its set reclined position when pushed back. RWARNING Check to see that the seat and seatback are latched securely in position. Keep floor area free of objects that would prevent proper seat engagement. Never attempt to adjust the seat while the vehicle is in motion.
  • 97. To inflate the driver’s seatback lumbar support (if equipped) for lower back support, or to inflate the driver’s seatback side bolster supports (if equipped): 94
  • 98. 95 Six-Way Power Seat Adjustment (if equipped) The six-way power seat control lever is located on the outermost side of the driver’s seat.
  • 99. Your seat cushion power adjust lever is operated by a motor. To avoid damage to the motor, you should avoid operating this feature for an extended period of time. You should also avoid using the six-way power adjust lever continuously with the engine stopped. This could run down the battery. Use the lever to make only one adjustment at a time. Using the Split-Folding Rear Seat Your vehicle is equipped with split-folding rear seats. One or both rear seatbacks can be folded down to provide additional cargo space. NOTE: When folding down the rear seatback, 96 the seat belt tongue should be hanging on the hook of the lower, side trim panel, near the edge of the side of the seat cushion.
  • 100. 97 To lower the rear seatback: To raise the seatback, lift the seatback rearward until it latches. Make sure the seatback is locked in position by pushing it forward and backward. RWARNING Check to see that the seat and seatback are latched securely in position. Keep floor area free of objects that would prevent proper seat engagement. Never attempt to adjust the seat while the vehicle is in motion.
  • 101. 98 RWARNING Cargo should always be secured to prevent it from shifting and causing damage to the vehicle or harm to passengers. RWARNING Do not remove the floor carpet in your vehicle. Emission controls cause high exhaust temperatures under the floor. NOTE: When returning the folding seats to the upright position, remember to return rear shoulder belts to their proper position. NOTE: Your vehicle has stowage hooks on the lower rear side trim panel on which to hook the safety belts when not in use. Simply hook the tongue slot over the stowage hook. Important Safety Belt Information The use of safety belts helps to restrain you and your passengers in case of a collision. In most states and in Canada, the law requires their use. Safety belts provide best restraint when: qthe seatback is upright qthe occupant is sitting upright (not slouched) qthe lap belt is snug and low on the hips qthe shoulder belt is snug against the chest qthe knees are straight forward
  • 102. To help you remember to fasten your safety belt, a warning light may come on and a chime may sound. See Safety Belt Warning Light/Chime in the Instrumentation chapter. See the following sections in this chapter for directions on how to properly use these safety belts. Also see Safety Restraints for Children in this chapter for special instructions about using safety belts for children. 99 RWARNING Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips. RWARNING Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific safety belt assembly which is made up of one buckle and one tongue that are designed to be used as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt on the outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm. 2) Never swing it around your neck over the inside shoulder. 3) Never use a single belt for more than one person. RWARNING Ford recommends that all safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware should be inspected by a qualified technician after any collision. Safety belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted.
  • 103. 100 RWARNING Children should always ride with the seatback in the fully upright position. RWARNING Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a collision. RWARNING Lock the doors of your vehicle before driving to lessen the risk of the door coming open in a collision. Combination Lap and Shoulder Belts While your vehicle is in motion, the combination lap and shoulder belt adjusts to your movement. However, if you brake hard, turn hard, or if your vehicle receives an impact of 5 mph (8 km/h) or more, the lap/shoulder belt locks and helps reduce your forward movement. After you get into your vehicle, close the door and lock it. Then adjust the driver or passenger seat to the position that suits you best. Pull the combination lap/shoulder belt from the retractor so that the shoulder portion of the belt crosses your shoulder and chest. Be sure the belt is not twisted. If it is, remove the twist. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle until you hear a snap and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened to the buckle by pulling on tongue.
  • 104. Fastening the front seat combination lap and shoulder belt NOTE: Be sure to read and understand 101 Important Safety Belt Information in this chapter. Unfastening the combination lap and shoulder belt — front and rear seating positions While the belt retracts, guide the tongue to its original position to prevent it from striking you or the vehicle.
  • 105. Lap/Shoulder Belt Retractors (Dual Locking Modes) Your vehicle is equipped with a dual locking mode retractor on the shoulder belt portion of the combination lap/shoulder safety belt for passengers. Dual locking mode retractors operate in two ways: Vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode In this operating mode, the shoulder belt retractor will allow the occupant freedom of movement, locking tight only on hard braking, hard cornering or impacts of approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) or more. The retractor can also be made to lock by pulling the belt out quickly. Automatic locking mode In this operating mode, the shoulder belt retractor will be automatically locked and will remain locked when the combination lap/shoulder safety belt is buckled, and does not allow the occupant freedom of movement. This mode provides the following: qA tight lap/shoulder belt on the occupant. qChild safety seat installation. 102 RWARNING Rear-facing child seats or infant carriers should never be placed in the front seats.
  • 106. This mode must be used when installing a child seat. To switch the retractor from the emergency locking mode to the automatic locking mode, perform the following steps: 1. Buckle the lap/shoulder combination belt. 2. Pull on the belt until all of the stored belt is 103 out of the retractor and a click is heard. 3. A clicking sound will continue to be heard as the belt is allowed to retract. This indicates that the retractor is in the automatic locking mode. NOTE: When the combination lap/shoulder belt is unbuckled and allowed to retract completely, the retractor will switch to the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode. See the detailed instructions under Safety Seats for Children in this chapter. Safety Belt Extension Assembly A safety belt that is too short even when fully extended can be lengthened. You can add about eight inches (20 cm) to the belt length with a safety belt extension assembly. Safety belt extensions are available at no cost from your dealer. Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety belt. Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on the label. Also, use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too short for you when fully extended. Do not use extension to change the fit of the shoulder belt across the torso.
  • 107. 104 RWARNING Failure to follow these instructions will affect the performance of the safety belts and increase the risk of personal injury. Safety Belt Maintenance Check the safety belt systems periodically to make sure that they work properly and are not damaged. All safety belt assemblies, including retractors, buckles, front seat belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped), shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped), child safety seat tether bracket assemblies (if equipped), and attaching hardware, should be inspected after any collision. Ford recommends that all safety belt assemblies used in vehicles involved in a collision be replaced. However, if the collision was minor and a qualified technician finds that the belts do not show damage and continue to operate properly, they do not need to be replaced. Safety belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. Air Bag Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Important Air Bag Precautions Your vehicle is equipped with a supplemental restraint system designed to work with the safety belts to help protect you and your right front seat passenger in the event of a collision. The Air Bag Supplemental Restraint System is primarily designed to reduce certain upper body injuries.
  • 108. 105 RWARNING All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should always wear their safety belts, failure to do so may increase the risk of personal injury in the event of a collision. RWARNING Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near the air bag covers that may come into contact with an inflating air bag. Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of personal injury in the event of a collision. RWARNING Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the air bag Supplemental Restraint System or its fuses. See your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer. RWARNING If you are close to an inflating air bag, it could seriously injure you. Position your seat such that it is as far back from the steering wheel as possible but still allows you to properly control the vehicle.
  • 109. Children and Air Bags NOTE: For additional important safety 106 information on the proper use of seat belts, child seats, and infant seats, please read the entire Safety Restraints chapter in this owner guide. RWARNING Children should always wear their safety belts. Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of personal injury in the event of a collision. RWARNING Rear-facing child seats or infant carriers should never be placed in the front seats. How Does the Air Bag Supplemental Restraint System Work? The Air Bag Supplemental Restraint System is designed to activate when the vehicle is in a collision similar to hitting a fixed barrier head on at 8-14 mph. The fact that the air bags did not inflate in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with the system. Rather, it means the forces were not of the type sufficient to cause activation.
  • 110. If the vehicle is in a moderate or severe frontal collision, the system is activated and the air bags inflate rapidly. After the air bag inflates, it will quickly deflate. After the air bag deployment, you may notice a smoke-like, powdery residue or smell the burnt propellant. This is normal. The residue may consist of cornstarch or talcum powder (which is used to lubricate the air bag) or sodium compounds, such as sodium carbonates (e.g. baking soda) that result from the combustion process that inflates the air bag. Small amounts of sodium hydroxide may be present which may irritate the skin and eyes, but none of the residue is toxic. The Air Bag Supplemental Restraint System will reduce, but not eliminate all injuries in an accident. 107
  • 111. 108 RWARNING Several air bag system components get hot after inflation. Do not try to touch them after inflation. RWARNING The air bag will inflate only once. The system is designed to function on a one-time-only basis. If the air bag is inflated, THE AIR BAG WILL NOT FUNCTION AGAIN AND MUST BE REPLACED IMMEDIATELY. If the air bag is not replaced, this will increase the risk of injury in a subsequent collision. The Air Bag Supplemental Restraint System consists of: qdriver and passenger air bag modules (which include the inflators and air bags), qone or more impact and safing sensors, qa system diagnostic module, qa readiness light and tone, qand the electrical wiring which connects the components. The diagnostic module monitors its own circuits, the air bag electrical system, the air bag readiness light, the air bag power and the air bag inflators.
  • 112. 109 Inflated driver-side air bag Inflated passenger-side air bag
  • 113. Determining if System Is Operational The Air Bag Supplemental Restraint System uses a readiness light and a tone to indicate the condition of the system. The readiness light is in the instrument cluster. When you turn the ignition key to ON, this light will illuminate for approximately six (6) seconds and then turn off. This indicates that the system is operating normally. NOTE: Routine maintenance of the air bag system is not required. A problem with the system is indicated by one or more of the following: qthe readiness light will either flash or stay lit, qthe readiness light will not light immediately after ignition is turned on, qa group of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat periodically until the problem and light are repaired. If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the Air Bag Supplemental Restraint System serviced at your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a collision. Disposal of Air Bags and Air Bag Equipped Vehicles For disposal of air bags or air bag equipped vehicles, see your local Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer. Air bags MUST BE disposed of by qualified personnel. 110
  • 114. Safety Restraints for Children In the U.S. and Canada, you are required by law to use safety restraints for children. If small children ride in your vehicle — this generally includes children who are four years old or younger and who weigh 40 pounds (18 kg) or less — you must put them in safety seats that are made specially for children. Safety belts alone do not provide maximum protection for these children. Check your local and state laws for specific requirements. 111 RWARNING Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a collision. RWARNING To prevent the risk of injury, make sure children sit where they can be properly restrained. RWARNING It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly.
  • 115. When possible, put children in the rear seat of your vehicle. Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. 112 RWARNING Failure to follow all instructions on the proper use of child seats or the vehicle restraint systems can result in serious injury or death in the event of a sudden stop or collision. RWARNING Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions included with the safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install and use the safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden stop or collision. RWARNING Safety belts and seats can become hot in a vehicle that has been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn a small child. Check seat covers and buckles before you place a child anywhere near them. RWARNING Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets unattended in your vehicle.
  • 116. Safety Seats for Children Use a safety belt that is recommended for the size and weight of the child. Always follow the safety seat manufacturer’s instructions when installing and using the safety seat. Ford recommends the use of a child safety seat having a top tether strap. Install the child safety seat in a seating position which is capable of providing a tether anchorage. For more information on top tether straps see Attaching Safety Seats With Tether Straps in this chapter. When installing a child safety seat, be sure to use the correct safety belt buckle for that seating position, and make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the buckle. For a shoulder/lap belt combination with a sliding tongue, make sure the retractor is in the automatic locking mode. 113 RWARNING When using forward-facing child seats move the passenger seat as far back from the instrument panel as possible. Never secure rear-facing child seats or infant carriers in the front seat. The force of the rapidly inflating passenger air bag could push the top of the rear-facing seat against the vehicle seatback, armrests or console. Rear-facing infant seats must always be secured in the rear seat. All child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or by the lap portion of a lap-shoulder belt.
  • 117. 114 RWARNING If you do not properly secure the safety seat, the child occupying the seat may be injured during a collision or sudden stop. An unsecured safety seat could also injure other passengers. RWARNING Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions included with the safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install and use the safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden stop or collision. Installing Child Safety Seats Your vehicle is equipped with a dual locking mode retractor on the shoulder belt portion of the front passenger seat and both rear seats. The automatic locking mode must be used when installing a child seat or infant carrier in the front passenger seat or rear seats. RWARNING Rear-facing child seats or infant carriers should never be placed in the front seats.
  • 118. If you choose to install a child safety seat in the front seat, move the seat as far back as possible. 1. Position the child seat or infant carrier on 115 the passenger seat of the vehicle. 2. Pull down on the shoulder belt, then grasp the shoulder belt and lap belt together. Grasping lap and shoulder belt together
  • 119. 3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt 116 portions together, route the tongue through the child seat according to the child seat manufacturer’s instructions. Be sure the belt webbing is not twisted. Routing safety belt through child seat or infant carrier
  • 121. 4. Grasp the shoulder portion of the belt and 118 pull downward until all of the belt is extracted and a click is heard. At this time, the retractor is in the automatic locking mode (child seat restraint mode). Setting the retractor to automatic locking mode
  • 122. 119 5. Allow the belt to retract. Pull up on the shoulder webbing. A clicking sound will be heard as the belt retracts. This indicates that the retractor is in the automatic locking mode. Push down on the child seat while you pull up on the belt webbbing to remove any slack in the belt. Removing slack from belt
  • 123. 6. Before placing the child in the child seat or 120 infant carrier, forcibly tilt the seat from side to side, and tug it forward to make sure that the seat is securely held in place. Checking that the seat is secure
  • 124. 121 7. Double check that the retractor is in the automatic locking mode. Try to pull more belt out of the retractor. If you cannot, the belt is in the automatic locking mode. Checking the retractor 8. Check to make sure that the child seat or infant carrier is properly secured prior to each use. If the belt is not locked, repeat steps 4 through 7. NOTE: To remove the retractor from automatic lock mode, allow seat belt retract fully to its stowed position and the retractor will automatically switch back to the vehicle sensitive locking mode for normal adult usage.
  • 125. 122 RWARNING Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions included with the safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install and use the safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden stop or collision. Attaching Safety Seats With Tether Straps Some manufacturers make safety seats that include a tether strap that goes over the back of the vehicle seat and attaches to an anchoring point. Other manufacturers offer the tether strap as an accessory. Contact the manufacturer of your child safety seat for information about ordering a tether strap. Front Seats To install a tether from a child safety seat in the front seat: 1. Buckle the lap/shoulder belt (in the seat directly behind the front passenger seat in which the child safety seat will be installed). 2. Pull all the stored belt out of the rear seat retractor to switch the retractor to automatic locking mode. 3. Let the retractor wind up the slack from the lap/shoulder belt. A clicking sound should be heard as the belt retracts, indicating that the retractor is in automatic locking mode. 4. Install the child safety seat in the front seat. Refer to the previous section on Installing Safety Seats. Hook the tether strap hook around the webbing near the center of the shoulder portion of the locked lap/shoulder belt. 5. Tighten the tether strap.
  • 126. Rear Seats If you use a tethered safety seat on one of the rear seats, install a tether anchor bracket to one of the two 0.3 inch (8 mm) weld nuts on the rear of the cargo area below the opening for the liftgate. Tether Anchorage Hardware Tether anchor hardware kits can be obtained at no charge from any Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer. Be sure to follow the child safety seat manufacturer’s instructions. 123 RWARNING Tighten the anchor according to specifications. Otherwise, the safety seat may not be properly secured and the child may be injured in a sudden stop or collision. Installing the Anchor Bracket 1. Open the liftgate and take out the luggage compartment cover (if equipped). 2. The anchorage nuts used to secure the tether anchor are located in the rear body panel behind the trim at the rear of the luggage compartment. Remove the trim panel. The backside of the panel is scored at the locations of the anchorage nuts. Make a hole the size of the scoring in the trim panel to provide access to the anchor nut. The hole should be made on the same side of the vehicle as the child safety seat will be located. Reinstall the trim panel.
  • 127. 3. Install the hardware for anchoring the tether 124 following the instructions in the tether anchorage hardware kit. 4. Re-install luggage compartment cover. Installing the anchor bracket
  • 128. 125 Starting Fuel-Injected Engines When starting a fuel-injected engine, the most important thing to remember is to avoid pressing down on the accelerator before or during starting. Only use the accelerator when you have problems getting your vehicle started. See Starting Your Engine in this chapter for details about when to use the accelerator while you start your vehicle. Starting Your Vehicle Preparing to Start Your Vehicle RWARNING Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in other enclosed areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open the garage door before you start the engine. Before you start your vehicle, do the following: 1. Make sure all occupants in the vehicle buckle their safety belts. See Safety Restraints in the Index for more details. 2. Make sure the headlamps and other accessories are turned off when starting.
  • 129. 3. If you have an automatic transaxle, make 126 sure that the gearshift is in P (Park) and the parking brake is set before you turn the key. If you have a manual transaxle, make sure that the parking brake is fully set, push the clutch pedal to the floor, and put the gearshift into Neutral before you turn the key. (Remember, the starter will operate only if the clutch pedal is pushed all the way to the floor.) Testing the Warning Lights Before you start your vehicle, you should test the warning lights on the instrument panel to make sure that they work. Refer to the Instrumentation chapter. Starting Your Engine To start your engine: 1. Follow the steps under Preparing to Start Your Vehicle at the beginning of this section. 2. Keep your foot on the brake pedal and turn the ignition key to the ON position. 3. DO NOT depress the accelerator pedal when starting your engine. DO NOT use the accelerator while the vehicle is parked. 4. Turn the key to the START position (cranking) until the engine starts. Allow the key to return to the ON position after the engine has started. If you have difficulty in turning the key, rotate the steering wheel slightly because it may be binding.
  • 130. 127 For a cold engine: qAt temperatures 10°F (-12°C) and below: If the engine does not start in fifteen (15) seconds on the first try, turn the key to OFF, wait approximately ten (10) seconds so you do not flood the engine, then try again. qAt temperatures above 10°F (-12°C): If the engine does not start in five (5) seconds on the first try, turn the key to OFF, wait approximately ten (10) seconds so you do not flood the engine, then try again. For a warm engine: qDo not hold the key in the START position for more than five (5) seconds at a time. If the engine does not start within five (5) seconds on the first try, turn the key to the OFF position. Wait a few seconds after the starter stops, then try again. Whenever you start your vehicle, release the key as soon as the engine starts. Excessive cranking could damage the starter. After you start the engine, let it idle for a few seconds. Keep your foot on the brake pedal and put the gearshift lever in gear. Release the parking brake. Slowly release the brake pedal and drive away in the normal manner. NOTE: Automatic transaxle equipped vehicles have an interlock that prevents you from shifting out of P (Park) unless your foot is on the brake pedal.
  • 131. If the engine does not start after two attempts: 1. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position. 2. Press the accelerator all the way to the floor 128 and hold it. 3. Turn the ignition key to the START position. 4. Release the ignition key when the engine starts. 5. Release the accelerator gradually as the engine speeds up. If the engine still does not start, the fuel pump shut-off switch may have been activated. For directions on how to reset the switch see Fuel Pump Shut-Off Switch in the index. A computer system controls the engine’s idle speed. When you start your vehicle, the engine’s idle speed normally runs high. These faster engine speeds will make your vehicle coast slightly faster than its normal idle speed. It should, however, slow down after a short time. If it does not, have the idle speed checked. If the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically, do not allow your vehicle to idle for more than 10 minutes. Have the vehicle checked. RWARNING Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce very high temperatures in the engine and exhaust system, creating the risk of fire or other damage.
  • 132. 129 RWARNING Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire. Engine Block Heater (If equipped) Engine block heaters are strongly recommended if you live in a region where temperatures reach -10°F (-23°C) or below. An engine block heater warms the engine coolant, which improves starting, warms up the engine faster, and allows the heater-defrost system to respond quickly. To turn the heater on, simply plug it into a grounded 110-volt outlet. Ford recommends that you use a 110-volt circuit that is protected by a ground fault circuit interrupter. RWARNING To prevent electrical shock, do not use your heater with ungrounded electrical systems or two-pronged (cheater) adapters. For best results, plug the heater in at least three hours before you start your vehicle. Using the heater for longer than three hours will not damage the engine, so you can plug it in at night to start your vehicle the following morning.
  • 133. If the Engine Cranks but Does Not Start or Does Not Start After a Collision The Fuel Pump Shut-off Switch If the engine cranks but does not start or does not start even after a small collision, the fuel pump shut-off switch may have been activated. The shut-off switch is a device intended to stop the fuel pump when your vehicle has been involved in a substantial jolt. Refer to Roadside Emergencies for more information. Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes Carbon monoxide, although colorless and odorless, is present in exhaust fumes. Take precautions to avoid its dangerous effects. 130 RWARNING Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in other enclosed areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open the garage door before you start the engine. RWARNING If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes.
  • 134. Have the exhaust and body ventilation systems checked whenever: qyour vehicle is raised for service qthe sound of the exhaust system changes qyour vehicle has been damaged in a collision Improve your ventilation by keeping all air inlet vents clear of snow, leaves, and other debris. If the engine is idling while you are stopped in an open area for long periods of time, open the windows at least one inch (2.5 cm). Also, adjust the heating or air conditioning system to bring in outside air. qIf you are using the heater, set the fan speed on MEDIUM or HIGH with the function selector control on VENT. qIf you want to use the air conditioner, set the function selector control in the NORM A/C position which brings in fresh air. 131
  • 135. Removing the Key From the Ignition 1. Put the gearshift selector lever in P (Park) 132 (automatic transaxle) or 1 (First) (manual transaxle). 2. Set the parking brake fully. 3. For a manual transaxle: Push in on the lock cylinder and turn the key from ACC to LOCK. For an automatic transaxle: Turn the key to LOCK. 4. Remove the key. If the driver or passenger door is open while the key is still in the ignition, a warning chime sounds. RWARNING Always set the parking brake fully and make sure that the gearshift is securely latched in P (Park) (automatic transaxle) or in 1 (First) (manual transaxle). RWARNING Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets unattended in your vehicle.
  • 136. 133 Driving Brakes Applying the Brakes Your vehicle may have four-wheel power anti-lock disc brakes which adjust automatically through everyday use. Some models have power front disc brakes and rear drum brakes which automatically adjust as the brake pads and linings wear down. If your vehicle does not have anti-lock brakes, apply the brake pedal gradually. Use the “squeeze” technique — push on the brake pedal with a steadily increasing force. This allows the wheels to continue to roll while you are slowing down, which lets you steer properly. If your vehicle does not have anti-lock brakes, extreme braking can make the wheels lock and slide, causing you to lose control of the steering. If the wheels lock, release the brake pedal and repeat the “squeeze” technique. Do not drive with your foot resting on the brake pedal; you will wear out the linings and increase your vehicle’s stopping distance. Brake rotor damage may also eventually occur. NOTE: If you are driving down a long or steep hill, shift to a lower gear and do not apply your brakes continuously. If you apply your brakes continuously, they may overheat and become less effective.
  • 137. Occasional brake noise is normal and often does not indicate a performance concern with the vehicle’s brake system. In normal operation, automotive brake systems may emit occasional or intermittent squeal or groan noises when the brakes are applied. Such noises are usually heard during the first few brake applications in the morning; however they may be heard at any time while braking and can be aggravated by environmental conditions such as cold, heat, moisture, road dust, salt or mud. If a "metal-to-metal" or "continuous grinding" sound is present while braking, the brake linings may be worn-out and should be inspected by a qualified service technician. Anti-lock Brake System (If equipped) If your vehicle is equipped with the anti-lock brake system (ABS), the wheels will not lock and slide when you press down hard on the brake pedal. The ABS automatically starts releasing and reapplying the front brakes independently and the rear brakes together whenever your vehicle’s wheels start to lock. When this happens, you will feel the brake pedal pulsate. This is an indication that the ABS is working correctly and is normal. If the brake pedal is applied while the vehicle is driven over uneven road surfaces, the ABS may cycle and the driver may sense a pulsation in the brake pedal, accompanied by a slight up and down movement of the pedal height and a clicking sound. This may also happen when driving on an inclined surface such as a driveway while making a sharp turn. This is a normal condition. Each time you turn the ignition key to the ON position, the ABS will function through one test cycle. When this happens, the ABS light will illuminate for up to five seconds. If the light illuminates longer than five seconds, shut off the 134
  • 138. engine and restart. If it remains illuminated, it means the ABS is disabled and should be serviced immediately to restore the benefits of the anti-lock feature. Normal braking is not affected unless the red BRAKE system warning light is also illuminated. ABS has self-check capabilities. As described above, the system turns on the ABS light each time you start your engine. After the engine is started and the ABS light turns off, the system performs another test the first time the vehicle reaches 4-9 mph (6-15 km/h). The system turns on the ABS pump motor for approximately 1/2 second. At this time, a mechanical noise may be heard. This is a normal part of the self-check feature. If a malfunction is found during this check the ABS light will come on. On vehicles equipped with an antilock braking system (ABS), a noise from the hydraulic pump motor and pulsation in the pedal may be observed during ABS braking events. Pedal pulsation coupled with noise while braking under panic conditions or on loose gravel, wet or snowy roads is normal and indicated proper functioning of the vehicle’s antilock brake system. If the vehicle has continuous vibration or shudder while braking, mainly in the steering wheel, the vehicle most likely needs service. Ford Motor Company has not found any detrimental effects of popular mobile radio transmitting equipment installed on vehicles equipped with the Anti-lock Brake System if normal radio installation practices are rigidly followed. However, if after installing mobile radio transmitting equipment, the Anti-lock Brake System light comes on at any time other than immediately after turning the key to the 135
  • 139. ON position, or during a sudden stop, have your mobile radio dealer inspect the radio installation. Proper radio installation procedures to be followed are published by the radio manufacturer. Parking Brake The parking brake should be used whenever you park your vehicle. If the brakes don’t operate while the vehicle is in motion, you can make an emergency stop with the parking brake, however, the stopping distance will be much greater than normal. The parking brake lever is located between the front seats. To set the parking brake, put your foot on the brake pedal while pulling the parking brake handle fully and firmly upward. Parking brake (handbrake) 136
  • 140. 137 R WARNING To prevent personal injury, do not release the parking brake while outside the vehicle. R WARNING Always set the parking brake fully and make sure that the gearshift is securely latched in P (Park) (automatic transaxle) or in 1 (First) (manual transaxle). Always check the Brake Warning Light each time you start your engine. Driving with the parking brake on will cause the brakes to wear out quickly and will reduce the fuel economy. R WARNING If the parking brake is fully released, but the Brake System light remains on, have the brakes checked immediately. They may not be working properly. The parking brake is not designed to stop a moving vehicle, but you can use the parking brake to stop your vehicle in an emergency if the normal brakes fail. However, since the parking brake applies only the rear brakes, the stopping distance will increase greatly and the handling of your vehicle will be adversely affected. Steering Your Vehicle Your vehicle is equipped with power steering. Power steering uses energy from the engine to help steer your vehicle. If the amount of effort needed to steer your vehicle changes at a constant vehicle speed, have the power steering system checked. If the power
  • 141. steering system breaks down (or if the engine is turned off), you can steer the vehicle manually but it takes more effort. Never hold the steering wheel to the extreme right or left for more than five seconds if the engine is running. This can damage the power steering pump. Procedures for driving your vehicle will vary depending on which type of transaxle your vehicle has. You may be familiar with the term “transmission.” We use transaxle because it is a more accurate term for vehicles that have front-wheel drive. Your vehicle has one of two types of transaxles: qa manual five-speed overdrive qan automatic four-speed overdrive Driving with an Automatic Overdrive Transaxle Putting Your Vehicle in Gear The automatic transaxle on your vehicle is an electrically controlled four speed. The highest gear is Overdrive. The Overdrive position is reflected by D in the shift selector indicator. The automatic transaxle uses the conventional selector lever, and an Overdrive OFF button. All normal driving is done with the selector in the D position. 138
  • 142. Automatic shift lever Your automatic transaxle vehicle has a console-mounted shift selector lever. You must step on the brake pedal, start the engine, and then push in the thumb button to move the shift selector lever to the position you choose. 139
  • 143. 140 R WARNING Hold the brake pedal down while you move the gearshift lever from position to position. If you do not hold the brake pedal down, your vehicle may move unexpectedly and injure someone. Shift-lock System (If equipped) For your safety, the automatic transaxle has a shift-lock system, which prevents shifting the transaxle out of the P (Park) position without depressing the brake pedal when the ignition key is in the ON position. To shift the transaxle out of the P (Park) position: 1. Depress and hold the brake pedal. 2. Start the engine. 3. Push in the thumb button and move the shift selector lever. 4. See Shift Lock Emergency Override in this section for more information.
  • 144. Automatic console-mounted gearshift lever NOTE: When the ignition key is in the ACC or LOCK position, the transaxle cannot be shifted from the P (Park) position. If the brake pedal is repeatedly depressed and released when the ignition is in the ON position and the selector lever is in the P (Park) position, a chattering near the gearshift lever may be heard. This is not a malfunction. 141
  • 145. NOTE: Your vehicle’s gearshift lever is 142 securely latched in P (Park) if you cannot move it without pushing in the thumb button. Keep the brake pedal depressed while moving your gearshift lever. To make the system more effective, the ignition key cannot be removed unless the gearshift selector lever is in the P (Park) position. Shift lock emergency override If the gearshift selector lever should fail to move from the P (Park) position with the brake pedal depressed, continue depressing the brake pedal. 1. Remove the shift lock override cover with a screwdriver. 2. Insert the screwdriver into the shift lock override opening and push the screwdriver down. 3. Push and hold the thumb button. 4. Move the shift selector lever. If you need to shift out of P (Park) by using the alternate procedure described above, it is possible that a fuse has blown and that your brakelamps may also not be functional. Please refer to the chapter titled Roadside Emergencies in this Owner Guide for instructions on checking and replacing fuses. R WARNING DO NOT DRIVE YOUR VEHICLE UNTIL YOU VERIFY THAT THE BRAKELAMPS ARE WORKING.
  • 146. Once the gearshift is secure in the desired position, release the brake pedal and use the accelerator as necessary. Driving When to use Overdrive (D with Overdrive activated) Overdrive is the usual driving position for an automatic overdrive transaxle. It works the same way Drive (Overdrive OFF) works, automatically upshifting or downshifting as the vehicle speeds or slows. However, Overdrive also shifts into a fourth gear —an overdrive gear — when your vehicle cruises at a consistent speed for any length of time. This fourth gear will increase your fuel economy when you travel at cruising speeds. Cancelling Overdrive Overdrive may not be appropriate for certain terrain. If the transaxle shifts back and forth between third and fourth gears while you are driving on hilly roads, select Drive (Overdrive OFF) by cancelling Overdrive as outlined below. The Overdrive Off (O/D OFF) button is located on the gearshift. The Overdrive Off (O/D OFF) light is located in the instrument cluster. The O/D OFF light is not illuminated during normal vehicle operation. This allows the transaxle to upshift and downshift from 1st through 4th gears. When the O/D OFF button is pressed, Overdrive is cancelled and the O/D OFF light in the instrument cluster illuminates. When the O/D OFF light is illuminated, the transaxle will upshift and downshift from 1st through 3rd gears. 143
  • 147. Overdrive OFF indicator light To return the transaxle to normal operation (1st through 4th gears) press the O/D OFF button again. The O/D OFF button may be used to cancel Overdrive any time the vehicle is being driven. Each time your vehicle is started, the Overdrive system will automatically be in the normal “overdrive on” mode and the light will not be illuminated. If the light does not illuminate when the O/D OFF button is pressed, or if the light flashes when you are driving, have your vehicle serviced at the first opportunity. If this condition persists, damage could occur to the transaxle. When to use Drive (D with Overdrive OFF) In Drive (Overdrive OFF), your vehicle automatically upshifts or downshifts from 1st through 4th gears as the vehicle speeds up or slows down. It also downshifts when you need extra acceleration to pass or when driving up a hill. Selecting Drive (Overdrive OFF) will eliminate the transaxle’s tendency to “hunt” between third and fourth gears while driving over hilly terrain. It also gives your vehicle more engine braking to slow your vehicle than Overdrive does. 144
  • 148. When to use 2 (Second) Use Second (2) to help drive up moderately steep hills or when starting on slick surfaces. It prevents the transaxle from frequently shifting up and down. It also gives more engine braking than Overdrive or Drive when going down hills. Do not go faster than 64 mph (102 km/h) with the gearshift in the Second (2) position. If you shift from Overdrive or Drive to Second because of hilly terrain, your transaxle will automatically downshift in the proper sequence. When to use 1 (First) When your vehicle is in First (1), it gives more engine braking to slow your car than Drive (D with Overdrive OFF) on downgrades. Do not go faster than 32 mph (50 km/h) in this gear. You can upshift from First (1) into D Position at any speed. If you shift from Overdrive or Drive to First (1) because of hilly terrain, your transaxle will automatically downshift in the proper sequence. Reverse In the Reverse (R) position, the vehicle moves only backward. Your vehicle must be stopped before shifting into Reverse (R). Neutral In Neutral (N), the wheels of the transaxle are not locked. Your vehicle will roll freely, even on the slightest incline, unless the parking brake or brakes are on. 145
  • 149. Parking Always come to a complete stop before you shift into P (Park). Make sure that the shift selector lever is securely latched in P (Park). This locks the transaxle and prevents the front wheels from rotating. 146 R WARNING Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn off the ignition whenever you leave your vehicle. R WARNING Never leave your vehicle unattended while it is running. You can tell the gearshift is securely latched when the thumb button has popped out. In this position the gearshift selector lever cannot be moved unless the button is pushed in. R WARNING Hold the brake pedal down while you move the gearshift lever from position to position. If you do not hold the brake pedal down, your vehicle may move unexpectedly and injure someone.
  • 150. Driving with a Manual Transaxle Using the Clutch After the engine starts, allow it to idle for a few seconds. Then, hold your right foot on the brake pedal, push the clutch pedal to the floor with your left foot, and move the shift selector lever into 1 (First) or R (Reverse). To move the vehicle, lift your right foot off the brake pedal and slowly release the clutch pedal. (You need to press down slowly on the accelerator at the same time you release the clutch pedal.) Do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal and do not use the clutch to hold your vehicle at a standstill while waiting on a hill. These actions will seriously reduce clutch life. Driving with your foot resting on the clutch may cause the vehicle to jerk sharply when pressing or removing your other foot from the accelerator. 147
  • 151. Shifting the Gears The gearshift for a manual transaxle is mounted on the floor. The gearshift can be in one of seven possible positions, as shown. Shift pattern Always push the clutch pedal all the way in when you shift. You should upshift according to the speeds given in the chart later in this chapter. Sometimes, you will upshift at higher speeds. For example, you may want to stay in a lower gear to gain more power for passing or for climbing a hill. However, you must stay within the range when you upshift or downshift. 148
  • 152. Backing up To shift into R (Reverse): 1. Bring your vehicle to a complete stop. 2. Push the clutch pedal in all the way to the floor and hold it. If you do not hold the clutch pedal in all the way, you may hear a grinding noise when you shift. 3. Put the gearshift in Neutral and wait at least 3 seconds before shifting into R (Reverse) to prevent a grinding noise. Do not release the clutch. 149 4. Then push the gearshift all the way to the right and pull it down into R (Reverse). When in 5 (Fifth) gear, you can engage R (Reverse) only by moving the gearshift to Neutral before you shift into R (Reverse). This is a special lockout feature that protects you from accidentally shifting into R (Reverse) when you downshift from 5 (Fifth) gear. 5. Once R (Reverse) is engaged, slowly release the clutch pedal from the floor. If R (Reverse) is not engaged, continue to push the clutch pedal in while you put the gearshift back into Neutral. Then, release the clutch pedal for a moment and repeat steps 2 through 5.
  • 153. Upshifting For normal acceleration, you should upshift at the following speeds: For cruising, you should upshift at the following speeds. Downshifting When you slow down or climb a steep hill, always downshift before the engine starts to lose power. Downshifting reduces the chance of stalling and gives your vehicle better acceleration to increase speed again. When you drive down steep hills, downshifting helps you keep a safe speed and helps prevent unnecessary wear on the brakes. When you come to a stop, do not downshift through each gear. Disengage the clutch and use the brake as necessary. Downshifting through the gears decreases your vehicle’s fuel economy. 150
  • 154. Parking To park your vehicle, shift into 1 (First), set the parking brake fully, and turn off the ignition. 151 WARNING Do not park your vehicle in Neutral, it may move unexpectedly and injure someone. Use 1 (First) gear and set the parking brake fully. Driving With a Heavy Load There are limits to the amount of weight your vehicle can carry. The total weight of your vehicle, plus the weight of the passengers and cargo, should never be more than the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). Also, the weight that your vehicle carries over each axle should never be more than the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the respective axle. You can find your vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR on the Safety Compliance Certification Label on the left door lock pillar. The weight limits of your vehicle’s tires affect the GVWR or GAWR limitations. Usage of replacement tires with higher weight limits than originals does not increase GVWR or GAWR. Usage of lower capacity replacement tires may lower GVWR and GAWR limitations. WARNING Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the Safety Compliance Certification Label.
  • 155. Limiting Your Vehicle’s Load The load you add to your vehicle must not exceed the maximum load stated on the tire information decal. To figure the weight of your vehicle’s load, add the weights of: qthe driver and passengers qluggage and any other items that you put in your vehicle qthe weight of any equipment that has been added to your vehicle since it was delivered to your dealer If you do not know the actual weights of these items, use the following procedure to figure the weight of a load: 1. Weigh your vehicle without the driver, 152 passengers and luggage. You might take your vehicle to a shipping company or an inspection station for trucks. 2. Then weigh your vehicle with the driver, passengers and luggage. 3. Subtract the first reading from the second to figure the total weight of the load.
  • 156. After determining this load, you must also make sure that the total weight of your vehicle, plus the load it carries, is less than its GVWR. Also, make sure that the weight your vehicle carries over each axle is less than the GAWR for the respective axle. If your vehicle exceeds the GVWR, remove cargo from your vehicle accordingly. If your vehicle exceeds the GAWR for either axle, shift the load or remove cargo accordingly. 153 WARNING Improper distribution of your vehicle’s load or carrying weight in excess of the amount shown on the tire decal can cause rapid tire wear or loss of vehicle control. Towing a Trailer Do not use your vehicle for towing a trailer. Towing Behind Another Vehicle — Recreational Vehicle Towing an automatic transaxle (ATX) equipped vehicle behind another vehicle, such as a Recreational Vehicle (RV), is not recommended unless a front wheel dolly or trailer is used. Do not tow your ATX equipped vehicle with the front wheels on the ground or transaxle damage may occur.
  • 157. Towing a manual transaxle (MTX) equipped vehicle behind another vehicle, such as a Recreational Vehicle (RV), is allowed only if it is towed forward. The parking brake must be released, the gearshift must be in Neutral, the ignition key must be in the ACC position, the battery must be disconnected to eliminate battery drain, and the steering wheel unlocked. You may tow your MTX equipped vehicle only in a forward direction with the front wheels on the ground without damage to the transaxle. Do not tow your manual transaxle equipped vehicle at a speed faster than 55 mph (88 km/h). The maximum towing distance is unlimited. 154 WARNING Never use a tow bar that attaches to the bumper when you tow your vehicle. This could damage the bumper and cause an accident.
  • 158. 155 Roadside Emergencies Hazard Flasher To alert other drivers to hazardous situations, press the hazard flasher switch on the top of the steering column. All the turn signals will flash on and off at the same time. The flashers will also operate while the brake pedal is applied. To turn the flashers off, press the switch again. The flashers work whether your vehicle is running or not. The flashers will work for up to two hours when the battery is fully charged and in good condition. They will not drain the battery excessively unless they are left on for an extended period of time. If the flashers run for longer than 2 hours while your engine is not running, or if your battery is not fully charged, your battery could be drained.
  • 159. Hazard warning flasher switch If the Engine Cranks but Does Not Start or Starting After a Collision The Fuel Pump Shut-off Switch If the engine cranks but does not start or if you have had a collision, the fuel pump shut-off switch may have been triggered. The shut-off switch is a device that stops the fuel pump when your vehicle has been involved in a substantial jolt. Once the shut-off switch is activated, you must reset the switch by hand before you can start your vehicle. 156
  • 160. 157 The location of the fuel pump shut-off switch RWARNING If you see or smell fuel, do not reset the switch or try to start your vehicle. Have all the passengers get out of the vehicle and call the local fire department or a towing service.
  • 161. If your engine cranks but does not start after a collision or substantial jolt: 1. Turn the key in the ignition to the LOCK 158 position. 2. Check under the vehicle for leaking fuel. 3. If you do not see or smell fuel, push the red reset button on the fuel pump shut-off switch down. The reset switch on your vehicle is located on the left side of the luggage compartment under the carpet. The red reset button is under the raised area of the rubber cover. 4. Attempt to start your vehicle. If the vehicle starts, let it run a few seconds, then turn the key to the LOCK position. 5. Check under the vehicle again for leaking fuel. If you see or smell fuel, do not start your vehicle again. If you do not see or smell fuel, you can try to start your vehicle again. Fuses If electrical parts in your vehicle are not working, the system may have been overloaded and blown a fuse. If a fuse blows, all the parts of your vehicle that use the fuse will not work. Your vehicle has two fuse panels. The interior fuse panel is below the instrument panel in front of the driver’s door. The main panel is under the hood behind the battery.
  • 162. 159 Fuse panel under instrument panel Inside of the instrument fuse panel cover
  • 163. 160
  • 164. 161 Fuse panel located under hood
  • 165. Fuses Fuse panel cover located under the hood 162
  • 166. 163
  • 167. 164
  • 168. 165 To remove and replace a fuse, use the fuse puller provided. Fuse puller tool and fuse Relays
  • 169. 166
  • 170. 167 RWARNING Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire damage and could start a fire. To find a fuse’s amperage rating, check the number on the fuse or check the color. Even after you replace a fuse, it may continue to blow if you do not find what caused the overload. If the fuse continues to blow, have your electrical system checked. Changing a Tire If you get a flat tire while you are driving, do not apply the brake heavily. Instead, gradually decrease the speed. Hold the steering wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road. Park on a level spot, turn off the ignition, set the parking brake, and turn on the hazard flashers.
  • 171. The Temporary Spare Tire You may have a high pressure temporary spare tire. This spare tire is smaller than a regular tire and is designed for emergency use only. Use it only when you get a flat tire and replace it as soon as you can. This spare tire is marked with the words “TEMPORARY USE ONLY” so that you can easily identify it. 168 RWARNING If you use the temporary spare tire continuously or do not follow these precautions, the tire could fail, causing you to lose control of the vehicle, possibly injuring yourself or others. When you drive with the temporary spare tire, DO NOT: qexceed 50 mph (80 km/h) under any circumstances. qload your vehicle so that it is heavier than the maximum vehicle load rating listed on the tire decal. quse tire chains on this tire.
  • 172. qtry to repair the temporary spare tire or remove it from its wheel. quse the wheel for any other type of vehicle. qdrive through an automatic car wash with this tire. Because the temporary spare tire is smaller than a conventional tire, it reduces the ground clearance. Your vehicle may get caught in the rails and it could be damaged. Spare Tire Location The temporary spare tire is stored in the luggage compartment, under the mat and floorboard. Location of the temporary spare tire and jacking equipment To remove the jack and the temporary spare, turn the bolt counterclockwise. 169
  • 173. Preparing to Change the Tire 1. Make sure that your vehicle will not move 170 or roll. If you have an automatic transaxle, put the gearshift in P (Park). If you have a manual transaxle, put the gearshift in 1 (First). Set the parking brake and block the wheel that is diagonally opposite the tire that you are changing. Blocking the wheel diagonally opposite the tire being changed When one of the front wheels is off the ground, the transaxle alone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or slipping off the jack, even if the vehicle is in P (Park) or 1 (First). To prevent the vehicle from moving when you change one of the front tires, put a block behind the wheel that is diagonally opposite to the tire. RWARNING If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone else could be seriously injured.
  • 174. 171 2. Get out the spare tire and jack. 3. Remove any wheelcovers or hubcaps with the tapered end of a wheel nut wrench. Insert the handle of the wrench and twist it against the inner wheelcover flange. Remove any chrome nuts or plastic caps covering the wheel lug nuts. 4. Loosen the wheel lug nuts by pulling up on the handle of the wrench one half-turn counterclockwise. Do not remove the wheel lug nuts until you raise the tire off the ground. Removing and Replacing the Tire 1. Find the jack notch next to the door of the tire that you are changing. Put the jack in the jack notch and turn the handle of the jack clockwise until the wheel is completely off the ground. RWARNING To lessen the risk of personal injury, do not put any part of your body under the vehicle while changing a tire. Do not start the engine when your vehicle is on the jack. The jack is only meant for changing the tire.
  • 176. 173 2. Remove the lug nuts by using the lug wrench. Never loosen the hub nuts. See the following illustration if you are not sure where to find the lug nuts. Lug nut positions 3. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire. 4. Replace the lug nuts and tighten snug. The beveled edge faces inward. Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until you lower the vehicle. If you do, you could force the vehicle off the jack.
  • 177. Your vehicle has metric (12 mm) wheel studs and lug nuts. During wheel removal and replacement, make certain that you use the same lug nuts to reinstall the wheel or replace them with nuts of the same metric size and threading. 174 RWARNING Installation of an English thread nut on a metric stud (or vice-versa) will not properly secure the wheel to the hub. Damaged studs may result in wheel separation and possible injury. 5. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle counterclockwise. 6. Remove the jack and fully tighten the lug nuts in the order shown in the illustration under step 2. 7. Put the tire, jack, and wrench away. 8. Unblock the wheels. Jump-Starting Your Vehicle Your vehicle has a Motorcraft maintenance-free battery. Your vehicle’s battery may die if you leave the lights on or any electrical equipment on after you turn the engine off. If this happens, you may be able to jump-start from a booster battery to start your vehicle. RWARNING The gases around the battery can explode if exposed to flames, sparks, or lit cigarettes. An explosion could result in injury or vehicle damage.
  • 178. 175 RWARNING To protect yourself when charging a battery, always shield your face and eyes. Make sure that you can breathe fresh air. RWARNING Applying too much pressure on the ends when lifting a battery could cause acid to spill. Lift the battery with a carrier or with your hands on the opposite corners. RWARNING Batteries contain sulfuric acid which burns skin, eyes, and clothing. If the acid touches someone’s skin, eyes, or clothing, immediately flush the area with water for at least 15 minutes. If someone swallows the acid, have him or her drink lots of milk or water first, then Milk of Magnesia, a beaten egg, or vegetable oil. Call a doctor immediately. RWARNING Do not push-start your vehicle. You could damage the catalytic converter. For further information, see Jumper Cables in the Index. To avoid damaging your vehicle or your battery, and to avoid injury to yourself, follow these directions for preparing your vehicle to jump-start and connecting the jumper cables in the order they are given. If in doubt, call for road service.
  • 179. Preparing Your Vehicle 1. Your vehicle has a 12-volt starting system, so 176 you need to use a 12-volt jumper system. You will damage your starting motor, ignition system, and other electrical parts if you connect them to a 24-volt power supply (either two 12-volt batteries in series or a 24-volt generator set). 2. Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle. You could damage the vehicle’s electrical system. 3. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle. Make sure the vehicles do not touch each other. Set the parking brake on both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving parts. 4. Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion before you attach the jumper cables. Connecting the jumper cables 1. Connect one end of the first jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of the discharged battery. (You can connect either jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal, as long as you use the same cable for both positive terminals.) Most jumper cables have a red cable and a black cable. The red cable is generally used for the positive terminals and the black for the negative ones. 2. Connect the other end of the first cable to the positive (+) terminal of the booster battery. 3. Connect one end of the second cable to the negative (S) terminal of the booster battery — NOT to the discharged battery.
  • 180. 4. Connect the other end of the second cable to 177 a good metallic surface on the engine or frame of the disabled vehicle. RWARNING Do not connect the end of the second cable to the negative (S) terminal of the battery to be jumped. A spark may cause an explosion of the gases that surround the battery. The sequence for connecting the jumper cables
  • 181. Jump-Starting 1. Make sure that the jumper cables are not in 178 the way of moving engine parts, then start the booster vehicle. Run the engine at a moderate speed. 2. Let the discharged battery charge for a few minutes and then start the disabled vehicle. It may take a couple of tries before the vehicle starts. If the vehicle does not start after several attempts, there may be a different problem. 3. When both vehicles are running, let them idle for a few minutes to charge the discharged battery. Removing jumper cables 1. Always remove the jumper cables in reverse order. Remove the negative (-) end of the jumper cable from the metallic surface on the engine or frame of the disabled vehicle. 2. Remove the negative (S) cable from the booster battery. 3. Remove the positive (+) cable from the booster battery. 4. Remove the other end of the positive (+) cable from the discharged battery. After the vehicle is started, let it idle for a while to let the engine “relearn” its idle conditions. Drive it around for a while with all electrical accessories turned off to let the battery recharge. Driveability may be deteriorated slightly until all drive modes are “relearned.” You may need to use a battery charger to fully recharge the battery.
  • 182. If you need to replace your battery, see Battery in the Maintenance and Care chapter. Towing Your Vehicle If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professional towing service or, if you are a member, your roadside assistance center. Recommended towing options include wheel lift towing or flat bed towing. When calling for a tow truck, tell the operator what kind of vehicle you have. A towing manual is available from Ford Motor Company for all authorized tow truck operators. Have your tow truck driver refer to this manual for the proper hook-up and towing procedures for your vehicle. 179
  • 183. Towing With the Back Wheels Off the Ground For automatic and manual transaxle vehicles, if it is necessary to tow your vehicle from the rear (with the rear wheels off the ground), a dolly must be placed under the front tires to prevent transaxle damage. If the slingbelt towing method must be used, use the following procedure: 1. Place the front wheels on wheel dollies. 2. Place T-hooks into the T-hook slots located 180 on the frame rail behind the rear wheels. 3. Route the tow chain to clear the exhaust pipes. 4. Position the tow bar under the rear bumper. 5. Slowly raise the vehicle off the ground. 6. Attach safety chains around the rear crossmember.
  • 184. Do not use your vehicle’s steering column lock to secure the wheels in a straight-ahead position. Always use a steering wheel clamping device designed for towing service. Refer to Towing behind another vehicle —recreational vehicle in the Index for information on towing behind an RV. 181
  • 185. 183 Maintenance and Care Service Made Easy Ford has two goals for servicing your vehicle. 1. When we can, we design parts that do not need to be serviced. 2. We want to make servicing your vehicle as easy as possible. To help you: qWe highlight do-it-yourself items in yellow in the engine compartment so that you can find them easily. qWhen possible, we design parts that can be replaced without tools. qWe give you a Maintenance Schedule that makes tracking routine service for your vehicle easy. The maintenance schedule is located in the Maintenance Schedule booklet. This chapter tells you about the basic parts that you need to check and service regularly. If your vehicle needs professional servicing, your dealership can provide the parts and service required. Check your Warranty Information Booklet to find out which parts and services are covered. Also see the Customer Assistance chapter of this Owner Guide. Ford Motor Company recommends that you perform the Owner Maintenance Checks listed in the Maintenance Schedule booklet. These services are important for the proper operation of your vehicle. In addition to the conditions listed in
  • 186. the Owner Maintenance Checklist, be alert for any unusual noise, vibration, or other indication that your vehicle may need service. If you do notice something unusual, see that your vehicle is serviced promptly. Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids, and service parts that meet Ford Motor Company specifications. Motorcraft parts are designed and built to provide the best performance in your vehicle. Using these parts for replacement is your assurance that Ford-built quality stays in your vehicle. NOTE: Always dispose of used automotive 184 fluids in a responsible manner. Follow your community’s standards for disposing of these types of fluids. Call your local recycling center to find out about recycling automotive fluids. Precautions When Servicing Your Vehicle Be especially careful when inspecting or servicing your vehicle. Here are some general precautions for your safety: qDo not work on a hot engine. The engine cooling fan may come on unexpectedly. Always turn the engine off and let it cool. RWARNING The cooling fan is automatic and may come on at any time. Always disconnect the negative terminal of the battery before working near the fan. qIf you must work with the engine running, avoid wearing loose clothing or jewelry that could get caught in moving parts. Take appropriate precautions with long hair.
  • 187. qDo not work on a vehicle in an enclosed space with the engine running, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation. qNever get under a vehicle while it is supported only by a jack. If you must work under a vehicle, use safety stands. qKeep all lit cigarettes and other smoking materials away from the battery and all fuel-related parts. If you disconnect the battery, the engine must “relearn” its idle conditions before your vehicle will drive properly. To find out how the engine does this, see Battery in this chapter. Working with the engine off: 1. Set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is securely latched in P (Park) (automatic transaxle) or Neutral (manual transaxle). 2. Remove the key from the ignition after you 185 turn the engine off. 3. Block the wheels. This will prevent your vehicle from moving unexpectedly. Working with the engine on: 1. Set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is securely latched in P (Park) (automatic transaxle) or Neutral (manual transaxle). 2. Block the wheels. This will prevent your vehicle from moving unexpectedly. RWARNING Do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running.
  • 188. Opening the Hood 1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood release 186 handle located under the bottom left corner of the instrument panel. 2. Go to the front of the vehicle and release the auxiliary latch that is located under the hood at the center of the vehicle. 3. Lift the hood and set the prop rod in the hole in the hood marked with an arrow. When you close the hood, make sure the prop rod is in its retainer and that the hood latches securely. The hood release handle
  • 189. 187 NOTE: Apply lubricant to the hood latch at six-month intervals to maintain smooth and trouble-free operation. NOTE: Read and understand Precautions When Servicing Your Vehicle at the beginning of this chapter before opening the hood. Engine Types Your vehicle has one of these types of engines: qa 2.0L (121 CID) fuel injected 16-valve four-cylinder engine. qa 2.5L (152 CID) fuel injected 24-valve six-cylinder engine.
  • 191. 189 The 2.5L engine
  • 192. Engine Oil Recommendations We recommend using Motorcraft oil or an equivalent oil meeting Ford Specification WSS-M2C153-F and displaying the American Petroleum Institute CERTIFICATION MARK on the front of the container. The API Certification Mark Never use: q“Non-Detergent” oils qOils labeled API SA, SB, SC, SD, SE, SF or SG qAdditional engine oil additives, oil treatments 190 or engine treatments Engine oils with an SAE 5W-30 viscosity are PREFERRED for your vehicle. They provide the best engine performance, fuel economy and engine protection for all climates down to -15°F (-25°C). Synthetic engine oils which are CERTIFIED and of the preferred viscosity may be used in your engine. The engine oil and oil filter must still be changed according to the maintenance schedule.
  • 193. Checking and Adding Engine Oil Since the proper amount of engine oil is important for safe engine operation, check the oil using the dipstick each time you put fuel in your vehicle. Remember the engine must be off, the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be parked on level ground. Checking the engine oil level: 1. Turn the engine off after it has warmed up and allow a few minutes for the engine oil to drain back into the oil pan. 191 2. Set the parking brake fully and make sure that the gearshift is securely latched in P (Park) (automatic transaxle) or 1 (First) (manual transaxle). 3. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engine heat. 4. Locate the engine oil dipstick (highlighted in yellow) and carefully pull it out of the engine. 5. Wipe the dipstick clean and put it back into position, making sure it is fully seated. Engine oil dipstick
  • 194. 6. Carefully, pull the dipstick out again. If the 192 oil level is below the L line, add engine oil as necessary. If the oil level is beyond the letter F, engine damage or high oil consumption may occur and some oil must be removed from the engine. 7. Put the dipstick back in and make sure it is fully seated. Adding engine oil It may be necessary to add some oil between oil changes. Make sure you use a CERTIFIED engine oil of the preferred viscosity. Your vehicle’s warranty coverage may not apply if engine damage is caused by the use of improper engine oil. Add engine oil through the oil filler cap highlighted in yellow. To add oil, remove the filler cap and use a funnel to pour oil into the opening. Be careful not to overfill the engine. Recheck the oil level after you finish adding oil. Changing the Engine Oil and the Oil Filter Change the engine oil and oil filter per the following, whichever occurs first.
  • 195. 193 Refer to the Maintenance Schedule booklet for additional information. NOTE: Always dispose of used automotive fluids in a responsible manner. Follow your community’s standards for disposing of these types of fluids. Call your local recycling center to find out about recycling automotive fluids. NOTE: Ford production and aftermarket (Motorcraft) oil filters are designed for added engine protection and long life. If a replacement oil filter is used that does not meet Ford material and design specifications, startup engine noises or knock may be experienced. It is recommended you use the appropriate Motorcraft oil filter (or another brand meeting Ford specifications) for your engine application. RWARNING Continuous contact with USED motor oil has caused cancer in laboratory mice. Protect your skin by washing with soap and water. Brake Fluid Under normal circumstances, your vehicle should not use up brake fluid rapidly. However, expect the level of the brake fluid to slowly fall as you put more mileage on your vehicle and the brake pads wear. Check the brake fluid at least once a year. You can do this by looking at the fluid level in the plastic reservoir on the master cylinder. (See The Engine Types earlier in this chapter to locate the master cylinder.) The fluid level should be at or near the MAX mark.
  • 196. 194 RWARNING Brake fluid is toxic. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Brake fluid level If the fluid is low, carefully clean and remove the cap from the reservoir. Fill the reservoir to the MAX line with Ford High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AA or DOT 3 equivalent fluid meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A. RWARNING If you use a brake fluid that is not DOT 3, you will cause permanent damage to your brakes. Do not fill the reservoir above the MAX line. If you find that the fluid level is excessively low — below the seam or ridge on the outside of the plastic reservoir — have the brake system inspected.
  • 197. 195 RWARNING Do not let the reservoir for the master cylinder run dry. This may cause the brakes to fail. Windshield Washer Fluid Washer Fluid Check the level of the windshield washer fluid every time you stop for fuel. The reservoir for the windshield washer fluid is located in the engine compartment. Visual inspection can determine if the washer fluid is adequate. Do not operate the washer when the reservoir is empty. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
  • 198. 196 RWARNING Do not put windshield washer fluid in the container for the engine coolant. Use specially formulated windshield washer fluid rather than plain water, because specially formulated washer fluids contain additives that dissolve road grime. For safety reasons, washer fluids containing an appropriate antifreeze such as methanol should be used in freezing weather (temperatures below 32°F [0°C]). State or local regulations on Volatile Organic Compounds (VOCs) may restrict use of the most common antifreeze, methanol. Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades, and windshield washer system. Engine Coolant Adding Engine Coolant RWARNING Be careful not to add engine coolant to the windshield washer fluid reservoir. If sprayed on the windshield, engine coolant could make it difficult to see through the windshield. When the engine is cool, add a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant and water to the engine coolant recovery reservoir — DO NOT ADD DIRECTLY TO THE RADIATOR. Add straight water only in an emergency, but you should replace it with a 50/50 mixture of coolant and distilled water as soon as possible.
  • 199. Check the coolant level in the coolant recovery reservoir the next few times you drive the vehicle. If necessary, add enough of a 50/50 mixture of coolant and water to bring the liquid level to the fill line on the reservoir. 197 RWARNING Never remove the coolant recovery cap while the engine is running or hot. If you must remove the coolant recovery cap, follow these steps to avoid personal injury caused by escaping steam or engine coolant: 1. Before you remove the cap, turn the engine off and let it cool. 2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick cloth around the cap and turn it slowly, counterclockwise to the first stop. 3. Step back while the pressure releases.
  • 200. 4. When you are sure that all the pressure has 198 been released, use the cloth to press the cap down, turn it counterclockwise, and remove it. Use Ford Premium Engine Coolant E2FZ-19549-AA (in Canada, Motorcraft CXC-8-B) or an equivalent premium engine coolant that meets Ford specification ESE-M97B44-A. Ford Premium Engine Coolant is an optimized formula that will protect all metals and rubber elastomers used in Ford cooling systems for 4 years or 50,000 miles (80,000 km). Do not use alcohol or methanol antifreeze or any engine coolants mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze. Do not use supplemental coolant additives in your vehicle. These additives may harm your engine cooling system. The use of an improper coolant may void the warranty of your vehicle’s engine cooling system. Recycled engine coolant Ford Motor Company recommends that Ford and Lincoln-Mercury dealers use recycled engine coolant produced by Ford-approved processes. Not all coolant recycling processes produce coolant which meets Ford specification ESE-M97B44-A, and use of such coolant may harm engine and cooling system components. Always dispose of used automotive fluids in a responsible manner. Follow your community’s regulations and standards for recycling and disposing of automotive fluids. Coolant refill capacity To find out how much fluid your vehicle’s cooling system can hold, see Refill capacities in the Capacities and Specifications chapter.
  • 201. Have your dealer check the engine cooling system for leaks if you have to add more than a quart (liter) of engine coolant each month. Severe winter climate If you drive in extremely cold climates (less than S34°F [S36°C]), it may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration above 50%. Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the coolant concentration in your vehicle is such that the coolant will not freeze at the temperature level in which you drive during winter months. Never increase the engine coolant concentration above 60%. Leave a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant and water in your vehicle year-round in non-extreme climates. Checking Hoses Check all engine and heater system hoses and hose connections for deterioration, leaks, and loose hose clamps as specified in the maintenance schedule. Repair or replace with Motorcraft hoses or equivalent as necessary. Power Steering Fluid Check the level of the power steering fluid at least twice a year (i.e., every Spring and Fall). Checking and Adding Power Steering Fluid 1. Start the engine and let it run until the power steering fluid reaches normal operating temperature. The power steering fluid will be at the right temperature when the engine coolant temperature gauge in the instrument cluster is near the center of the NORMAL operating temperature range. 199
  • 202. 2. While the engine idles, turn the steering 200 wheel back and forth several times. Make sure that the cap assembly is installed at this time. 3. Turn the engine off and check the level on the power steering reservoir. Where to check for power steering fluid 4. Remove the dipstick to read the power steering fluid level. If the power steering fluid is low, add fluid in small amounts, continuously checking the level, until you reach the HIGH line. Do not overfill. To find out how much fluid your vehicle’s power steering fluid reservoir will hold, see Refill capacities for fluids in the Index. 5. When you are finished, put the dipstick back in and make sure that it fits snugly. If the power steering fluid is low, do not drive your vehicle for a long period of time before adding fluid. This can damage the power steering pump. If you must check the power steering fluid before it reaches normal operating temperature, make sure that the fluid reaches the “L” (LOW) line range in the reservoir. The reading will only be accurate if the fluid temperature is approximately 70° to 100°F (21° to 38°C).
  • 203. Automatic Transaxle Fluid Under normal circumstances, you do not need to check the fluid level of the transaxle, since your vehicle does not use up transaxle fluid. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule booklet for replacement intervals. However, if the transaxle is not working properly — for instance, the transaxle may slip or shift slowly, or you may notice some sign of fluid leakage — the fluid level should be checked. If you must check the transaxle fluid in an emergency, make sure that your vehicle is on level ground, start the engine, and move the gearshift through all of the gears allowing sufficient time for each position to engage. Securely latch the gearshift in P (Park). Set the parking brake and leave the engine running. Wipe off the dipstick cap, pull the dipstick out and wipe the indicator end clean. Put the dipstick back into the filler tube. Make sure the dipstick is fully seated in the filler tube; otherwise, you will not get an accurate reading. Pull the dipstick out and read the fluid level. The fluid level must be above the lower mark. If it is not, you should not drive your vehicle until more fluid is added. Ideally, the fluid level should be within the specified area of the dipstick. NOTE: The fluid level indication on the dipstick will be different at operating temperature and room temperature. For the correct fluid level reading on the dipstick, follow the appropriate instructions. 201
  • 204. At normal operating temperature (approximately 20 miles [32 km] of vehicle operation), the level on the dipstick should be within the specified area on the “Safe level when hot” temperature scale. At room temperature, the level should be within the specified area on the “Safe level when cold” temperature scale. If your vehicle has not been operated for some time and outside temperature is below 50°F (10°C) the fluid must be warmed by running the engine. Automatic transaxle fluid dipstick on 2.5L engine vehicles Automatic transaxle fluid dipstick on 2.0L engine vehicles 202
  • 205. If you must add transaxle fluid in an emergency, use only MERCONH fluid, such as Motorcraft MERCONH Multi-Purpose ATF. Add the fluid in 1/2-pint increments until you raise the fluid level to within the crosshatched area on the dipstick. Never overfill the transaxle. If the fluid level gets too high, remove the excess fluid as soon as possible; otherwise, you could damage the transaxle. Manual Transaxle Fluid The lubricant level and quality should not deteriorate under normal use. However, you should periodically have your Ford Dealer check the fluid level during regular oil changes. NOTE: Always dispose of used automotive fluids in a responsible manner. Follow your community’s standards for disposing of these types of fluids. Call your local recycling center to find out about recycling automotive fluids. Constant Velocity Joints Inspect all rubber boots for signs of cracks, tears, or splits. Inspect underneath of your car for any indication of grease splatter in the areas of constant velocity joint boots, outboard and inboard locations; grease splatter is an indication of boot and/or clamp damage. Battery The Motorcraft maintenance-free battery does not require additional water during its life of service. The vents are part of the cover and cannot be removed. For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are tightly fastened to the battery terminals. 203
  • 206. If you see any corrosion on the battery cables or terminals, remove the cables from the terminal and clean them both with a wire brush. You can neutralize the acid with a solution of baking soda and water. Reinstall the cables when you are done cleaning them, and apply a small quantity of grease to the top of each battery terminal to help prevent corrosion. Battery replacement When the original equipment maintenance-free battery is replaced under warranty, it may be replaced by a low-maintenance battery. The low-maintenance battery has removable vent caps for checking the electrolyte level and adding water, if necessary. The electrolyte level should be checked at least every 24 months or 24,000 miles (40,000 km) in temperatures up to 90°F (32°C) and more in temperatures above 90°F (32°C). Keep the electrolyte level in each cell up to the level indicator. Do not overfill. If the level gets low, you can add plain tap water to the battery, provided the water isn’t hard or doesn’t have a high mineral or alkali content. However, if possible, refill with distilled water. If the battery needs water quite often, have the charging system checked for a possible problem. If you ever disconnect the battery or install a new battery, you must allow the computer to “relearn” its idle condition before your vehicle will drive properly. To begin this process, put the gearshift in P (Park) (automatic transaxle) or N (Neutral) (manual transaxle), set the emergency brake, turn off all the accessories, and start the vehicle. Bring the engine to normal operating temperature. 204
  • 207. If you do not let the engine relearn its idle, the idle quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle is relearned. Your vehicle will eventually relearn its idle while you drive it, but it takes much longer than if you use the previous procedure. Help Us Protect Our Environment Ford Motor Company strongly recommends that used lead-acid batteries be returned to an authorized recycling facility for disposal. 205 Battery recycling symbol RWARNING The gases around the battery can explode if exposed to flames, sparks, or lit cigarettes. An explosion could result in injury or vehicle damage. RWARNING To protect yourself when charging a battery, always shield your face and eyes. Make sure that you can breathe fresh air. RWARNING Batteries contain sulfuric acid which burns skin, eyes, and clothing.
  • 208. If the acid touches someone’s skin, eyes, or clothing, immediately flush the area with water for at least 15 minutes. If someone swallows the acid, have him or her drink lots of milk or water first, then Milk of Magnesia, a beaten egg, or vegetable oil. Call a doctor immediately. 206 RWARNING Applying too much pressure on the ends when lifting a battery could cause acid to spill. Lift the battery with a carrier or with your hands on the opposite corners. Wiper blade maintenance Check the windshield wiper blades at least twice a year. Also check them whenever they seem less effective than usual. Such substances as tree sap and some hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes reduce the effectiveness of wiper blades. If the blades do not wipe properly, clean both the windshield and the wiper blades. Use undiluted windshield washer solution or a mild detergent. Rinse thoroughly with clear water. Do not use fuel, kerosene, paint thinner, or other solvents to clean your wiper blades. These will damage your blades. To make reaching the wiper blades easy, simply turn the ignition switch to ACC and turn your wipers on. Wait for them to reach a vertical position and turn the ignition to OFF. Do not move the wipers manually. Moving the wipers manually may damage them.
  • 209. Wiper blade replacement If the wipers still do not work properly after you clean them, you may need to replace the wiper blade assembly. When replacing the wiper blade assembly always use a Motorcraft part or equivalent. To replace the wiper blades: 1. Pull the wiper arm away from the 207 windshield and into the lock position. 2. Turn the blade at an angle from the wiper arm. Push the lock pin with a screwdriver to release the blade and pull the wiper blade down toward the windshield to remove it from the arm. 3. Attach a new wiper blade to the wiper arm and press it into place until you hear it click.
  • 210. Replacing the wiper blades Tires Look at your tires each time you fill your fuel tank. If one tire looks lower than the others, check the pressure in all of them. Always follow these precautions: qUse an accurate tire pressure gauge. qCheck the tire pressure when tires are cold, 208 after the vehicle has been parked for at least one hour or has been driven less than 3 miles (5 km).
  • 211. qMake sure the weight of your load is evenly distributed. qAdjust tire pressure to recommended specifications found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label. If you do not take these precautions, your tires may fail or go flat. Ford Motor Company recommends obeying posted speed limits. 209 RWARNING Driving too fast for conditions creates the possibility of loss of vehicle control. Driving at very high speeds for extended periods of time may result in damage to vehicle components. At least once a month, check the pressure in all your vehicle’s tires, including the spare. Use an accurate tire pressure gauge. Check the tire pressure when tires are cold, that is, after the vehicle has been parked for at least one hour or has been driven less than 3 miles (5 km). You can find your vehicle’s proper tire inflation pressure on the tire decal on the right door lock pillar. RWARNING Improperly inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, possibly resulting in loss of vehicle control.
  • 212. Tire Inspection and Maintenance Inspect the tire treads, and remove stones, nails, glass or other objects that may be wedged in the tread grooves. Check for holes or cuts that may permit air to leak from the tire, and make the necessary repairs. Inspect the tire sidewalls for cuts, bruises and other damage. If you suspect internal damage to the tire, have it removed and checked. You may need to repair or replace it. Tire Rotation Because your vehicle’s front and rear tires perform different jobs, they often wear differently. To make sure your tires wear evenly and last longer, rotate them as indicated in the following diagram. Do not include the spare tire as part of your rotation. For tire rotation intervals, see the Maintenance Schedule booklet. If you notice the tires wearing unevenly, have them checked. Rotating the tires 210
  • 213. Replacing the Tires We recommend that you use the same size and type when making tire replacements. The standard model uses P195/65 R14 tires, and the GT model is equipped with P225/50VR16 tires. If your standard model vehicle is equipped with a 3-spoke aluminum wheel, you will need P205/55H R15 tires. Replace any tires that show wear bands. When your tire shows a wear band, it has only 1/16 inch (2 mm) of tread left. A worn-out tire Because your vehicle’s tires may wear unevenly, you may need to replace them before a wear band appears across the entire tread. 211 RWARNING When replacing full size tires, never mix radial, bias-belted, or bias-type tires. Use only the tire sizes that are listed on the tire pressure decal. Make sure that all tires are the same size, speed rating, and load-carrying capacity. Use only the tire combinations recommended on the decal. If you do not follow these precautions, your vehicle may not drive properly and safely.
  • 214. Tires that are larger or smaller than your vehicle’s original tires may also affect the accuracy of your speedometer. Wheel and Tire Matching See an authorized tire dealer for proper servicing procedures. Wheels and tires must be properly removed, matched and remounted to maintain the best possible ride. Information About Tire Quality Grades New vehicles are fitted with tires that have their Tire Quality Grade (described below) molded into the tire’s sidewall. These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United States Department of Transportation has set. Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic tires for use on passenger cars. They do not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as defined in Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104(c)(2). U.S. Department of Transportation — Tire quality grades: The U.S. Department of Transportation requires Ford to give you the following information about tire grades exactly as the government has written it. Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires 212
  • 215. depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. Traction A B C The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are A, B, and C, and they represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. 213 RWARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking (straightahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turning) traction. Temperature A B C The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.
  • 216. 214 RWARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. Snow tires During the winter months in some climates, you may need to use snow tires and occasionally chains for your tires. RWARNING Snow tires must be the same size and grade as the tires you currently have on your vehicle. Use chains on the tires only in an emergency or if the law requires them where you live. If you choose to use chains on your vehicle’s tires, be aware of the following: qTire chains may scratch or chip aluminum wheels. IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT TIRE CHAINS ARE INSTALLED ON STEEL WHEELS ONLY. Be sure to remove wheel covers (if equipped) from steel rims before using tire chains to avoid scratches or damage. qDo not use tire chains if you have the GT model. qLocal regulations may prohibit or restrict the use of tire chains. Investigate the laws and regulations in your area before installing chains.
  • 217. qPut the chains on the front tires tightly with the ends held down securely. Retighten the chains after driving 1/2 mile (1 km). Follow the chain manufacturer’s instructions. qDo not drive faster than 30 mph (50 km/h) or the chain manufacturer’s recommended speed limit, whichever is lower. Avoid bumps, holes and sharp turns. If you can hear the chains rub or bang against your vehicle, remove the chains to prevent damage to your vehicle. qTire chains may affect vehicle handling. Drive carefully and avoid hard braking. qDo not use chains on temporary spare tires. They may damage the vehicle and the tire. qRemove tire chains at the first opportunity after using them on snow and ice. Do not use the chains on dry roads. Filling the Fuel Tank Fuel filler door release lever Your vehicle is equipped with a fuel filler door release. To open the fuel filler door, pull up on the release lever which is located in front of the driver’s seat and near the door. Remote Fuel Filler-Lid Release Override If the release does not operate, open the hatchback, remove the trim on the left rear side, reach into the opening and pull the latch toward the rear (see the service manual for trim removal). You should wear gloves to protect your hands from any sharp edges when you use the fuel filler-lid release override. 215
  • 218. Manual fuel filler-lid override (behind left rear trim panel in hatch) To fill the fuel tank: 1. After opening the fuel filler door, remove 216 the cap carefully and slowly by turning it counterclockwise 1/2 to 3/4 turn. RWARNING The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops before completely removing the cap. 2. Put the nozzle all the way inside the fuel filler pipe before pumping the fuel.
  • 219. 217 NOTE: If you spill any fuel on the body of your vehicle, clean it off immediately. The fuel may dull or soften the paint if you do not wash it off. 3. Replace the fuel cap completely when you are finished. Turn it clockwise 1/4 turn until it is tight. It will click when it is fully tightened. 4. Push the fuel door closed. If you lose the fuel cap, replace it with an authorized Motorcraft or equivalent part. RWARNING If you do not use the proper fuel cap, the pressure in the fuel tank can damage the fuel system or cause it to work improperly in a collision. NOTE: If you replace your fuel cap with an aftermarket fuel filler cap, the customer warranty may be void for any damage to the fuel tank and/or fuel system. Choosing the Right Fuel Use only UNLEADED FUEL. The use of leaded fuel is prohibited by law and could damage your vehicle. The damage may not be covered by your warranty. Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel containing manganese-based additives such as MMT. Additionally, vehicles certified to California emission standards (indicated on the underhood Vehicle Emissions Control Information label) are designed to operate on California reformulated gasolines. If California reformulated gasoline is not available when you
  • 220. refuel, your vehicle can be operated on non-California fuels. However, even though your engine will perform adequately on other gasolines, the performance of the emission control devices and systems may be adversely affected. Repair of damage caused by using a fuel that your vehicle was not designed for may not be covered by your warranty. Octane Recommendations Your 2.0L engine is designed to use regular gasoline with an (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87. We do not recommend gasolines labeled as “regular” in high altitude areas that are sold with octane ratings of 86 or even less. Your 2.5L engine is designed to use premium gasoline for optimum performance with an (R+M)/2 octane rating of 91 or higher. Gasolines with lower octane ratings can be used, but performance may decrease. We do not recommend gasolines labeled as “premium” in high altitude areas that are sold with octane ratings less than 91. Do not be concerned if your vehicle sometimes knocks lightly. However, if it knocks heavily under most driving conditions on the recommended octane fuel, see your dealer or a qualified service technician to prevent any engine damage. Fuel Quality If you are experiencing starting, rough idle or hesitation problems try a different brand of fuel. If the condition persists, see your dealer or a qualified service technician. The American Automobile Manufacturers Association (AAMA) issued a gasoline specification to provide information on high 218
  • 221. quality fuels that optimize the performance of your vehicle. We recommend the use of gasolines that meet the AAMA specification if they are available. It should not be necessary to add any aftermarket products to your fuel tank if you continue to use a high-quality fuel. Cleaner Air Ford approves the use of gasolines to improve air quality, including reformulated gasolines that contain oxygenates such as a maximum of 10% ethanol or 15% MTBE. There should be no more than 5% methanol with cosolvents and additives to protect the fuel system. Safety Information Relating to Automotive Fuels 219 RWARNING Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death if misused or mishandled. qTurn vehicle off when refueling. qDo not smoke when refueling. Fuels are extremely flammable. qDo not siphon any fuel by mouth. RWARNING Gasoline or gasoline blended with methanol can cause blindness and possible death when swallowed. If any fuel is swallowed, call a physician or poison control center immediately.
  • 222. qAvoid breathing vapors while refueling. qIf fuel is splashed on the skin, wash with soap and water. qIf fuel is splashed in the eyes, remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15 minutes, and seek medical attention. Gasoline and gasoline blends may contain small amounts of carcinogens, such as benzene. Long-term exposure to unleaded gasoline vapors has caused cancer in laboratory animals. If you are taking the medication “Antabuse” or other forms of disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism, vapor or skin contact with a gasoline-methanol blend may cause the same kind of adverse reaction as drinking an alcoholic beverage. In sensitive individuals, serious personal injury or sickness could result. Consult a physician promptly if you experience an adverse reaction. Running Out of Fuel NOTE: Avoid running out of fuel because this 220 situation may have an adverse effect on modern powertrain components. You may need to crank the engine several times before the fuel system starts to pump fuel from the tank to the engine. Fuel Economy Fuel economy is an estimate of the efficiency of your vehicle and can be calculated as Miles Per Gallon (MPG) or Liters Per 100 Kilometers (L/100K). Do not calculate fuel economy during your vehicle’s break-in period. This would not be an accurate estimate of how much fuel your vehicle will normally use.
  • 223. 221 To calculate fuel economy: 1. Fill the tank completely and record the initial odometer reading. 2. Every time you buy fuel record the amount (in gallons or liters) purchased. 3. After at least three to five tankfuls, fill the fuel tank and record the final odometer reading. 4. Use these equations to calculate your fuel economy: qEnglish: MPG = (total miles driven) v (gallons used) qMetric: L/100k = (liters used) v (100 kilometers) Comparisons With EPA Estimates EPA fuel economy figures are obtained from laboratory tests under simulated road conditions and may not reflect the actual conditions you experience or your style of driving. The EPA fuel economy estimate is not a guarantee that you will achieve the fuel economy shown. The following decrease fuel economy: qLack of regular, scheduled maintenance qRapid acceleration and excessive speed qDriving with your foot on the brake qSudden stops qExtended engine idling qUsing speed control in hilly terrain
  • 224. qExtended use of the A/C, defroster, rear window defroster and other accessories qUnderinflated tires qHeavy loads qAftermarket add-ons such as bike, ski or luggage racks, bug deflectors, etc. Air Conditioning Refrigerant Whenever service to the air conditioning system is required, make sure the service facility uses a refrigerant recycling system. These systems will capture the refrigerant for reuse. Releasing certain refrigerants into the atmosphere can damage our environment. Emission Control System Your vehicle is equipped with a catalytic converter which enables your vehicle to comply with applicable exhaust emission requirements. 222 RWARNING Exhaust leaks may result in the entry of harmful and potentially lethal fumes into the passenger compartment. Under extreme conditions excessive exhaust temperatures could damage the fuel system, the interior floor covering, or other vehicle components, possibly causing a fire.
  • 225. To make sure that the catalytic converter and the other emission control parts continue to work properly: qUse only unleaded fuel. qAvoid running out of fuel. qDo not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving, especially at high speeds. qDo not push start your vehicle. qHave the services listed in your Maintenance Schedule booklet performed according to the specified schedule. 223 RWARNING Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire. Watch for fluid leaks, strange odors, smoke, loss of oil pressure, the charge warning light, the check engine light, or the temperature warning light. These sometimes indicate that the emission system is not working properly. Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine. Changes that cause more unburned fuel to reach the exhaust system can increase the temperature of the engine or exhaust system. In general, maintenance, replacement, or service of the emission control devices or systems in your new Ford Motor Company vehicle or engine may be performed at your expense by any automotive repair establishment or individual using automotive parts equivalent to those with which your vehicle or engine was originally equipped.
  • 226. By law, anyone who manufactures, repairs, services, sells, leases, trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles is not permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent it from working. In some of the United States and in Canada, vehicle owners may be liable if their emission control device is removed or is prevented from working. Never use a metal exhaust collector when you service your vehicle. If the metal collector contacts any of your vehicle’s plastic trim or bumper parts they could melt or deform. Do not drive your vehicle if it does not operate properly. See your dealer if the engine runs on for more than five seconds after you shut it off or if it misfires, surges, stalls, or backfires. Information about your vehicle’s emission control system is on the Vehicle Emission Control Information decal located on or near the engine. This decal identifies engine displacement and gives some tune-up specifications. How to Prepare Your Vehicle for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) Testing In some localities it may become a legal requirement to pass an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) II system. If the vehicle’s powertrain system or its battery has just been serviced, the OBD II system is reset to a not ready for I/M testing condition. To prepare for I/M testing, the law specifies that additional mixed city and highway driving is required to complete the check of the OBD II system. 224
  • 227. The driving modes required to reach the ready condition consist of a minimum of 30 minutes of city and highway driving as described below. q20 minutes of driving in stop and go city-type traffic with at least four idle periods. q10 minutes of driving on an expressway or highway Before completing the above driving modes, the engine must be warmed up and at operating temperature. Once started, the vehicle must not be turned off during the above driving modes. If the vehicle owner is unable to meet the I/M requirements by using these driving patterns, an authorized service center can perform a detailed OBD II drive cycle as it would any other type of repair work. Lights and Bulb Replacement It is a good idea to check the operation of the following lights frequently: qheadlamps qtail lamps qbrakelamps qhazard flasher qturn signals qside markers qlicense plate lamps qfog lamps (GT model) 225
  • 228. The alignment of your headlamps should be checked if: qoncoming motorists frequently signal you to turn off your vehicle’s high beams when you do not have the high beams on qthe headlamps do not seem to give you enough light to see clearly at night qthe headlamp beams are pointed substantially away from a position slightly down and to the right Headlamp Bulb Your vehicle has retractable halogen headlamps. If you need to replace a headlamp, have it done by a Ford service technician. High-Mount Brakelamp Bulb To replace the bulb: 1. Remove the two side trim liftgate panels. 2. Remove the liftgate trim clip and the liftgate 226 trim. 3. Remove the bulb from the socket by pushing it in and turning it counterclockwise. 4. Install the bulb by pushing straight into the lamp socket and turning it clockwise until it locks in place. 5. Replace the liftgate trim and trim clip. 6. Replace the two side trim liftgate panels.
  • 229. 227 High-mount brakelamp Rear Lamp Bulbs To replace a bulb: 1. Remove the attaching screw and the rear lens cover. Removing the attaching screw and lens
  • 230. 2. Partially remove the rear lens by pulling the 228 lock tabs out of the slots. Pulling out the lock tabs 3. Turn the socket counterclockwise to remove it from the lens. 4. Remove the bulb from the socket by pushing it in and turning it counterclockwise.
  • 231. The rear lamps 5. Install the bulb by pushing it into the socket 229 and turning it clockwise. 6. Install the socket by pushing it into its housing and turning it clockwise. The arrow on the socket must align with the arrow on the housing when installed. 7. Replace the rear lens and rear lens cover.
  • 232. Bulb Specifications Cleaning Your Vehicle Washing and Polishing Your Vehicle Wash the outside of your vehicle, including the underside, with a mild detergent. DO NOT: qWash your vehicle with hot water qWash your vehicle while it sits in direct sunlight qWash your vehicle while the body is hot Pollen, bird droppings and tree sap can damage the paint, especially in hot weather. Wash your vehicle as often as necessary to keep it clean. Take similar precautions if your vehicle is exposed to chemical industrial fallout. 230
  • 233. Paint damage resulting from fallout is not related to a defect in paint materials or workmanship and therefore is not covered by warranty. Ford, however, believes that continual improvement in customer satisfaction is a high priority. For this reason, Ford has authorized its dealers to repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of new vehicles damaged by environmental fallout within 12 months or 12,000 miles (20,000 km) of purchase, whichever comes first. Customers may be required to bring their vehicle in for inspection by a Ford representative. Polish your vehicle to remove harmful deposits and protect the finish. Cleaning Chrome and Aluminum Parts Wash chrome and aluminum parts with a mild detergent. Do not use steel wool, abrasive cleaners, fuel or strong detergents. Cleaning Plastic Parts Some of your vehicle’s exterior trim parts are plastic. Clean with a tar and road oil remover if necessary. Use a vinyl cleaner for routine cleaning. Do not clean plastic parts with thinners, solvents or petroleum-based cleaners. If you have your vehicle rustproofed, remove oversprayed rustproofing with a tar and road oil remover. If rustproofing is not removed from plastic and rubber parts, it can cause deterioration. Because your vehicle’s side mouldings are painted in lacquer, do not use thinners or solvents to clean them. 231
  • 234. Cleaning the Exterior Lamps Do not use dry paper towel, chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners to clean the lamps, as these may cause scratches or crack the lamps. Cleaning the Engine A clean engine is more efficient because the engine is able to cool properly. A build up of grease and dirt acts as an insulator, keeping the engine warmer than normal. qExtreme care must be used if a power washer is used to clean the engine. The high pressure fluid could penetrate sealed parts and assemblies causing damage or malfunctions. qIn order to avoid possible cracking of the engine block or fuel injection pump, do not spray a hot engine or injection pump with cold water. qThe alternator, distributor and air intake must be covered. Covering these components will help prevent water damage. Never wash or rinse the engine while it is running. Water getting into the engine may cause internal damage. Cleaning the Wheels Wash the wheels with the same detergent you use to wash your vehicle’s body. Do not use acid-based wheel cleaners, steel wool, abrasives, fuel, or strong detergents. These substances will damage protective coatings. Use tar and road oil remover to remove grease and tar. NOTE: Before going to a car wash, find out if 232 the brushes are abrasive.
  • 235. If you have whitewall tires that are difficult to clean with regular detergent, use whitewall tire cleaner. Follow the directions on the container and rinse the tires with plenty of clean water. Cleaning the Interior Lamps Your interior dome lamps and map lamps are plastic and should be cleaned with a mild detergent diluted in water. Rinse them with clear water. Cleaning the Instrument Panel Lenses To clean the lenses on your instrument panel, use Ford Glass Cleaner and a soft cloth. Never use paper towels or abrasive cleaners; they can scratch the lenses. Cleaning the Seats Leather For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with a soft, damp cloth. For more thorough cleaning, wipe the surface with a leather and vinyl cleaner or a mild soap. Fabric Remove dust and loose dirt with a whisk broom or a vacuum cleaner. Remove fresh spots immediately. Follow the directions that come with the cleaner. NOTE: Before using any cleaner, test it on a small, hidden area of fabric. If the fabric’s color or texture is adversely affected by a particular cleaner, do not use it. 233
  • 236. Cleaning the Safety Belts Clean the safety belts with any mild soap solution that is recommended for cleaning upholstery or carpets. Do not bleach or dye the belt webbing because this may weaken it. Vehicle Storage Maintenance Tips If you plan on storing your vehicle for an extended period of time (60 days or more), refer to the following maintenance recommendations to ensure your vehicle stays in good operating condition. General qStore all vehicles in a dry, ventilated place. qProtect from sunlight, if possible. qIf vehicles are stored outside, they require 234 regular maintenance to protect against rust and damage. Body qWash vehicle thoroughly to remove dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from exterior surfaces, rear wheel housing and underside of front fenders. qPeriodically wash vehicles stored in exposed locations. qTouch-up raw or primed metal to prevent rust. qCover chrome and stainless steel parts with a thick coat of auto wax to prevent discoloration. Re-wax as necessary when the vehicle is washed.
  • 237. qLubricate all hood, door and trunk lid hinges and latches with a light grade oil. qCover interior soft trim to prevent fading. qKeep all rubber parts free from oil and solvents. Engine qStart engine every 15 days. Run at fast idle until it reaches normal operating temperature. qWith your foot on the brake, shift through all the gears while the engine is running. Fuel system qFill fuel tank with high-quality unleaded fuel 235 until the first automatic shutoff of the fuel pump nozzle. NOTE: During extended periods of vehicle storage (60 days or more), fuel may deteriorate due to oxidation. This can damage rubber and other polymers in the fuel system and may also clog small orifices. Ford Gas Stabilizer should be added whenever actual or expected storage periods exceed 60 days. Follow the instructions on the label. The vehicle should then be operated at idle speed to circulate the additive throughout the fuel system. A volatile corrosion inhibitor added to the fuel system will protect the fuel system’s inner surfaces from corrosion. Follow the instructions packaged with the product.
  • 238. Cooling system qProtect against freezing temperatures. Battery qCheck and recharge as necessary. qKeep connections clean and covered with a 236 light coat of grease. Brakes qMake sure brakes and parking brake are fully released. Tires qMaintain recommended air pressure. Miscellaneous qMake sure all linkages, cables, levers and clevis pins under vehicle are covered with grease to prevent rust. qMove vehicles at least 25 feet (10 m) every 15 days to lubricate working parts to prevent corrosion.
  • 239. 237 Capacities and Specifications Refill Capacities, Motorcraft Parts, and Lubricant Specifications Motorcraft Parts
  • 241. Lubrication Specifications The transaxle and steering systems in your vehicle are filled at the factory with high-quality, long-lasting lubricants or fluids that do not require periodic draining or refilling except under severe-duty conditions. However, when refilling or adding is required, it should be with the proper lubricant or fluid meeting Ford technical specifications. See the Maintenance Schedule booklet for instructions on maintaining proper fluid levels. 239
  • 243. 241
  • 244. 242
  • 245. 243 Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Only) Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Only) If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Ford Motor Company. To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in the Washington, D.C. area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation, 400 Seventh Street, Washington D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline.
  • 246. 245 Customer Assistance Roadside Assistance Ford Motor Company has set up a 24-hour, seven-day-a-week hotline with trained operators who put you in touch with the help you need if you experience a problem with your vehicle. This complimentary service is provided to you throughout your warranty period of 3 years or 36,000 miles (60,000 km), whichever comes first. To purchase Roadside Assistance coverages beyond this period (available through Ford Auto Club in the United States or Ford and Lincoln-Mercury dealers in Canada), contact your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer. Additional Roadside Assistance coverage is unavailable in Puerto Rico and the Virgin Islands. Roadside Assistance will cover the following: qMount your spare if you have a flat tire. qJump-start your battery if it is dead. qUnlock your vehicle if you are locked out. qBring you fuel if you run out. qTow your vehicle if you are stranded. Even non-warranty related tows, like accidents or getting stuck in mud or snow, are covered (some exclusions apply, such as impound towing and repossession).
  • 247. How to use Roadside Assistance Your Roadside Assistance identification card can be found in the Owner Guide portfolio in your glove compartment. Complete the card and place it in your wallet for quick reference. To receive roadside assistance in the United States call 1-800-241-FORD (in Canada call 1-800-665-2006). Should you need to arrange for roadside assistance yourself, Ford Motor Company will reimburse the reasonable cost. To obtain information about reimbursement call 1-800-241-FORD (in Canada call 1-800-665-2006). If You Have a Service Problem Ford Motor Company has authorized Ford and Lincoln-Mercury dealerships that can service your vehicle for you. This chapter tells you how to get service or maintenance for your vehicle. Service/Maintenance Concerns (U.S. or Canada) Ford recommends taking your vehicle to your selling dealer who wants to ensure your continued satisfaction. You may, however, take your vehicle to any authorized Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer. In most cases, your dealer will be able to resolve your concern. If you are not satisfied with the service you received from your dealership’s service department, talk to the service manager at the dealership, or if you still are not satisfied, talk to the owner or general manager of the dealership. In most cases, you will have your concern resolved at this level. 246
  • 248. If you are away from home when your vehicle needs to be serviced, or if you need more help than the dealer gave you, contact the Ford Customer Assistance Center to find an authorized dealership that may be able to help. To process your request, the Ford Customer Assistance Center needs the following information: qyour telephone number (both business and home) qthe name of the dealer and the city where the dealership is located qthe year and make of your vehicle qthe date purchased qthe current mileage on your vehicle qyour Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) If you still have a complaint involving a warranty dispute, you may wish to contact the Dispute Settlement Board. A warranty dispute must be submitted to the Dispute Settlement Board before taking action under the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, or to the extent allowed by state law, before pursuing replacement or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws. This dispute handling 247
  • 249. procedure is not required prior to enforcing state created rights or other rights which are independent of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act or state replacement or repurchase laws. The Dispute Settlement Board The Dispute Settlement Board is: qan independent, third-party arbitration program for warranty disputes qavailable free to owners and lessees of qualifying Ford Motor Company vehicles The Dispute Settlement Board may not be available in all states. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility limitations, modify procedures and/or discontinue this service without notice and without incurring obligations. What Kinds of Cases Does the Board Review? The Board reviews all warranty performance complaints on Ford, Mercury and Lincoln cars and Ford and Mercury light trucks under the new vehicle limited warranty that have not been resolved by either a dealer or Ford Motor Company, except those involving: qa non-Ford product qa non-Ford dealership qa vehicle sales transaction qrequest for reimbursement of consequential expenses. Expenses incidental to the warranty complaint being reviewed are eligible for consideration qitems not covered by the new vehicle limited warranty 248
  • 250. qitems covered by a service contract qalleged liability claims qproperty damage where the damage is significant when compared to the economic loss alleged under the warranty dispute qcases currently in litigation qvehicles not used primarily for family, personal or household purposes (except in states where the Dispute Settlement Board is required to review commercial vehicles) Complaints involving vehicles in which applicable new vehicle limited warranties have expired at receipt of your application are not eligible. Eligibility may differ according to state law. For example, see the unique brochures for California and Wisconsin purchasers/lessees. How Does the Board Work? The Board consists of: qthree consumer representatives qa Ford or Lincoln/Mercury dealer Consumer candidates for Board membership are recruited and trained by an independent consulting firm. Dealers are chosen because of their business leadership qualities. 249
  • 251. What the Board needs To have your case reviewed you must complete the application in the DSB brochure and mail it to the address provided on the application form. Your application is reviewed and, if it is determined to be eligible, you will receive an acknowledgment indicating: qthe file number assigned to your application qthe toll-free phone number of the DSB’s 250 independent administrator Your dealership and a Ford Motor Company representative are asked to submit statements at this time. To review your case properly, the Board needs the following information: qlegible copies of all documents and maintenance or repair orders relevant to the case qthe year, make, model and Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) listed on your vehicle ownership license qthe date of repair(s) and mileage at the time of occurrence(s) qthe current mileage qthe name of the dealer who sold or serviced the vehicle qa brief description of your unresolved concern qa brief summary of the action taken with the dealer and Ford Motor Company
  • 252. qthe names (if known) of all the people you contacted at the dealership qa description of the action you expect to resolve your concern Should your case NOT qualify for review, a letter of explanation will be mailed to you. Oral presentations If the involved vehicle is within 36 months and 36,000 miles of the warranty start date, you have the right to make an oral presentation before the Board. Indicate your choice to do so on the application. Oral presentations may also be requested by the Board. Making a decision Board members will review all available information related to the complaint, including oral presentations, if necessary. They then arrive at a fair and impartial decision, decided by a simple majority vote. Because the Board usually meets only once a month, some cases may take longer than 30 days to be reviewed. The Board makes every effort to resolve each case within 40 days of receiving the consumer application form. After a case is reviewed, the Board mails you a decision letter. The Board also provides a form on which to accept or reject the Board’s decision. The decisions of the Board are binding on the dealer and Ford, but not on consumers who may elect to pursue other remedies available to them under state and federal law. Decisions of the Board may be presented as evidence by any party in subsequent legal proceedings that may be initiated, where allowed by law. 251
  • 253. To Request a DSB Brochure/Application For a brochure/application, speak to your dealer or write to the Board at the following address: Ford of Canada Customer Assistance Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited If you live in Canada and have any questions or concerns that the dealership cannot answer, contact the Customer Assistance Centre. Please have the following information available when contacting the Customer Assistance Centre: qyour telephone number (both business and home) qyour Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) listed on your vehicle ownership license qthe year and make of your vehicle qthe date purchased 252
  • 254. qthe name of the dealer and the city where the dealership is located qthe current mileage on your vehicle Mediation/Arbitration Program (Canada Only) In those cases where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford and the dealer to resolve a factory-related vehicle service concern have been unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada participates in an impartial third party mediation/arbitration program administered by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP). The CAMVAP program is a straight-forward and relatively speedy alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a settlement have failed. This procedure is without cost to you and is designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal proceedings. In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party Arbitrators conduct hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal environment. These impartial Arbitrators review the positions of the parties, make decisions and, where appropriate, render awards to resolve disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair and final as the arbitrator’s award is binding on both you and Ford of Canada. CAMVAP services are available in all territories and provinces, except Quebec. For more information, without charge or obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685. This plan is not available in the province of Quebec. 253
  • 255. Getting Help Outside the U.S. and Canada Before you export your vehicle to a foreign country, contact the appropriate foreign embassy or consulate to make sure local regulations do not prevent you from registering your vehicle. Officials at the embassy can also help you decide whether you should import your vehicle to that country. Officials at the embassy or consulate can tell you where to get unleaded fuel. If you cannot get unleaded fuel or can get only fuel with an anti-knock index that is lower than your vehicle needs, contact a district or owner relations office before you leave the U.S. or Canada. Use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without a proper conversion may damage the effectiveness of your emissions control system and may cause engine knocking or serious engine damage. Ford Motor Company is not responsible for any damage that is caused by use of improper fuel. You may also have difficulty importing your vehicle back into the U.S. if you use leaded fuel. 254
  • 256. If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in Central or South America, the Caribbean, or the Middle East, contact the nearest Ford dealership. If the dealership cannot help you, write to: If you are in other foreign countries, contact the nearest Ford dealership. If the dealership cannot help you, they can direct you to the appropriate Ford affiliate office. If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate outside of the U.S. or Canada, register your Vehicle Identification Number and new address with Ford Motor Company Export Operations. 255
  • 257. 257 Accessories Ford Accessories for Your Vehicle Ford has many fine products available from your dealer to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes. For best results, use the following, or products of equivalent quality: A wide selection of accessories is available through your local authorized dealer. These fine accessories have been engineered specifically to fulfill your automotive needs. They are custom designed to complement the style and aerodynamic appearance of your Ford-built vehicle. In addition, each accessory is made from high quality materials and meets or exceeds Ford’s rigid engineering and safety specifications. That is why Ford brand accessories are warranted for up to 12 months or 12,000 miles (20,000 km), whichever comes first. See your dealer for complete warranty information and accessory availability.
  • 258. Comfort and Convenience Protection and Appearance NOTE: When adding accessories, equipment, 258 passengers, and luggage to your vehicle, do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of the front or rear axle (GVWR, GAWR as shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label). Consult your dealer for specific weight information.
  • 259. 259 NOTE: The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) or the Canadian Radio Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) regulates the use of mobile communications systems — such as two-way radios, telephones, and theft alarms — that are equipped with radio transmitters. Any such equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with FCC or CRTC regulations and should be installed only by a qualified technician. NOTE: Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of your vehicle, particularly if they are not properly designed for automotive use or are not properly installed. For example, when operated, such systems may cause the engine to stumble or stall. In addition, such systems may themselves be damaged or their operation affected by operating your vehicle. (Citizens band [CB] transceivers, garage door openers, and other transmitters whose power output is 5 watts or less will not ordinarily affect your vehicle’s operation.) NOTE: Because we have no control over the installation, design, or manufacture of such systems, Ford cannot assume responsibility for any adverse effects or damage that may result if you use this equipment.
  • 260. 260
  • 261. 265
  • 262. Front Exterior View — GT model 266
  • 263. 267 Rear Exterior View — standard model
  • 269. 273 2.0L Engine Compartment
  • 271. Index 275 Index A ABS warning light (see Anti-lock brake system) . . . . . . . 13 Accessory position on the ignition . . . . . 61 Additives, engine oil . . . . . . . . . . 190 Air bag supplemental restraint system and child safety seats . . . . . . . . . 113 description. . . . . . . . . . . . 104, 106 driver air bag . . . . . . . . . . 104, 106 indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 passenger air bag. . . . . . . . . . . 106 service and information labels . . . . . 106 tone generator . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Air cleaner filter, specifications . . . . . . 237 Air conditioning, electronic automatic temperature control system . . . . . . . 49 Aluminum wheels. . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Antenna, radio (see Electronic sound system) . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 43 Antifreeze (see Engine coolant). . . . . . 196 Anti-lock brake system (ABS) description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 see also Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 warninig light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Assistance (see Customer assistance) . . . 245 Audio system (see Electronic sound system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Autolamp system (see Headlamps) . . . . . 63 Automatic transaxle driving with . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 fluid, adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 fluid, checking . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
  • 272. B Backing up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Basic vehicle warranty . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Battery acid, treating emergencies . . . . . 175, 205 disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 how to service . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 jumping a disabled battery. . . . . . . 174 maintenance-free . . . . . . . . . . . 203 proper disposal, recycling . . . . . . . 205 replacement, specifications . . . . . . . 237 servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 when storing your vehicle . . . . . . . 236 Brake fluid brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . 12 checking and adding . . . . . . . . . 193 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Brakes adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 anti-lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 anti-lock brake system (ABS) warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 applying the brakes . . . . . . . . . . 133 brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . 12 fluid, checking and adding. . . . . . . 193 fluid, refill capacities . . . . . . . . . 193 front disc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 if brakes do not grip well . . . . . . . 133 master cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 new brake linings . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 noise. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 power braking . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 when storing your vehicle . . . . . . . 236 Break-in period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Brights (high beams). . . . . . . . . . . . 15 276 Index
  • 273. Bulbs, replacing halogen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 C Canada, customer assistance . . . . . . . 252 Canada, warranty information . . . . . . . 4 Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Carbon monoxide in exhaust. . . . . . . 130 Car seats for children (see Child safety seats) . . . . . . . . 113 Cassette tape player (see Electronic sound system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . 222 CD player (see Electronic sound system) . . 28 Chains, tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Changing a tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Child safety restraints . . . . . . . . . . 111 child safety seats . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Child safety seats and air bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 attaching with tether straps . . . . . . 122 automatic locking mode (retractor) . . . . . . . . . . . 102, 113 in front seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 in rear outboard seat . . . . . . . . . 113 in rear seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 tether anchorage hardware . . . . . . 122 Chime, safety belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Cleaning your vehicle CD player and discs . . . . . . . . . . 31 chrome and aluminum parts. . . . . . 231 engine compartment . . . . . . . . . 232 exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 exterior lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 fabric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . 49, 231 Index 277
  • 274. Cleaning your vehicle (continued) interior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 interior lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 rear windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 rustproofing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 safety belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 tail lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 upholstery and interior trim . . . . . . 233 washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 waxing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 43 Clutch fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 operation while driving . . . . . . . . 147 recommended shift speeds . . . . . . . 150 shifting the gears . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Cold engine starting . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Combination lap and shoulder belts . . 98, 100 Compact disc player (see Electronic sound system) . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 28 Compact disc radio (see Electronic sound system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Console, description . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Controls, mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Convenience kit in cargo area . . . . . . 169 Coolant (see Engine coolant) checking and adding . . . . . . . . . 196 preparing for storage . . . . . . . . . 236 temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . 18 warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Cooling fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Crankcase emission filter. . . . . . . . . 237 Customer Assistance Center, Ford (U.S.) . . 247 Customer Assistance Centre, Ford of Canada. . . . . . . . . . . . 252 278 Index
  • 275. D Daytime running light system . . . . . . . 63 Defects, reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Dipstick automatic transaxle fluid . . . . . . . 201 engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . 199 Disabled vehicle (see Towing) . . . . . . 179 Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Driving under special conditions heavy load. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 towing a trailer. . . . . . . . . . . . 153 E Electrical system, relays . . . . . . . . . 165 Electronic radio with cassette (see Electronic sound system) . . . . . . 34 Electronic sound system antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 tuning the radio . . . . . . . . . . 23, 37 warranty and service information . . . . 46 Electronic stereo cassette radio (see Electronic sound system) . . . . . . 34 Electronic stereo radio (see Electronic sound system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Emergencies, roadside assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 battery acid spills. . . . . . . . . 175, 206 fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 jump-starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Emergency brake (parking brake). . . . . 134 Emission control system catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . 222 emissions warranty . . . . . . . . . 4, 222 Index 279
  • 276. Engine check engine warning light . . . . . . . 15 does not start. . . . . . . . . . . 128, 130 fuel injected engine, starting . . . . . . 125 fuel pump shut-off switch . . . . . . . 130 preparing to start . . . . . . . . . . . 125 starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 starting after a collision . . . . . . . . 130 storing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 234 Engine block heater . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Engine coolant checking and adding . . . . . . . . . 196 checking hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 disposal . . . . . . . . . . . 184, 193, 203 preparing for storage . . . . . . . . . 236 proper solution . . . . . . . . 184, 193, 203 temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Engine coolant temperature gauge description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 mechanical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Engine coolant temperature gauge:electronic. . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Engine fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Engine:idle speed control. . . . . . . . . 128 Engine oil changing oil and oil filter . . . . . . . 191 checking and adding . . . . . . . . . 191 dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 disposal . . . . . . . . . . . 184, 193, 203 engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . 17 filter, specifications . . . . . . . . . . 237 specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 synthetic oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 “break-in” oils . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Exhaust fumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 280 Index
  • 277. F Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 engine fan, avoiding injury . . . . . . 184 Federal Communications Commission. . . . 45 Federal Highway Administration Regulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Flashers, hazard. . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Flashing the lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Foglamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Ford Customer Assistance Center. . . . . 247 Ford Motor Company of Canada . . . . . 252 Ford of Canada Customer Assistance Centre. . . . . . . . . . . 252 Foreign registration . . . . . . . . . . . 254 French owner guides, how to obtain . . . . 3 Fuel calculating fuel economy . . . . . . . 220 choosing the right fuel . . . . . . . . 217 filling your vehicle with fuel. . . . . . 215 filter, specifications . . . . . . . . . . 237 fuel filler door release lever . . . . . . 215 fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 quality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 running out of fuel . . . . . . . . . . 220 safety information relating to automotive fuels . . . . . . . . . . 219 storing your vehicle. . . . . . . . . . 235 treating emergencies . . . . . . . . . 219 Fuel cap removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 replacing. . . . . . . . . . . . . 215, 217 Fuel filler door remote release . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Fuel filter, specifications . . . . . . . . . 237 Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Index 281
  • 278. Fuel pump shut-off switch engine does not start . . . . . . . . . 130 starting after a collision . . . . . . . . 130 G Gas cap (see Fuel cap) . . . . . . . . . . 215 Gas mileage (see Fuel economy) . . . 217, 220 Gasoline (see Fuel). . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Gauges, Electronic engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . 18 fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Gauges, Mechanical engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . 18 engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . 17 fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 trip odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) calculating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 driving with a heavy load . . . . . . . 151 Gearshift automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . 138 column-mounted . . . . . . . . . . . 138 downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 floor-mounted . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 locking the gearshift. . . . . . . . . . . 61 positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138, 148 shifting the gears . . . . . . . . . 138, 148 upshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Gearshift:shifting the gears . . . . . . 138, 148 GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) calculating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 driving with a heavy load . . . . . . . 151 282 Index
  • 279. H Hazard flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Headlamps aiming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 checking alignment . . . . . . . . . . 226 cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 daytime running lights . . . . . . . . . 63 flashing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 High beams, indicator light . . . . . . . . 15 Hood latch location. . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 working under the hood . . . . . . . 184 Hoses, checking. . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 I Identification Number, Vehicle (VIN) . . . 252 Idle relearning . . . . . . . . . . . . 178, 184 speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Ignition, positions of the ignition . . . . . . 61 Indicator lights and chimes (see Lights) . . . 7 Infant seats (see Safety seats). . . . . 111, 113 Instrument cluster. . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 lighting up panel and interior . . . . . . 58 Interval wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 J Jack operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 positioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Jump-starting your vehicle attaching cables. . . . . . . . . . . . 176 disconnecting cables. . . . . . . . . . 178 Index 283
  • 280. K Keys positions of the ignition . . . . . . . . . 61 stuck in lock position . . . . . . . . . . 61 L Lamps checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 daytime running light system . . . . . . 63 dome lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 flashing the lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . 66 fog lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 hazard flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 instrument panel, dimming . . . . . . . 58 interior lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Lane change indicator (see Turn signal) . . . . . . . . . . 62, 67 Lights, warning and indicator air bag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 anti-lock brakes (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . 13 brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 check engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 engine oil pressure . . . . . . . . . . . 17 hazard warning light . . . . . . . . . 155 high beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 oil pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 rear ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 safety belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 service engine soon . . . . . . . . . . . 15 testing the warning lights . . . . . . . 126 turn signal indicator. . . . . . . . . 62, 67 Load limits GAWR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 trailer towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 284 Index
  • 281. Lug nuts standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 tightening sequence. . . . . . . . . . 170 M Maintenance schedule and record (see separate Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet) . . . . . . . . . . 3 Maintenance (see Servicing) . . . . . . . 183 Maintenance (see servicing) . . . . . . . 183 Manual transaxle backing up (reverse) . . . . . . . . . 149 clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 shifting gears. . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 shift speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Map pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Master cylinder, brakes . . . . . . . . . 193 Mileage, calculating fuel economy . . . . 220 Mirrors rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 side view mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Moon roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Motorcraft parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 N National Highway Traffic Safety Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 New vehicle break-in . . . . . . . . . . . 6 O Octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Odometer description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192, 237 Oil (see Engine oil) . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Index 285
  • 282. Oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 On-board diagnostic (OBD II) system . . . 224 Order forms, service information . . . . . . 24 Overseas offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 P Parking brake operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Parts (see Motorcraft Parts). . . . . . . . 237 PCV valve, specifications. . . . . . . . . 237 Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Power features door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 moon roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Power steering dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 driving with power steering . . . . . . 137 fluid, checking and adding. . . . . . . 199 servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Prop rod, hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 R Radio (see Electronic sound systems) . . . . 21 Rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 washer reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Regulations, National Highway Traffic Safety Administration . . . . . . . . . 243 Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Remote entry system replacement/additional transmitters. . . . 88 replacing the batteries . . . . . . . . . . 87 Reporting safety defects . . . . . . . . . 243 286 Index
  • 283. Restraints, safety (see Safety restraints) adult . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89, 98 child. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 infant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111, 113 Roadside assistance . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Roadside emergencies . . . . . . . . . . 155 Rotating the tires . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 S Safety belts (see Safety restraints). . . . . . 98 Safety defects, reporting . . . . . . . . . 243 Safety information relating to automotive fuels . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Safety restraints adjusting the safety belts . . . . . . . 100 automatic locking mode. . . . . . . . 102 automatic locking mode (retractor) . . . 102 cleaning the safety belts . . . . . . . . 234 extension assembly . . . . . . . . . . 103 for adults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 for children . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 for infants . . . . . . . . . . . . 111, 113 for pregnant women . . . . . . . . 89, 98 head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 lap and shoulder belts . . . . . . . 98, 100 maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 proper use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 warning light and chime . . . . . . . . 11 Safety seats for children and air bags . . . . . . . . . . . 102, 113 attaching with tether straps . . . . . . 122 automatic locking mode (retractor) . . . . . . . . . . . 102, 113 in front seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 in rear outboard . . . . . . . . . . . 113 in rear seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 tether anchorage hardware . . . . . . 122 Index 287
  • 284. Seat belts (see Safety restraints). . . . . . . 98 Seats child safety seats . . . . . . . . . . . 113 cleaning upholstery . . . . . . . . . . 233 folding rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 rear seat access . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 split-folding rear seat . . . . . . . . . . 96 Serial number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Service concerns. . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Servicing your vehicle precautions when servicing . . . . . . 184 servicing when you tow . . . . . . . . 179 Shift positions (see Gearshift). . . . . 138, 148 Shoulder and lap belts (see Safety restraints) . . . . . . . 98, 100 Shoulder belts (see Safety restraints). . . . 100 Side mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Sliding moon roof (see Moon roof) . . . . . 74 Snow tires and chains . . . . . . . . . . 214 Spare tire changing the tire . . . . . . . . . 167, 170 conventional spare . . . . . . . . . . 169 finding the spare . . . . . . . . . . . 169 removing the spare tire . . . . . . . . 169 storing the flat tire . . . . . . . . 169, 171 temporary spare . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Spark plugs, specifications . . . . . . . . 237 Speed control, turning off . . . . . . . . . 72 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Starting your vehicle preparing to start your vehicle . . . . . 125 starting a cold engine . . . . . . . . . 127 starting after a collision . . . . . . . . 130 starting a warm engine . . . . . . . . 127 starting your vehicle if the battery is disabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Steering, power . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Steering wheel, locking. . . . . . . . . . . 61 Storage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . 80 288 Index
  • 285. Storage compartments (continued) center console . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 map pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Storing your vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . 234 Sunroof (moon roof). . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Supplemental air bag readiness light . . . . 11 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) . . . 104 T Tachometer mechanical cluster . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Tail lamps bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 225 cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Temperature control (see Climate control) . . 49 Testing the warning lights . . . . . . . . 126 Tether anchor installation (see Child restraints) . . . . . . . . . 122 Tires changing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 checking the pressure . . . . . . . . . 208 cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 inspection and maintenance . . . . 208, 210 replacing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 rotating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 snow tires and chains . . . . . . . . . 214 spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 storing your vehicle. . . . . . . . . . 236 tire grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 wear bands . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 wheel and tire matching. . . . . . . . 212 Towing a trailer (see Trailer towing) . . . 153 Towing your vehicle using wheel dollies . . . . . . . . . . 179 with a tow truck . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Transaxle automatic operation. . . . . . . . . . 138 fluid, checking and adding (automatic) . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Index 289
  • 286. Transaxle control switch . . . . . . . . . 143 Trip odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Tune-up specifications (VECI). . . . . . . 224 Turn signal indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 lever. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 67 U Upshift speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Used engine oil, disposal. . . . . 184, 193, 203 V Variable interval wipers . . . . . . . . . . 68 VECI (Vehicle Emission Control Information) decal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . 252 Vehicle loading automatic transaxles. . . . . . . . . . 152 calculating the load . . . . . . . . . . 152 manual transaxles. . . . . . . . . . . 152 understanding loading information . . . 151 Vehicle storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Ventilating your vehicle (see Climate control) . . . . . . . . . . 49 Viscosity (see Engine oil). . . . . . . . . 190 W Warm engine, starting . . . . . . . . . . 127 Warning chimes, safety belt . . . . . . . . 11 Warning lights, testing. . . . . . . . . . 126 Warning lights (see Lights). . . . . . . . . 7 Warranties basic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Canada. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 290 Index
  • 287. Warranty Information Booklet . . . . . . . 4 Washer fluid rear window reservoir . . . . . . . . 195 reservoir. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 windshield. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Weight limits (GAWR, GVWR) . . . . . . 151 Wheel and tire matching. . . . . . . . . 212 Wheel dollies (see Towing). . . . . . . . 179 Wheels cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 inspection and maintenance . . . . . . 208 lug nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Windows one-touch down . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 power windows, operating . . . . . . . 77 Windshield, washing . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Windshield washer fluid and wipers checking and adding fluid. . . . . . . 195 liftgate reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . 195 operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 reservoir. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 variable interval wipers . . . . . . . . . 68 Windshield wipers and washer. . . . . . . 68 Wrecker towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Index 291